Doc PKG Vol II - O&M Manual (Rev 0)

GE Water & Process
Technologies
3239 Dundas Street West
Oakville, ON, Canada
L6M 4B2
Phone: 905-465-3030
Fax: 905-465-3050
Email: gewater.technicalsupport@ge.com
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SYSTEM: ZeeWeed Wastewater Treatment System
CLIENT: Town of Taos MBR
LOCATION: Town of Taos, NM
PROJECT: 200443
REVISION: 0
DATE: August, 2011
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual
property rights, data, know-how, trade secrets or licenses of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively for the addressee for the purposes of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means, or to authorize any of the above, without the
express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
* Trademark of General Electric Company; may be registered in one or more countries.
This page has been
intentionally left blank
200443 Town of Taos MBR GE Water & Process Technologies
ZeeWeed Wastewater Treatment System Operation & Maintenance Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
List of Effective Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Tagged Components Within This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Section 1 - General Safety

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2 Personal Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1 Personal Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1.1 Head & Facial Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2.1.2 Limb Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.1.3 Fall Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.2.2 Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.3 Safety on Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.3.1 General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.3.2 Safety Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.3.3 Electrical & Thermal Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.3.4 Mechanical & Chemical Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.3.5 Pinch & Fall Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.3.6 Noise & Vision Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.3.7 Pressure & Rupture Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.3.8 Bacterial Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.4 High-Risk Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
1.4.1 Locking Out Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
1.4.2 Entering Confined Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Section 2 - System Overview

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.2 System Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.3 Primary Subsystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.1 Pretreatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2 ZeeWeed Ultrafiltration Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2.1 ZeeWeed Trains & Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.3.2.2 Sludge Wasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.3.2.3 Aeration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.3.2.4 Air Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.3.3 Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Rev. 0 i
August, 2011
GE Water & Process Technologies 200443 Town of Taos MBR
Operation & Maintenance Manual ZeeWeed Wastewater Treatment System
Section 3 - Operating the System

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2 Using the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2.1 Power Control Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2.1.1 Control Panel Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2.1.2 System Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
3.2.2 Using the HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.2.2.1 Accessing the HMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.2.2.2 Understanding the HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.3 Starting Up the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.3.1 Common Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.3.2 ZeeWeed UF Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.4 Triggering an Alarm Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.5 Resuming Operation Following an Alarm Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
3.6 Controlling Specific Components Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.6.1 Accessing Component Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.6.2 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.6.3 Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.6.3.1 Process Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.6.3.2 Chemical Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.4 Air Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.7 System Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.8 Logging Out of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3.9 Shutting Down the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Section 4 - Control Documentation
Section 5 - Recommended Spare Parts List
Section 6 - Material Safety Data Sheets
Section 7 - Service & Support

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7.2 Contacting GE W&PT Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7.3 MyZENON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
7.4 Available Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
7.4.1 ZenoTrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
7.4.2 Site Visits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
7.4.3 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
ii Rev. 0
August, 2011
Section 8 - Glossary
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
8.2 Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
8.3 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Appendix A - ZeeWeed 500D

A.1 - Cautions
A.1.1 Cautions Specific to This Subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
A.2 - Subsystem Overview

A.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5
A.2.2 Membrane Fibers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
A.2.3 Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
A.2.4 Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
A.2.5 Theory Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
A.2.5.1 Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
A.2.5.2 ZeeWeed Ultrafiltration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.3 - Installation & Testing

A.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.3.2 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A.3.3 Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.4 Receiving Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.4.1 Unloading Cassettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A.3.4.2 Confirming Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.4.3 Confirming Handling Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A.3.5 Storing Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A.3.5.1 Storing Crated Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.5.2 Storing Bagged Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A.3.5.3 Storing Wetted Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A.3.5.4 Storing Wetted Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.6 Preventing Debris Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
A.3.7 Uncrating and Installing Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.3.7.1 Preparing the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A.3.7.2 Installing Leveling Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A.3.7.3 Maneuvering the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A.3.7.4 Uncrating Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
A.3.7.4.1 Removing the Cassette Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A.3.7.5 Moving Uncrated Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A.3.7.6 Inspecting the ZeeWeed 500D Cassette - Inspection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A.3.7.7 Installing Union to Cassette’s Main Aeration Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.3.7.8 Uprighting a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A.3.7.8.1 Removing the Cassette from the Wooden Skid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Rev. 0 iii
August, 2011
A.3.7.8.2 Uprighting Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38

A.3.7.9 Installing Cassette Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A.3.7.10 Removing the Plastic Wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A.3.7.11 Removing the Protective Foam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A.3.7.12 Inspecting the ZeeWeed 500D Cassette - Inspection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
A.3.7.13 Assembling Aeration Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A.3.8 Installing Cassettes in the Membrane Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A.3.8.1 Installing Permeate and Air Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A.3.8.2 Connecting Permeate Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A.3.8.3 Connecting Air Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A.3.9 After Cassette Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.9.1 Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.9.1.1 Purging Glycerin From Membranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A.3.9.2 Checking Aeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A.3.9.3 Testing Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A.3.9.4 Bubble Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A.3.9.4.1 Bubble Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A.3.10 Membrane Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
A.3.10.1 Heavy Cassette Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
A.3.11 Returning Damaged Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
A.3.12 System Shutdown and Membrane Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.3.12.1 Short Term Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A.3.12.2 Long Term Membrane Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A.4 - Membrane Care

A.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2 Membrane Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2.1 Effects of Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A.4.2.2 Foulant Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
A.4.2.3 Preventing Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
A.4.2.4 Removing Foulants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
A.4.3 Fiber Slack & Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A.4.3.1 Factors Which Cause Fiber Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A.4.3.2 Results of Fiber Shrinkage & Insufficient Slack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
A.4.3.3 Adjusting Fiber Slack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A.4.3.3.1 Before Removing the Cassette for Slack Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A.4.3.3.2 Tools/Parts Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A.4.3.3.3 Definitions and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A.4.3.3.4 Slack Adjustment Procedure - Preliminary Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A.4.3.3.5 Adjustment for the Front/Back Beams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
A.4.3.3.6 Adjustment for the Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
A.4.4 Module Removal from a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
A.4.4.1 Manpower and Time Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
A.4.4.1.1 Tool Preparation - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
A.4.4.2 Tool Preparation – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A.4.4.2.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
iv Rev. 0
August, 2011
A.4.4.2.2 Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94

A.4.5 Installation of Modules into the Cassette Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
A.4.5.1 Manpower Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
A.4.5.2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A.4.5.3 Checking for Slack Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A.4.5.4 Unpacking the Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A.4.5.5 Installing the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.5.1 Preliminary Inspection and Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.5.2 Installing the Top Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A.4.5.5.3 Installing the Bottom Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
A.4.5.5.4 Completing the Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
A.4.5.5.5 Tightening the Expanders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
A.4.5.6 Final Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
A.4.5.7 Returning Damaged Membranes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
A.4.6 Repairing Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
A.4.6.1 Axial Silicone Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
A.4.6.2 Subjacent Silicone Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
A.5 - Cleaning & Ventilation

A.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117
A.5.2 Cleaning Chemicals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117
A.5.3 Preparing Cleaning Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
A.5.4 Frequency of Cleans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
A.5.5 Cleaning Logsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
A.5.6 Types of Cleans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
A.5.6.1 Backpulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
A.5.6.1.1 Initiating A Backpulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
A.5.6.2 Relax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
A.5.6.3 Maintenance Clean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
A.5.6.3.1 Scheduling a Maintenance Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
A.5.6.3.2 Performing a Maintenance Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
A.5.6.4 Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
A.5.6.4.1 Preparing for a Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
A.5.6.4.2 Performing a Recovery Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
A.5.6.5 Neutralization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
A.5.7 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
A.6 - Monitoring Membrane Integrity

A.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
A.6.2 Membrane Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
A.6.3 Turbidimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
A.7 - Preventive Maintenance

A.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
A.7.2 Scheduling Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
A.7.3 General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137
Rev. 0 v
August, 2011
A.7.3.1 Gathering & Recording Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137

A.7.3.2 Inspection Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137
A.7.3.3 Before Removing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138
A.7.3.3.1 Checking Aeration Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138
A.7.3.3.2 Checking Lines & Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138
A.7.3.4 Removing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139
A.7.3.5 After Removing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140
A.7.3.6 Reporting Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
A.7.4 Inspecting Module Interconnecting Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
A.7.5 Preventing Stainless Steel Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
A.7.5.1 Causes of Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
A.7.5.2 Preventing Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
A.7.5.3 Detecting, Cleaning, & Repairing Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
A.7.5.3.1 Detecting Embedded Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
A.7.5.3.2 Cleaning & Repairing Surface Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
A.8 - Troubleshooting
A.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-151
A.8.2 Troubleshooting Quick-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152
A.8.3 Permeate Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
A.8.3.1 Membrane Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
A.8.3.2 Cassette Seal Leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
A.8.4 Process Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155
A.8.5 Backpulse Tank Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
A.8.6 Air Release Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157
A.8.7 General Component Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159
A.9 - Monitoring Performance

A.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163
A.9.2 Logsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163
A.9.3 ZenoTrac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163
A.10 - Calculations
A.10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
A.10.2 Unit Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
A.10.3 General Dosing Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
A.10.4 Calculating Membrane Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170
vi Rev. 0
August, 2011
LIST OF TABLES
Table i.i - Tagged Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Table 1.1 - Safety Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Table 2.1 - System Design Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
Table 8.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
Table A.2.1 - Module Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-7
Table A.2.2 - Cassette Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-9
Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
Table A.4.2 - Pin Location and Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118
Table A.7.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136
Table A.7.2 - Ingredients of the Ferroxyl Test Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
Table A.7.3 - Effective Cleaning Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
Table A.8.1 - Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153
Table A.10.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-168
Table A.10.2 - Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170
Table A.10.3 - Water Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171
Rev. 0 vii
August, 2011
This page has been
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure A.2.1 - Typical ZeeWeed System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Figure A.2.2 - ZeeWeed 500D Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-6
Figure A.2.3 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-8
Figure A.2.4 - Filtration Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A.2.5 - ZeeWeed Membrane Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Figure A.2.6 - ZeeWeed Membrane Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A.3.1 - Shipping Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Figure A.3.2 - Top of Crate Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Figure A.3.3 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Figure A.3.4 - Bag Sealing the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Figure A.3.5 - Removing the Cassette Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Figure A.3.6 - Cassette Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Figure A.3.7 - Aerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Figure A.3.8 - Union Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Figure A.3.9 - Hoist Ring Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Figure A.3.10 - Hoist Ring Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Figure A.3.11 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point Lift Frame and Spreader Bar. . A-37
Figure A.3.12 - Uprighting a Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Figure A.3.13 - Cassette Arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Figure A.3.14 - Installed Cassette Arms with Lifting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Figure A.3.15 - Cutting the Wrapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Figure A.3.16 - Removing the Protective Foam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Figure A.3.17 - Tighten Expander Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
Figure A.3.18 - Aeration Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Figure A.3.19 - Lifting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
Figure A.3.20 - Permeate and Air Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
Figure A.3.21 - Cassette Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Figure A.3.22 - Air Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Figure A.3.23 - Bubble Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Figure A.4.1 - Solids Accumulation Between Fibers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
Figure A.4.2 - Correct (Left) & Incorrect (Right) Slack for ZeeWeed 500D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
Figure A.4.3 - Water Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Figure A.4.4 - Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Figure A.4.5 - Loosen Support Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
Figure A.4.6 - Locked and Unlocked Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
Figure A.4.7 - Remove the Aeration Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Figure A.4.8 - Module Slid Out of Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Figure A.4.9 - Modules Removed From These Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Figure A.4.10 - Removing the Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Figure A.4.11 - Front Adjustable Bottom Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Figure A.4.12 - Adjusting the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Figure A.4.13 - Align the Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Rev. 0 ix
August, 2011
Figure A.4.14 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82

Figure A.4.15 - Tighten the Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Figure A.4.16 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Figure A.4.17 - Insert Jacking Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
Figure A.4.18 - Drill Out Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Figure A.4.19 - Flush Away Debris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Figure A.4.20 - Remove Center Beam Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
Figure A.4.21 - Adjust the Center Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
Figure A.4.22 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Figure A.4.23 - Torque the Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
Figure A.4.24 - Tighten Support Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
Figure A.4.25 - Module Removal Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Figure A.4.26 - Pin Removal From The Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Figure A.4.27 - Pin Removal From The Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Figure A.4.28 - Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Figure A.4.29 - Standard and Repaired Header (Repair Adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Figure A.4.30 - Installation Assistance From The Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Figure A.4.31 - Installation Assistance From The Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Figure A.4.32 - Prohibited Removal Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Figure A.4.33 - Attach the Removal Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Figure A.4.34 - Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Figure A.4.35 - Turn Rotating Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
Figure A.4.36 - Module Removal Handle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Figure A.4.37 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
Figure A.4.38 - Correct Position of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
Figure A.4.39 - Module Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
Figure A.4.40 - Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
Figure A.4.41 - Handling the Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Figure A.4.42 - Aligning the Rail on the Module with the Cassette Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Figure A.4.43 - Turning the Bottom Header Sideways During Installation . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
Figure A.4.44 - Inserting the Bottom Header. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
Figure A.4.45 - Locating Nipples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
Figure A.4.46 - Lock Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
Figure A.4.47 - Tightening Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Figure A.4.48 - Membrane Fiber Cut Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Figure A.4.49 - Axial Silicone Injection (One of Four) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Figure A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection (Two of Four) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
Figure A.4.51 - Axial Silicone Injection (Three of Four) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
Figure A.4.52 - Axial Silicone Injection (Four of Four) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111
Figure A.4.53 - Subjacent Silicone Injection (One of Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
Figure A.4.54 - Subjacent Silicone Injection (Two of Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-113
Figure A.7.1 - Water Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140
Figure A.7.2 - Levelling Pins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141
Figure A.7.3 - Acceptable (Left) & Unacceptable (Right) Solids Accumulation . . . . . . . . A-141
Figure A.7.4 - Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
x Rev. 0
August, 2011
Figure A.7.5 - Bottom Permeate Port (Left), Top Permeate Saddle (Centre) & Location of Port
& Saddle (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142
Figure A.7.6 - Aerator Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Figure A.7.7 - MIS Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Figure A.7.8 - Locking Key Locked (Left) & Unlocked (Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Figure A.7.9 - Locking Pin Locked (Left) & Unlocked (Right). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
Figure A.7.10 - Module Header, Showing Wear Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
Figure A.10.1 - Dosing Calculation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
Rev. 0 xi
August, 2011
This page has been
PREFACE
This manual provides installation, operation, maintenance, and
ownership information for the Town of Taos MBR ZeeWeed WWTP. It
should be read and internalized in its entirety by all operators.
Failure to adhere to the instructions provided in this manual may

result in severe injury or damage to property, and may render the
warranty null and void.
USING THIS MANUAL

Sections 1 - 8 of this manual provide a high-level description of the
system’s overall design and functionality. Information specific to
individual subsystems can be found in the accompanying appendices.
Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for information regarding
individual components, such as pumps and valves.
TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS
Typographical conventions used within this manual are defined as
follows:
Bold - indicates a control with which the reader is required to interact.
Bold italicized - indicates important information.
UPPERCASE - indicates the name of a mode or state of operation.
Rev. 0 xiii
August, 2011
Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

could result in property damage.

could result in minor or moderate injury.

could result in severe injury or death.
Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided, will

result in severe injury or death.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

When updating this document, insert new pages and dispose of
outdated versions before recording all changes using the tables below.
Record the date of each change in the following table:
Change Date Change Date Change Date

0 (original) 4 8
1 5 9
2 6 10
3 7 11
xiv Rev. 0
August, 2011
TAGGED COMPONENTS WITHIN THIS

MANUAL
The following table lists the tag numbers associated with various system
components mentioned within this manual.
Table i.i - Tagged Components

Component Quantity Tag Number
Ultrafiltration
Process pump 4 (20-P-301-1/2/3/4)
Membrane tank 4 (20-TK-201-1/2/3/4)
Backpulse tank 1 (20-TK-601)
Citric acid pump 2 (23-P-330-10/11)
Sodium hypochlorite pump 2 (23-P-130-10/11)
Rev. 0 xv
August, 2011
This page has been
SECTION 1
GENERAL SAFETY
This page has been
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides general personal and environmental safety
information that applies to all personnel required to work with or around
the system.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for chemicals provided by GE W&PT

can be found in Section 6 - Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs for
chemicals provided by other manufacturers may be inserted there as
well). Safety information for specific components can be found in
Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
Failure by facility management or operators to adhere to the

information provided in this section may put personnel at significant
risk of injury.
1.2 PERSONAL SAFETY

The following sections provide general guidelines regarding personal
safety and cleanliness. Refer to local codes and regulations for more
detailed information.
1.2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

The equipment listed here constitutes the minimum scope of protective
gear that should be available to all operators. Local codes and
regulations may require the use of additional equipment beyond what
is mentioned below.
1.2.1.1 HEAD & FACIAL PROTECTION

• At all times while in the plant operating area, wear a hard hat and
safety glasses with side shields.
Rev. 0 General Safety

August, 2011 1-1
• When handling chemicals or working near pressurized lines, (air

and liquid), wear a full face shield.
• When exposed to noise levels that exceed 85 dB, wear adequate

hearing protection.
1.2.1.2 LIMB PROTECTION

• When working near pinch or thermal hazards, wear protective
gloves. When handling chemicals, wear chemical-resistant
gloves.
• At all times while in the plant operating area, wear safety boots
with steel toe and shank inserts.
1.2.1.3 FALL PROTECTION

• When working in a position where the possibility of falling a
significant distance (approximately 3 m (10 ft)) is present, wear an
approved safety harness in accordance with local safety
requirements. The harness safety line should not allow the
person to fall more than 1.5 m (5 ft) before arresting the fall.
1.2.2 CLEANLINESS
A water treatment plant poses a number of potential health hazards that
make consistent personal and site cleanliness practices essential.
Immunization protects against infection, but common sense and care
are required at all times when in the plant operating area.
Do not expose cuts or open sores to feedwater, and ensure that hands
are washed with an antibacterial soap on a regular basis, especially
prior to eating, drinking, or smoking.
General Safety Rev. 0

1-2 August, 2011
1.3 SAFETY ON SITE

The following sections provide information regarding general site safety
and proper conduct during various procedures that may be performed
onsite. This information is not intended to replace or override local codes
and regulations.
1.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

The following list provides general recommendations intended to ensure
the safety of personnel working in and around the plant operating area:
• Ensure that all personnel have been made familiar with the
proper operating procedures described in this manual and the
accompanying Volume I - Vendor Data Manual. In particular,
procedures related to the handling of acidic or caustic chemicals
and the maintenance of pressurized lines or components with
rotating parts should be emphasized.
• Ensure that safety shower and eye wash stations are operational
and in close proximity to areas where chemicals will be used.
Consider installing an alarm (visible and audible throughout the
plant operating area) that will activate if an emergency shower or
eye wash station is used.
• Install flange guards on all chemical lines.
• Install spray curtains or Plexiglas shields around all chemical

skids and ensure that dilution stations are available nearby in
case of a chemical spray or leak.
• Ensure that chemical-resistant protective clothing is worn by all

personnel working near acidic or caustic substances, or
components that may contain such substances.
• When preparing to perform maintenance on pipes or tubing,

ensure that all connected lines are either isolated or emptied.

August, 2011 1-3
• Ensure that all personnel working with hazardous chemicals are

properly trained and familiar with both government and plant-
specific safety requirements.
• Ensure that areas where chemicals will be handled are well lit
and that access is not restricted.
• Personnel engaged in a procedure that involves obvious risk of

injury (example: entering a confined space) should work under
the supervision of a colleague prepared to provide assistance if
required.
• Personnel engaged in a procedure they do not feel properly

trained for must cease action immediately and seek advice from
a supervisor.
1.3.2 SAFETY CHECKLIST

Prior to initial system startup, review the following list and ensure that all
items are confirmed by both the plant supervisor and an appointed GE
W&PT representative.
Table 1.1 - Safety Checklist

Task Plant GE W&PT
Test all safety showers and eye wash stations [ ] [ ]
Ensure that all chemical flange guards are fitted properly [ ] [ ]
Post contact information for emergency services in a highly [ ] [ ]
visible location
Ensure that all operators are familiar with applicable safe [ ] [ ]
workplace practices and regulations
Confirm all pump shutoff and emergency kill-switch locations [ ] [ ]
Confirm that all components are properly tagged [ ] [ ]
Ensure adequate space and lighting around all components [ ] [ ]
Supply all required chemical protective gear, including full-face [ ] [ ]
shields, rubber suits, and gloves; and store near chemical skids
Ensure all components are clean and undamaged [ ] [ ]
Provide adequate ventilation to all plant locations [ ] [ ]
Ensure that a system for maintaining up-to-date operating [ ] [ ]
records is in place
Ensure that guidelines are in place to prevent operating [ ] [ ]
temperatures from exceeding maximum limits

1-4 August, 2011
1.3.3 ELECTRICAL & THERMAL HAZARDS
Only qualified personnel should perform installation and

maintenance procedures for electrical components.
SERVICING ENERGIZED COMPONENTS: Even with the power switch in the OFF
position, certain components inside a control panel or other electrical
device may remain energized. No service work can be performed until
the power supply to the device is first disconnected.
HEATED SURFACES: Areas on certain components, such as pumps, can

become heated to the point where contact with skin will inflict severe
burns. Ensure that all safety guards and other protective measures are
in place and familiarize personnel working with or around such
components with the relevant documentation in Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual.
1.3.4 MECHANICAL & CHEMICAL HAZARDS

MSDSS: For ease of reference, add MSDSs for chemicals purchased from
suppliers other than GE W&PT to Section 6 - Material Safety Data Sheets.
PUMPS: When working with or around pumps, take the following

precautions:
• Before performing maintenance, isolate and drain all piping

connected to a pump.
• Before performing maintenance, turn off power to a pump and

complete all lockout procedures required by government and
plant-specific regulations, as well as any included in Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual. Refer to 1.4.1 Locking Out Components for
more information.
• After completing maintenance, replace any guards or other

safety components removed during the procedure.

August, 2011 1-5
• Personnel working on pumps used to transfer chemicals must be

familiar with the safe-handling procedures associated with the
chemicals involved.
• When working with diaphragm pumps used to transfer

chemicals, be aware that some media may remain within the
pump’s diaphragm chamber even after the pump has been
drained.
1.3.5 PINCH & FALL HAZARDS
Exposed rotating parts can catch clothing, fingers, or tools and cause
severe personal injury or death.
ROTATING COMPONENTS: Before operating components with rotating parts

or other possible pinch hazards, ensure that all shields, guards, and
emergency kill-switches are in place.
FALL HAZARDS: Fall hazards include any situation where the possibility of
either personnel or equipment falling from a significant height
(approximately 3 m (10 ft)) is present. Ensure that personnel exposed to
this risk are secured using a harness as described in 1.2.1 Personal
Protective Equipment, and that all equipment involved is stored and
handled in a way that prevents it from falling.
1.3.6 NOISE & VISION HAZARDS

HEARING PROTECTION: Extended exposure to noise levels greater than 85
dB can be harmful to human hearing. When the possibility of exposure
to such noise levels is present, use adequate hearing protection at all
times.
Exposure to UV lamps can cause severe burns to skin and eyes.

1-6 August, 2011
ULTRAVIOLET (UV) LAMPS: Do not look directly at UV lamps or operate UV

lamps outside of the UV disinfection chamber.
1.3.7 PRESSURE & RUPTURE HAZARDS

Some pumps and compressors are capable of pressurizing lines to as
much as 1,000 psi, and the danger of an explosion due to
overpressurization may arise if proper operating procedures are not
observed. In particular, pressure relief valves should be checked
regularly, and tubing used to convey pressurized air, such as actuated
valve air lines (typically operated at 80 psi), should be regularly
inspected for cracks.
1.3.8 BACTERIAL HAZARDS

Personnel should take every measure to avoid contact with or ingestion
of feedwater. If brought into contact with feedwater, eyes should be
immediately rinsed at an eye wash station and exposed skin should be
cleaned thoroughly with soap and warm water, particularly before
eating, drinking, or smoking. If feedwater is ingested, notify a supervisor
immediately.
GE W&PT recommends that all employees working in a water treatment

plant should be vaccinated for tetanus and hepatitis A and B.
Any concerns about possible infection should be brought to the

attention of a medical physician immediately.
1.4 HIGH-RISK PROCEDURES
The procedures described in this section pose a significant risk to

personnel involved. The possibility of severe injury or death will be
significant if the instructions provided below, as well as all relevant
plant and local regulatory practices, are not followed.

August, 2011 1-7
1.4.1 LOCKING OUT COMPONENTS

When preparing to lock out a device for service, replacement, or repair,
ensure the following:
• All relevant local guidelines and procedures must be observed.
• Only operators qualified to work with the device should perform

a lockout procedure.
• Lockout tags should be applied before performing the lockout

procedure and should be removed only after work has been
completed and by the person who applied them.
1.4.2 ENTERING CONFINED SPACES

Any area characterized by one or more of the following features should
be considered a confined space:
• The accumulation of hazardous gases, vapors, dust, fumes,

biological contaminants, or the creation of an oxygen-deficient
atmosphere may occur.
• A space not intended for frequent or extended human

occupancy.
• Access is gained through a restricted entry as a result of design,

orientation, or location.
GE W&PT strongly recommends that any personnel required to enter a

confined space first complete an official confined space entry training
program.
Prior to entering a confined space, ensure that the following equipment

is available and functional:
• Gas detector.
• Tripod.
• Body harness and safety line.

1-8 August, 2011
• Charged cellular phone and list of emergency numbers.
• Portable ventilator and generator.
• Suitable breathing apparatus.
• Protective clothing (if exposure to harmful substances is

possible).
• Ladder (where required).
• Flashlight and alarm horn (where required).
• Manhole opener (where required).
• Traffic control equipment (where required).
The above list of required equipment may vary according to local

regulations. Any item that does not pass inspection or which cannot be
calibrated properly must be replaced or repaired before work may begin.

August, 2011 1-9
This page has been
SECTION 2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This page has been
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides a high-level description of the Town of Taos MBR
ZeeWeed WWTP, including information about the system’s performance
specifications, structure, and production process.
Detailed information about the design and operation of specific

subsystems can be found in the accompanying appendices. Technical
illustrations are provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder.
2.2 SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

The Town of Taos MBR ZeeWeed WWTP is designed with an average
treated water (permeate) flowrate of 2.0 MGD. Refer to Table 2.1 - System
Design Summary for a general overview of the system’s specifications.
Table 2.1 - System Design Summary

Design Flow Permeate
Average daily flow 2.0 MGD
Maximum daily flow 3.0 MGD
Physical Parameters Value

ZeeWeed membrane type 500D
Total number of trains 4
Number of installed cassettes/train 4
Number of modules/cassette 3 cassettes with 48 modules and 1
cassette with 30 modules
Total number of modules/train 174
Module surface area 340 ft2
Rev. 0 System Overview

August, 2011 2-1
2.3 PRIMARY SUBSYSTEMS

The following sections provide a brief description of the primary
subsystems that compose the Town of Taos MBR ZeeWeed WWTP, and
describe the order of subsystems that mixed liquor moves through as it
is processed.
Information regarding specific components used in the subsystems

described below has been created and supplied by the third-party
vendors who manufactured the component, and is provided in Volume I
- Vendor Data Manual.
GE W&PT has not independently verified information provided by

vendors and offers no representations or warranties of any kind, express
or implied, as to its quality, suitability, accuracy, timeliness, or
completeness. GE W&PT does not accept liability for the consequences
of any action or inaction taken on the basis of information provided by
third-party vendors.
2.3.1 PRETREATMENT
All components and processes included upstream of the system inlet
valve have been provided by others and cannot be accurately
documented within this manual.
2.3.2 ZEEWEED ULTRAFILTRATION MEMBRANES

The following sections provide an outline of the ZeeWeed Ultrafiltration
(UF) subsystem.
2.3.2.1 ZEEWEED TRAINS & MEMBRANES

ZeeWeed membranes, which consist of bundles of hollow fibers, are
suspended in the mixed liquor and operate under a negative pressure
created within the hollow membrane fibers by the process pump (20-P-
301-1/2/3/4). This negative pressure draws permeate through the
membranes, leaving contaminants behind in the membrane tank.
System Overview Rev. 0

2-2 August, 2011
The process pump (20-P-301-1/2/3/4) moves permeate to a common

permeate discharge header and then on to the Backpulse tank, from
where it is discharged depending on the downstream demand.
For information regarding ZeeWeed train layout, including the number

of membrane modules in this system, refer to Volume III - Drawings
Binder. Additional information about membrane specifications and
performance parameters is provided within this manual.
2.3.2.2 SLUDGE WASTING

In order to maintain a good membrane performance, the operator has
to waste sludge from the membrane tanks. The operator should analyze
the sludge to ensure a mixed liquor concentration of less than 10,000
mg/L.
2.3.2.3 AERATION SYSTEM

Blowers introduce air into the membrane tank near the bottom of the
membranes to create turbulence within the mixed liquor. This aeration
scours the outside of the membrane fibers and also oxidizes iron and
organic compounds.
This system uses sequential aeration process, wherein the valves cycle
air between the trains. This limits the amount of air required to operate
the system and so reduces operating costs. The plant control system
automatically determines which trains should run in 10/10 aeration and
10/30 aeration, based on the system performance
Aeration enhances the functionality of the membrane system and must

be performed whenever the system is operating. If the system is shut
down, blowers must be manually activated for a minimum of one 30-
minute span every 24 hours.
2.3.2.4 AIR EXTRACTION

An ejector is used to intermittently remove air from the permeate
header. This process, known as “priming,” prevents large pockets of air
from being drawn into the process pump (20-P-301-1/2/3/4).
Rev. 0 System Overview

August, 2011 2-3
The ejector uses compressed air flowing through an orifice to create a

vacuum (the Venturi effect). Permeate (liquid) entering the ejector is
discharged to drain along with the ejected air.
It is not usually necessary to reprime the system if air accumulates in

the permeate header during production. However, if the amount of
accumulated air becomes significant and begins to affect pump
performance, additional priming at the beginning of backpulse/relax
and intermittently during production could be selected by the
operator at the HMI.
2.3.3 CONTROL INTERFACE

Most processes involved in operating the system can be overseen by the
operator at the HMI, which consists of a panel-mounted touchscreen
located at the system control panel.
For more information about controlling the system through the HMI,
refer to Section 3 - Operating the System. For information about the
electrical connections within the control panel, or about the specific
components it contains, refer to Volume III - Drawings Binder or to
Volume I - Vendor Data Manual, respectively.
System Overview Rev. 0

2-4 August, 2011
SECTION 3
OPERATING THE SYSTEM
This page has been
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides general information regarding the standard
operating procedures (SOPs) used to start up and operate the various
subsystems and individual components that comprise this system.
For detailed information regarding a particular subsystem, refer to the

accompanying appendices. For information about a specific
component, such as a pump or valve, refer to Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual.
3.2 USING THE CONTROL PANEL

The following section describes the controls and indicators found on the
system control panel, as well as how to access the HMI and use it to
control the system.
3.2.1 POWER CONTROL HARDWARE

The control panel disconnect switch, system stop button, and pilot light
are located on the outside of the control panel.
3.2.1.1 CONTROL PANEL DISCONNECT SWITCH

The disconnect switch can be used to cut power to the control panel,
which will in turn de-energize the PLC and any components controlled
by the PLC.
3.2.1.2 SYSTEM STOP BUTTON

TIP: All manually Pressing the system stop button immediately places all PLC-controlled
operated components components into OFF mode. After this button is pulled back out,
will retain pre-
shutdown status. operation will resume automatically in accordance with the startup
Components in AUTO sequence outlined in the CLC provided in Section 4 - Control
mode will remain in
AUTO mode. Documentation. A power-up status bar will display on the HMI as
operation resumes.
Rev. 0 Operating the System

August, 2011 3-1
3.2.2 USING THE HMI

The HMI is the operator’s primary means of controlling many of the
processes involved in system operation. Using the HMI, the operator can
adjust the operating modes of various components, set schedules and
setpoints, and monitor system status and performance levels.
3.2.2.1 ACCESSING THE HMI

TIP: Depending on To access the HMI controls, perform the following steps:
the operator’s security
access level, some
system controls may 1. At the control panel, ensure that power is ON.
not be available.
2. At the HMI, ensure that the screen displays the system control
graphics. If power is ON but the screen remains dark, touch the
screen to activate.
3. After the HMI has been activated, the Login screen appears.
4. In the Login screen, enter the username and password in the

appropriate fields.
5. When finished, select the Enter button.
The first screen to appear is the Overview screen, which provides a high-
level display of the system and the current status of all subsystems and
major components. All other screens and menus can be accessed by
selecting the buttons and symbols displayed on this screen.
3.2.2.2 UNDERSTANDING THE HMI

When using the HMI, the operator navigates between screens by
selecting both the labeled buttons and the images that represent
various subsystems and individual components.
In the case of symbols for individual components (example: pumps,

valves), the shape indicates the type of component, while the color
shows its current mode (as outlined in Section 4 - Control
Documentation).
To access the Legend screen, perform the following steps:
Operating the System Rev. 0

3-2 August, 2011
1. In the Plant Overview screen, select the GoTo Graphics button.

The Graphics menu appears.
2. In the Graphics menu, select the HMI Legend button. The Legend
screen appears.
3.3 STARTING UP THE SYSTEM

To activate the system, perform the procedures outlined in the following
sections in the order that they are provided.
The screens and menus used to control each subsystem and

component involved in the procedures below can be accessed from the
Overview screen.
3.3.1 COMMON COMPONENTS

Before starting up any subsystem-specific components, ensure that the
following common components are activated and functioning properly:
AIR COMPRESSORS: At the Motor Control Center (MCC), ensure that all air
compressor circuit-breakers are ON and that all air compressor selector
switches are set to AUTO.
3.3.2 ZEEWEED UF SUBSYSTEM

Use the following SOP to start up the ZeeWeed UF subsystem under
normal operating conditions. If restarting after an alarm shutdown, refer
to 3.5 Resuming Operation Following an Alarm Shutdown.
1. At the MCC, ensure that the circuit-breaker is set to ON and that

the selector switches for all components related to the
subsystem are set to AUTO. For information regarding startup
procedures for specific components, refer to Volume I - Vendor
Data Manual.

August, 2011 3-3
TIP: Automatic valves 2. Ensure that pressure within the air compressor tank is at a high
may not function enough level to satisfy the operating requirements of all
properly if air
pressure falls below pneumatically actuated valves. For more information, refer to
this level. Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
3. Set all manually operated valves in the proper position for normal
operation. For information regarding valve positioning, refer to
Volume III - Drawings Binder. For more on valve operation, refer
to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
4. In the Overview screen, select the symbol for the train that is to
be put into production. The Train screen for that train appears.
5. To set an operating mode for all components associated with the

selected train, in the Train screen, select the Mode Controls
button. The Modes pop-up screen appears.
TIP: The train will first 6. To activate the train, in the Modes pop-up screen, select the ON
enter STANDBY mode button. The train begins operating in AUTO mode.
after being activated.
7. When finished, select the Exit button. The Modes pop-up screen
closes.
If more trains are to be activated, repeat steps 4 - 7 for each additional

train.
3.4 TRIGGERING AN ALARM SHUTDOWN

To trigger an alarm shutdown, press the system stop button. This
causes the following to occur:
• An alarm sounds.
• The HMI displays an emergency shutdown notice.
• All system components immediately shut down, halting

operation.

3-4 August, 2011
Because an emergency shutdown does not trigger the same cycles that
a normal shutdown would, resuming operation immediately may
damage the system. As a result, after an emergency shutdown has been
triggered, all system components must be inspected and reset for
startup before operation resumes. For more information, refer to 3.5
Resuming Operation Following an Alarm Shutdown.
3.5 RESUMING OPERATION FOLLOWING AN

ALARM SHUTDOWN
There are numerous operating conditions that, if detected, will trigger an
alarm. Examples of an alarm condition include component failure, a flow
exceeding a preset safety setpoint, or an unacceptable reading from an
instrument monitoring permeate quality.
Depending on the nature and severity of the condition, the resulting

alarm may cause the system to shut down automatically in order to
preserve permeate quality and protect the system and the operators
from harm.
When an alarm occurs, the Alarm Summary pop-up screen appears and
displays a list of alarms and their associated conditions.
The Active Alarms pop-up screen lists all alarms that are in the alarm
state, both acknowledged and unacknowledged.
The Alarm History pop-up screen lists all alarms that have occurred.
If an alarm causes an emergency shutdown, use the following SOP to

acknowledge the alarm, address the cause(s), and resume operation:
1. To deactivate the alarm horn, in the Overview screen, select the

Silence Horn button. The horn stops.
2. After deactivating the horn, select the Alarm Summary button.

The Alarm Summary screen appears.

August, 2011 3-5
3. Based on the information provided in the Alarm Summary

screen, determine what condition caused the shutdown.
4. After the alarm condition has been identified, to acknowledge the

alarm, in the Alarm Summary screen, select the Ackowledge
Alarms button.
TIP: If an alarm 5. Resolve the alarm condition before proceeding. For information
condition remains on resolving alarms, refer to the CLC. Refer to the accompanying
when the operator
attempts to resume appendices for information regarding issues related to a specific
operation, the alarm subsystem, or to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for information
will sound again and
this procedure will regarding a particular component.
need to be repeated.
6. The action required to reset an alarm depends in the type of
alarm that was triggered. After all alarm conditions have been
resolved, to reset the alarm, complete one of the following steps:
• In the Overview screen, select the Alarm Reset button. The

alarm resets.
• If the affected component is set in STOP mode, set it in AUTO.

The alarm resets.
• In the Modes pop-up screen, select the train’s ON/OFF button.

The alarm resets.
TIP: If the alarm 7. To prepare the ZeeWeed UF subsystem for operation, perform
condition involved a steps 1 - 7 under 3.3.2 ZeeWeed UF Subsystem.
component in LEAD
mode, the paired
component in LAG If an alarm sounds but does not trigger an emergency shutdown and
mode will
automatically enter
deactivates automatically, consult the Alarm History pop-up screen for
LEAD mode until an explanation. In most cases where this occurs, the condition that
manually switched triggered the alarm was resolved automatically. However, operators
back to LAG mode.
should confirm this in order to rule out the possibility of a faulty alarm.

3-6 August, 2011
3.6 CONTROLLING SPECIFIC COMPONENTS

MANUALLY
Although the PLC controls most system components during normal
operation, the operator may, if necessary, manually adjust the
operational setting of a specific component, such as a valve or pump.
Do not leave unattended any system component that has been

adjusted manually (that is, one which has been taken out of AUTO
mode).
The level of manual control that an operator has over the system
depends on his or her security level access. Many of the controls
outlined below will not be available (that is, they will not appear on the
screen) if the operator who has logged in does not have clearance to
override the automated settings already in place.
The following sections provide general instructions for controlling

specific components from the HMI. For more detailed information, refer
to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
3.6.1 ACCESSING COMPONENT CONTROLS

To open the pop-up screen for a specific component, at the HMI, select
the symbol for that component. The component’s pop-up screen opens.
3.6.2 VALVES
Valves can be set in the following modes:
• AUTO - the valve is controlled by the PLC.
• OPEN - the valve is opened manually.
• CLOSE - the valve is closed manually.

August, 2011 3-7
Valves in OPEN or CLOSE mode must be monitored and controlled

manually (that is, the PLC will only control valves in AUTO mode).
To switch modes, perform the following steps:
1. At the HMI, select the symbol for the valve. The valve’s pop-up
screen appears.
2. In the valve’s pop-up screen, select the Open, Close or Auto

button, as needed. The valve enters the selected mode of
operation.
3. Select the Exit button to close the screen.
3.6.3 PUMPS
The controls used to adjust a pump’s settings can vary depending on the
type of pump in question.
A pump that has been taken out of AUTO mode must not be left
unattended.
3.6.3.1 PROCESS PUMP

TIP: As membranes When the process pump is set in AUTO mode, the PLC adjusts the
become fouled, the variable frequency drive (VFD) and feed flow settings as needed in order
PLC will automatically
adjust VFD and feed to maintain production and reject flow setpoints (provided in Section 4 -
flow settings to Control Documentation). However, if necessary, the VFD setting can be
maintain production.
adjusted manually in the pump’s pop-up screen.
To adjust the start speed or runtime settings, perform the following

steps:
1. At the HMI, select the symbol for the pump. The pump’s pop-up
screen appears.

3-8 August, 2011
2. In the pump’s pop-up screen, select either the box displaying the
Start Speed value or the one displaying the Runtime value, as
needed. The keypad control for the selected value appears.
3. Enter the new value, and then select the Reset button. The setting
is updated.
TIP: As membranes The process pump can be set to operate in the following modes:
become fouled, the
PLC will automatically
adjust VFD and feed • AUTO - the pump is controlled by the PLC.
flow settings to
maintain production. • STOP - the pump is stopped.
• FORWARD - the pump transfers water from the membrane tank,

producing permeate.
• REVERSE - the pump transfers water to the membrane tank,

backpulsing the membranes.
1. At the HMI, select the symbol for the pump. The pump’s pop-up
screen appears.
2. In the pump’s pop-up screen, select the Stop button. The pump
deactivates and the Start Forward and Start Reverse buttons
appear.
3. To set the process pump in FORWARD, select the Start Forward

button. To set it in REVERSE, select the Start Reverse button.
The mode buttons “Start Forward”, “Start Reverse” and “Stop” are
only available when the supervisory password has been entered.

August, 2011 3-9
3.6.3.2 CHEMICAL PUMPS

Chemical pumps can be set in the following modes:
• AUTO - the pump is controlled by the PLC.
• START - the pump is activated manually.
• STOP - the pump is stopped.
Pumps that are in START or STOP mode must be monitored and

controlled manually (that is, the PLC will only control pumps in AUTO
mode).
1. At the HMI, select the symbol for the pneumatic valve associated
with the pump. The valve’s pop-up screen appears.
2. In the valve’s pop-up screen, select the Open, Close, or Auto

button, as needed. The valve switches to the selected mode.
The mode buttons “Open” and “Close” are only available when the
supervisory password has been entered.
To adjust a pump’s stroke speed, use the controls found on the pump
itself. For more information, refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
3.6.4 AIR COMPRESSORS

Before activating an air compressor, set the duty cycle timer to the
required setting. The factory default value is listed in the CLC provided in
Section 4 - Control Documentation.

3-10 August, 2011
3.7 SYSTEM SETPOINTS

TIP: The design Most of the system’s operating parameters, including alarm triggers,
values for system flow settings, and production schedules, are defined using setpoints. The
setpoints are listed in
the CLC provided in default values for these settings are programmed during the initial
Section 4 - Control commissioning process, but can be updated as necessary through the
Documentation.
HMI.
Record all setpoint changes. In the event of a complete loss of power,

the system will restart with setpoints taken from the electronically
erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) and any recent
changes will be lost.
To preserve the controls design, the PLC processor must be backed up

onto the system's EEPROM memory. In addition, the PLC ladder logic
and operator interface design must be copied to an external archive
for future maintenance and emergency recovery.
To change a system setpoint, perform the following steps:
TIP: The Plant 1. In the Overview screen, select the Plant Setpoints button. The
Setpoints button is Plant Setpoints pop-up screen appears.
also available from
most other screens.
2. In the Plant Setpoints screen, select the button for the required
setpoint subgroup. The setpoints included in that subgroup
appear.
3. From the setpoints listed, select the box that displays the current
value for the setpoint that will be updated. The keypad control for
the selected value appears.
4. Enter the new value, and then select the Reset button. The setting
is updated.
5. To close the Plant Setpoints screen, select the Exit button. The
Plant Setpoints screen closes.

August, 2011 3-11
This same procedure can be used to adjust the setpoint values found on
other screens as well.
3.8 LOGGING OUT OF THE SYSTEM

To log out of the system, perform the following steps:
1. In the Overview screen, select the LOG OFF button. The Confirm
Logout screen appears.
2. In the Confirm Logout screen, select the Yes button to logout the
screen, or the No button to return to the Overview screen.
3.9 SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM
Before initiating a shutdown, consult the accompanying appendices

and ensure that all subsystem-specific preservation and storage
procedures are understood and adhered to.
To shut down the system, perform the following steps:
1. In the Overview screen, select the Plant Shutdown button. The

Shutdown Verification pop-up screen appears.
2. In the Shutdown Verification pop-up screen, select the Yes button

to shut down the system, or the No button to return to the
Overview screen.

3-12 August, 2011
SECTION 4
CONTROL DOCUMENTATION
This page has been
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No
assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual property rights, data, know how, trade secrets or
licensees of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively to the addressee for the purpose of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means,
or authorize any of the above, without the express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The
acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
GE Water & Process Technologies
Town of Taos MBR

CONTROL NARRATIVE
Issued: October 4, 2010
AO# 200443
3239 Dundas Street West,

Oakville, ON
CANADA
Phone: (905) 465-3030
Fax: (905) 465-3050
CN_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ.doc
AO# 200443 Town of Taos MBR Printed:
Control Narrative August 1, 2011
Table of Contents
1 PLANT OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................................................1
2 GENERAL INFORMATION .........................................................................................................................1
3 ZEEWEED® MODES OF OPERATION .......................................................................................................1
4 ZEEWEED® PERMEATE EQUIPMENT OPERATION & CONTROL ..........................................................2

4.1 ZEEWEED® TRAIN ON & OFF BUTTONS ...................................................................................................................2
4.2 STANDBY, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, RELAX ........................................................................................................2
4.3 PLANT FLOW DEMAND ..................................................................................................................................................3
4.3.1 Influent Flow, Membrane Feed Collection Channel Level & Permeate Flow Control .............3
4.3.2 Production TransMembrane Pressure (TMP)..............................................................................................4
4.4 START & STOP TRAIN TRIGGERS ..................................................................................................................................5
4.4.1 Putting a ZeeWeed® Train to STANDBY ......................................................................................................5
4.5 NORMAL TRAIN ROTATION ...........................................................................................................................................6
5 BACKPULSE CONTROL .............................................................................................................................6

5.1 BACKPULSE SEQUENCING ............................................................................................................................................6
5.2 RELAX ..................................................................................................................................................................................7
6 SLUDGE WASTING ....................................................................................................................................7
7 MEMBRANE AERATION CONTROL ..........................................................................................................7

7.1 SEQUENTIAL AERATION .................................................................................................................................................7
7.1.1 Alternative Aeration control - 10/30 Cyclic Aeration .............................................................................8
7.1.2 Standby Aeration ....................................................................................................................................................8
8 INTEGRITY MONITORING & CONTROL...................................................................................................8
9 CLEAN IN PLACE (CIP) CONTROLS ..........................................................................................................9

9.1 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE CLEANING EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................9
9.2 CITRIC ACID CLEANING EQUIPMENT..........................................................................................................................9
9.3 MAINTENANCE CLEAN....................................................................................................................................................9
9.3.1 Maintenance Clean .............................................................................................................................................10
9.4 RECOVERY CLEAN CONTROLS ..................................................................................................................................10
10 PRIMING SYSTEM CONTROL ................................................................................................................. 11

Issued: October 4, 2010 CN_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ
Process Controls: J. Jackson
11 COMPRESSED AIR CONTROL ................................................................................................................ 11
12 ZEEWEED® TRIGGERS & ALARMS ........................................................................................................ 12

12.1 ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................................................12
13 ZEEWEED® PLANT OPERATING INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 13

13.1 PASSWORD ACCESS & PRIVILEGES .........................................................................................................................13
13.2 SCREEN COLOR-CODING ...........................................................................................................................................13
14 POWER INTERRUPTION / POWER UP ................................................................................................. 14
Issued: October 4, 2010 CN_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ

1 Plant Overview
This document covers a general description of the controls by GE W&PT for the following unit
processes:
 ZeeWeed® Trains,
 Backpulse Equipment,
 Aeration Equipment,
 Clean-In-Place (CIP) Equipment,
 Utilities Equipment.
2 General Information
The reader should refer to the Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs), Operations Sequence
Chart (OSC) and the Control Logic Summary Chart (CLSC) for a complete understanding of the plant
control scheme as described below.
The PLC follows specific steps to automatically control valves, pumps, etc. during the operating states
for the treatment plant. These steps are listed and described in the OSC.
Details of the control logic, setpoints, etc. that are required to operate the plant are given in the CLSC.
In the documentation, the Programmable Logic Controller is referred to as the PLC. The PLC provides
automated control of the ZeeWeed® equipment. All the programming for the control of the
ZeeWeed® plant is stored in the PLC.
Setpoints, alarms, and calculated parameters, etc., are assigned tags in the PLC code. When tags are
used in the Control Narrative, they are identified by an alpha-numeric label, for example, 20-P-301,
for a process pump.
Modes are a series of steps the train follows to perform various operations, such as a cleaning. A
specific mode discussed in this document is shown in capital letters, such as MAINTENANCE CLEAN.
Buttons displayed on the HMI screen that the operator can press to initiate a mode or other
operation are shown with the first letter capitalized. For example, one button that is used to put a
train to OFF mode is the Off button.
3 ZeeWeed® Modes of Operation
Each ZeeWeed® train has separate mode buttons. There are several modes for each train, these
modes are: OFF, POWER OFF, SHUTDOWN, STANDBY, PRIME, BACKPULSE, RELAX, PRODUCTION,
MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION. Using the ZeeWeed® train mode
buttons on the HMI, the operator can put each ZeeWeed® train into a different mode. There are
some interlocks present to prevent the user from proceeding to one mode from another. These
interlocks are for membrane protection. Not all modes are selectable. Consult the CLSC and OSC for
further details on the modes.
Issued: October 4, 2010 Page 1 of 1 CN_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ

4 ZeeWeed® Permeate Equipment Operation & Control
A ZeeWeed® train is functionally described as a group of ZeeWeed® modules and cassettes

connected by a common permeate collection header.
4.1 ZeeWeed® Train On & Off Buttons
For the plant to operate automatically, the operator needs to have all devices set to AUTO and the
Trains’ On button(s) selected. The On button is only active for a train if it is in either OFF or
SHUTDOWN. Pressing the Train’s On button places that train into PRIME and then STANDBY mode. If
there is a demand for the train to run, the train proceeds to PRODUCTION. The train continues in the
production cycle, alternating between PRODUCTION and either BACKPULSE or RELAX modes, until the
demand to treat wastewater decreases placing the train to STANDBY. A scheduled MAINTENANCE
CLEAN automatically interrupts this production cycle. An alarm may also place a train to STANDBY
or SHUTDOWN.
The operator may interrupt the production cycle by pressing the Maintenance Clean or Backpulse
button. The train will proceed to the selected mode once the resources are available. There are
interlocks preventing more than one train from entering the same mode at the same time. Consult
the CLSC and the OSC for details on the interlocks.
The operator may turn a train OFF at any time. Pressing the Off button will place the train into OFF
mode. It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that if the Off button is pressed when a train is
in the MAINTENANCE CLEAN or RECOVERY CLEAN modes the tank’s contents are suitable for a train to
proceed to another mode. Neutralization may be required.
4.2 Standby, Production, Backpulse, Relax
The steps for the STANDBY are:

1. Stops all rotating equipment, and leaves valves as they were;
2. Fills the membrane tank to a level above the membranes;
3. The train remains in this step until one of the following is active: a start trigger; MAINTENANCE
CLEAN request; BACKPULSE button is selected. Intermittently the ejector runs based on
priming timers. Intermittently the membranes are aerated and the RAS is circulated based
on aerated and recirculation timers.
The operator selects at the HMI either BACKPULSE or RELAX for each train.
In PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, and RELAX, the membranes are aerated and RAS pump runs.
The steps for the PRODUCTION are:
1. Align the valves;
2. The process pump starts and runs until the production cycle timer triggers a Backpulse/Relax
or MAINTENANCE CLEAN. Intermittently the ejector runs based on timers.
The steps for the BACKPULSE are:
1. Stops the process pump;
2. Align the valves;

3. Starts the process pump and it runs for the backpulse duration time. Water is drawn from the
backpulse tank and pumped through the membranes into the membrane tank.
5. After the BACKPULSE is complete and if there is demand for the train to run the train
proceeds to PRODUCTION. After the BACKPULSE is complete and if there is no demand for the
train to run the train proceeds to STANDBY.
The steps for the RELAX are:
2. When the Backpulse duration timer times out proceeds to the next step;
3. After the RELAX is complete, and if there is demand for the train to run the train proceeds to
PRODUCTION. After the RELAX is complete and if there is no demand for the train to run the
train proceeds to STANDBY.
4.3 Plant Flow Demand
The flow setpoint for the PID loop which controls the process pump is based on the plant flow
demand or a manually entered flow setpoint.
4.3.1 Influent Flow, Membrane Feed Collection Channel Level & Permeate Flow Control
The influent flow signal is used for the plant flow demand. As the influent flow increases the plant
flow demand increases, causing the process pump(s) to speed up. To prevent standby and overflow
conditions, the level in the membrane feed collection channel is used to trim the plant flow demand.
Level control is accomplished with Proportional control. The PLC carries out these calculations. The
plant flow demand is the net permeate flowrate required from the GE W&PT system and does not
include additional permeate the system produces for non-production operations, such as
BACKPULSE.
The trim flowrate, which is a calculated flow, is added to or subtracted from the influent flowrate
according to the level in the membrane feed collection channel and the difference from the level
setpoint. As the level increases above the setpoint in the membrane feed collection channel, the trim
increases causing the overall plant flow demand to increase. When the plant flow demand increases,
the process pumps for the trains in operation are ramped up to increase the plant permeate
production which brings the level down in the membrane feed collection channel. Conversely, if the
membrane feed collection channel is below the setpoint, the calculated trim flowrate is a negative
flow and the overall plant flow demand decreases. The process pumps are ramped down, decreasing
the permeate production, and the membrane feed collection channel level increases as a result of
the decreased permeate production.
The flow setpoints for trains with a manual flow setpoint are added together and subtracted from the
plant flow demand which includes the level trim. This revised plant flow demand is then divided
equally to the trains in operation without a manually entered flow setpoint. This becomes the net
production flow setpoint for a train. A correction factor is calculated to account for the time when
the train is not producing water (i.e. Relax or Backpulse) and to produce additional water required for
backpulsing the train, when trains are being backpulsed. The net production flow setpoint multiplied
by the correction factor is then used to calculate the instantaneous flow setpoint for the train. This
value controls the process pump speed through the flow PID loop.
A flow setpoint may also be entered for each train manually. The supervisor can do this by setting
the production flowrate for some or all of the trains on the HMI. The system will maintain the
operator entered production flowrate or PLC calculated production flowrate up to a maximum
TransMembrane Pressure (TMP) or a minimum tank level.
Figure 1: Influent Flow, Level Control & Permeate Flow Control Chart
Total of all
Measured Level
supervisory
entered train Actual train
Level flow from
flows
Setpoint transmitter
Trim
Subtract supervisory
Add Flow Revised Divide net control output Convert the production Process
Influent entered train flows
and Trim Plant Flow by the number of units in flow setpoint per train Pump
Flow from plant flow
Plant Demand a production cycle without to the instantaneous Speed
demand
Flow a supervisory setpoint production setpoint
Demand
Indicates Control Loop
4.3.2 Production TransMembrane Pressure (TMP)
The PLC continuously calculates the TMP value while in PRODUCTION. If the TMP is too low, (i.e., too
negative) the TMP low trigger is active and the flow control PID loop output is captured. This value
becomes the maximum value for the flow control PID loop output.
When the TMP low trigger becomes active, the PLC gradually reduces the maximum for the flow PID
loop output until the TMP low trigger is not active, (i.e., TMP is less negative). At the moment when the
TMP low trigger becomes inactive, the maximum value is then gradually increased until the TMP low
trigger is active again, or continues to increase until the maximum value for the flow control PID loop
output equals 100%. This control strategy allows the PLC to vary the pump speed to maximize flow
while avoiding excessive TMP across the membranes.
4.3.2.1 TransMembrane Pressure (TMP) Calculation
TMP is calculated by using the equation below. During PRODUCTION the value is negative, for
backpulses and CIP, it is positive.
TMP = Header Pressure + C x (A + B - Membrane Tank Level)
Where:
A is the height of the pressure transmitter above the top of the membranes.
B is the height to the top of membranes in the membrane tank.

C is a conversion factor (water depth to pressure); consult the CLSC for the value.
In PRODUCTION, an increased TMP value means a larger pressure differential because the pressure
inside the membranes is lower than outside the membranes. This corresponds to a lower number as
expressed in engineering units. Therefore a high production TMP is actually expressed as a Pressure
Differential Alarm Low.
Figure 2 TMP Chart
4.4 Start & Stop Train Triggers
The number of trains in operation at any given time will vary depending on the plant flow demand.
As this demand increases the number of trains in PRODUCTION will increase. Start and stop train
triggers are used to determine when another train is to start or when a train is to be placed to
STANDBY. These triggers are defined in the CLSC.
4.4.1 Putting a ZeeWeed® Train to STANDBY
Several triggers may cause a train to go to STANDBY rather than shutting it down. These triggers
include a low membrane tank level or a loss of compressed air. If a low membrane tank level occurs,
the train will immediately proceed to STANDBY. If the STANDBY triggers no longer exist and a start
trigger is active, the train proceeds to PRODUCTION.

4.5 Normal Train Rotation
Trains are automatically rotated from PRODUCTION to STANDBY when another train is in STANDBY
based on an adjustable cycle timer, typically set to 4 hours. As long as there is at least one train in
the Production cycle, the cycle timer operates and when the timer times out, a Standby request is
initiated to stop one train, the train that has operated the longest compared to the other operating
trains. This lead train is put to STANDBY at the end of its next Backpulse/Relax, and a train that is in
STANDBY starts in PRODUCTION. Train rotation allows each available train to operate as the lead train
for no more than the duration of the cycle timer, such as 4 hours, plus the time remaining in the
train's Production cycle when the train is triggered to proceed to STANDBY.
When the cycle timer times out and there is no train available in STANDBY to start in PRODUCTION,
the lead train continues in the Production cycle and the request to put a train to STANDBY is
maintained, waiting for a train to become available.
If permeate demand decreases and triggers a train to stop, the cycle timer resets and resumes
timing or when the train with the highest priority to stop is not in the Production cycle, timer resets
and resumes timing.
5 Backpulse Control
At this facility, the membranes are backpulsed using the process pump. Treated water is periodically
reversed back through the membranes to maintain stable transmembrane pressures.
The PLC controls the process pump speed to backpulse the trains at a set flow rate per train up to a
maximum TMP. A transmitter on the membrane header is used to calculate the BACKPULSE TMP.
This TMP limit provides membrane protection against over-pressurization. If the TMP is too high, the
TMP high trigger is active and the flow control PID loop output is captured. This value becomes the
maximum value for the output of the flow control PID loop.
When the TMP high trigger becomes active, the PLC gradually reduces the maximum for the flow PID
loop output until the TMP high trigger is not active, (i.e., TMP is less positive). At the moment when the
TMP high trigger becomes inactive, the maximum value is then gradually increased until the TMP
high trigger is active again, or continues to increase until the maximum value for the flow control PID
loop output equals 100%. This control strategy allows the PLC to vary the pump speed to maximize
flow while avoiding excessive TMP across the membranes.
The backpulse duration, production cycle duration, TMP setpoint and flow setpoint for all ZeeWeed®
trains can be set through the HMI. All ZeeWeed® trains in the plant share the same backpulse
duration and production cycle duration.
5.1 Backpulse Sequencing
The PLC staggers the backpulses of the trains throughout each cycle to distribute the backpulses
evenly when all trains are in the Production cycle. Each train is given a fixed scheduled time in the
master Production cycle timer to begin a BACKPULSE and RELAX. Train 1 is assigned the first time
slot, train 2 is assigned the second time slot, and so on for all trains in the system. Regardless of the
number of trains in the Production cycle, each train is always backpulsed at the same time slot of the
master Production cycle timer. For example, when there are four trains in the system and the
Production cycle time is 12 minutes, the first time slot is at time 0 minutes and the second time slot,
to backpulse Train 2, is at 3 minutes of the master Production cycle timer.
The master Production cycle timer starts when there are no trains in PRODUCTION and one train is
requested to start PRODUCTION. The timer restarts every time it times out.
The operator can initiate a BACKPULSE from the HMI for any ZeeWeed® train by pressing the
Backpulse button. This button is disabled if any other train is in BACKPULSE or RELAX.
5.2 Relax
RELAX control is an alternative to backpulsing. If a backpulse failure occurs and no pump is available,
the PLC will place the trains into RELAX mode.
In RELAX mode, the PLC will stop permeating and the membranes will sit for an operator entered
duration before continuing production. During this time solids that have concentrated around the
membrane will be distributed away from the membrane surface by the aeration.
6 Sludge Wasting
The operator is required to waste sludge from the membrane basins in order to maintain good
membrane performance. The operator should analyze the sludge to ensure a mixed liquor
concentration of less than 10,000 mg/L, for example, to maximize membrane performance.
7 Membrane Aeration Control
The blowers supply low pressure air into a common air header for all of the trains. This common air
header then divides into multiple air headers to the membrane tanks. The PLC calculates the
membrane aeration demand and communicates this value.
For further details on blower operation, refer to the OSC and CLSC for the occurrence of blowers to be
running at any given time and the required air flow.
7.1 Sequential Aeration
Each train operates under sequential aeration. Valves will cycle air within a train, reducing both the
air required to run the system and the operating costs. See the OSC for steps with an aeration
demand. Cyclic aeration may be deactivated for a train by the PLC due to a cyclic valve failure.
The plant control system automatically determines which trains should run in 10/10 aeration (i.e.
sequential aeration) and 10/30 aeration, based on the system performance.
If a cyclic valve is requested to close and fails to close, cyclic aeration continues and the train does
not proceed to Standby due to an active Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger. An alarm would
be triggered to alert the operator. If an aeration valve fails to open, the train is shutdown to prevent
overfouling of the membranes due to inadequate air scouring.

7.1.1 Alternative Aeration control - 10/30 Cyclic Aeration
The alternative aeration strategy is referred to as 10/30 Cyclic Aeration. 10/30 Cyclic Aeration is
accomplished by aerating a given membrane module for 10 seconds, then not aerating for 30
seconds. The only change with respect to the standard 10/10 aeration is the time between aeration
events increases from 10 to 30 seconds. The extension from 10 to 30 seconds of no aeration
significantly reduces the aeration requirement for the entire plant.
The plant controls automatically determine which trains should run in 10/10 and 10/30 operation
based on the system performance. The reduction in aeration is made possible by monitoring the
condition of the membranes and determining the level of fouling on the membranes. When
membranes are in a clean condition the trains will operate in the 10/30 aeration. If the membranes
become fouled, the aeration is returned to 10/10 aeration in order to increase the shear on the
membranes and remove any solids accumulation. Experience has shown that it is possible to
operate in 10/30 aeration for periods where the wastewater flow is at or below the average day
design value. During peak flow conditions the operating TMP will increase and call for the system to
switch to 10/10 aeration automatically.
7.1.2 Standby Aeration
The PLC aerates trains in Standby sequentially to limit the number of starts and stops on the
membrane aeration blowers. The trains in Standby are aerated starting with the first train followed
by the second train, then the third train, without stopping the membrane aeration demand. Trains
are aerated in the order of their train number. If, for example, train 2, and 3 are in Standby, train 2 is
aerated first, and then train 3. Sequential aeration involves an overlap of aeration to allow the
membrane aeration blower to continue to operate as one train completes its aeration and another
train begins its aeration.
8 Integrity Monitoring & Control
Integrity of the plant is monitored with an on-line turbidimeter. Turbidity is monitored and displayed
when any train is in PRODUCTION.
There are three turbidity alarms used to assist the operator in running the system. One alarm is used
to detect a problem that is not a spike and will alert the operator of a critical problem. For example,
this alarm will occur when the turbidity is above the setpoint, 5 NTU, for 30 seconds.
A second alarm is used to detect a spike in turbidity and will set all trains that are in BACKPULSE
mode to RELAX mode. For example, the alarm is active when the turbidity is above the setpoint, 5
NTU, for 10 seconds. The alarm will also skip all scheduled MAINTENANCE CLEANS until the turbidity
alarm condition no longer exists. From this time on, MAINTENANCE CLEANS will again be completed
as scheduled, but the BACKPULSE Mode must be manually selected by the operators, if required.
The third alarm also detects turbidity spikes but at a lower setpoint and is used to notify the operator
of a potential problem which needs to be addressed. For example, the alarm is active when the
turbidity is above the setpoint, 1 NTU for 60 seconds.

The turbidity alarm setpoints and the time delays, before the alarms become active, are adjustable at
the HMI.
For further details consult the CLSC.
9 Clean In Place (CIP) Controls
The membranes require cleaning to maintain peak performance. There are two types of cleaning
methods; MAINTENANCE CLEANS and RECOVERY CLEANS.
9.1 Sodium Hypochlorite Cleaning Equipment
Sodium hypochlorite is used to remove organic contaminants from the membranes. The sodium
hypochlorite pumps 23-P-130-10 and 23-P-130-11 are air diaphragm pumps. The GE W&PT PLC
requests the sodium hypochlorite valve, 23-FV-131-2 for MAINTENANCE CLEAN and 23-FV-131-1 for
RECOVERY CLEANS, to open to run the pump in specific steps during the cleaning procedure. Consult
the OSC for these steps.
9.2 Citric Acid Cleaning Equipment
Citric acid is periodically used to remove inorganic contaminants from the membranes such as
calcium carbonate, manganese and iron compounds. The citric acid pumps 23-P-330-10 and 23-P-
330-11 are air diaphragm pumps The GE W&PT PLC requests a citric acid valve, 23-FV-331-2 for
MAINTENANCE CLEAN or 23-FV-331-1 for RECOVERY CLEAN, to open to run the pump in specific steps
during the cleaning procedure. Consult the OSC for these steps.
9.3 Maintenance Clean
Maintenance Cleans are scheduled through the HMI and are automatically initiated by the PLC based
on a 24 hour clock. The operator may select to perform one scheduled Maintenance Clean a train
per day on the MAINTENANCE CLEAN schedule screen.
The operator selectable options:
 Day of week for cleaning;
 Time of day for cleaning;
 Sodium hypochlorite for cleaning solution;
 Citric acid for cleaning solution.
When it is time to carry out a MAINTENANCE CLEAN, the PLC compares the current plant flow
demand with the available capacity of the plant if one train is not in service. If the plant flow demand
exceeds this capacity, then scheduled MAINTENANCE CLEAN is skipped but the request remains
active and is started when this demand is lower. When a MAINTENANCE CLEAN is skipped or aborted,
an alarm occurs to inform the operator.

If the plant demand does not exceed this capacity, when it is time to carry out a MAINTENANCE
CLEAN, the train completes its current production cycle before starting the cleaning procedure. If a
train is in STANDBY it goes directly to MAINTENANCE CLEAN.
9.3.1 Maintenance Clean
The default steps for Maintenance Clean are:

1) Aerates the membrane tank;
2) Initial chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
3) Relaxation period for all cassettes;
4) Chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
5) Relaxation period for all cassettes;
6) Steps 4 and 5 are repeated for a number of iterations;
7) Non-chemically enhanced pulse for all cassettes;
8) Aerates the membrane tank;
9) Proceeds to STANDBY.
9.4 Recovery Clean Controls
RECOVERY CLEANS can only be carried out for a train if it is in R. CLEAN mode. The operator is
required to turn the train OFF then select either R. Clean Acid or the R. Clean Hypochlorite button to
for the cleaning to begin. During a Recovery Clean there are several prompts which the operator
must address. Consult the OSC and CLSC for further details. As a result it is suggested to have the
operator present during the Recovery Clean so that these prompts can be responded to in a timely
manner.
RECOVERY CLEANS can be done with citric acid or sodium hypochlorite depending on which cleaning
chemical the operator selects at the beginning of the sequence.
The default steps for Recovery Clean are:
1. Aerates the membrane tank;
2. Drains the membrane tank, the operator required to manually align valves and start pump;
3. Manual drain and flush step. The PLC will proceed to the next step after a defined duration.
4. Steps 5 to 8 are repeated for a number of iterations and then proceed to step 9.
5. Backpulses the membrane tank for a defined duration then proceeds to next step or until the
tank is at a defined level then proceeds to step 7;
6. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then proceed to step 5.
7. Aerates the membrane tank for a defined duration;
8. Drains the membrane tank, the operator required to manually align valves and start pump;
9. Chemically enhanced pulse to all the cassettes for a defined duration then proceeds to next step
or until the tank is at a defined level then proceeds to step 11;
10. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then proceeds to step 9;
11. Final, extended relaxation period with intermittent aeration;
12. The operator selects the Neutralization button to proceed to NEUTRALIZATION mode.
The Neutralization button is available in OFF and in the last step of RECOVERY CLEAN. The default
steps for Neutralization are:
1. Fills the membrane tank to defined level with feed;
2. Aerates the membrane tank;
3. Relaxation period for all cassettes for a defined duration and then either proceed to next step if
the clean was with sodium hypochlorite or proceed to step 5 if the clean was with citric acid.
4. The operator manually checks the residual chlorine concentration. The operator selects the
Confirm Neutralization button to proceed to next step when the Cl residual is less than 10 ppm.
The operator selects the Resume Neutralization button when the chlorine residual is greater than
10 ppm. The PLC will proceed to step 3.
5. Non-chemically enhanced pulse to all the cassettes;
6. Proceeds to OFF.
Consult the OSC and CLSC for specific details on the steps and setpoints used in this mode.
10 Priming System Control
Each train is provided with an ejector, which uses compressed air to operate and primes the process
pump during PRIME, at the beginning of BACKPULSE/RELAX and intermittently the trains in
PRODUCTION.
To prime the train’s ejector compressed air valve opens which also opens the permeate header
isolation valve. During this time, air in the permeate header is pulled up and out through the ejector,
which also pulls water into the membranes and process pump suction. Any water that is drawn into
the ejector drains out by gravity.
The operator can manually initiate the priming sequence by pressing the Prime button for the train at
the HMI. The operator can manually initiate priming only when the train is in STANDBY and OFF.
11 Compressed Air Control
When low compressed air alarm is active, trains in PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, RELAX, and
MAINTENANCE CLEAN proceed to STANDBY and trains in RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION
proceed to SHUTDOWN.

12 ZEEWEED® Triggers & Alarms
A trigger is a normal event that can clear an alarm or be one of several points in a sequence of
events.
12.1 Alarms
Alarms are used to identify a problem with the system. Depending on the nature of the problem the
alarm may either shutdown the train(s), place a train to STANDBY, and initiate a callout to notify the
operator that there is a problem. It is understood that the operator will acknowledge the alarm and
address the situation. If the problem is not corrected, production quality and quantity will drop off
quickly.
An alarm that is activated by an instrument, pressure transmitter, flow transmitters, or level
instrumentation, typically requires a pump or certain device to be on to generate the required flow or
pressure. Otherwise, the alarm will be ignored if the device to be protected is off.
All alarms are indicated with a message on the screen. The operator cannot reset the alarm without
the correct password. All alarms and the time they occurred are recorded on the alarm history
screen.
Some alarms can shutdown a ZeeWeed® train(s). These alarms close appropriate valves and stop
pumps. The shutdown alarm puts the train to Shutdown mode. Restarting after a shutdown will
require the alarm to be reset.
Devices which are being controlled remotely cannot have their status changed by the PLC.
Consult the CLSC for details on specific alarms, the corresponding actions and reset procedures.
Typical alarms that shutdown a train and alarms that put a train to STANDBY are listed in the
following tables.
Table 1: Train Shutdown Alarms
Alarm Description Possible Causes for Alarm

High Flow Alarm – permeate Suction hose disconnecting from fittings.
Low Flow Alarm – permeate Loss of prime of process pump
Pressure High-High Alarm – permeate
Suction hose disconnecting from fittings.
(measured by pressure Transmitter)
Transmembrane Pressure Low, Low Fouled UF membranes
Process pump Fault VFD Fault
Compressed Air – Low pressure and train is in Insufficient Compressed Air Supply to operate
Recovery Clean or Neutralization pneumatically actuated valves

Table 2: Train Standby Alarms
Alarm Description Possible Causes for Alarm

Permeate flowrate is higher than the Feed
Low Level Alarm – membrane tank
flowrate
Power Failure Tripped breaker inside panel
Decreased Feed
Low Flow Demand Standby Trigger
– train is not required for Production
Compressed Air – Low pressure and train is in
Insufficient Compressed Air Supply to operate
Production, Backpulse, or Relax, or Maintenance
pneumatically actuated valves
Clean.
13 ZeeWeed® PLANT OPERATING Interface
To accommodate the above operational requirements and all other control, display, and monitoring
requirements, this plant employs a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for access to plant controls. The
HMI communicates with the Programmable Logic Controller, which in turn controls the plant.
13.1 Password Access & Privileges
The ability to silence the horn and acknowledge alarms does not require a password, but alarms can
not be reset.
To gain access to make changes on the HMI, the operator is required to enter the correct password.
A screensaver blanks the screen after a set amount of time of inactivity. The screen is reactivated by
a single touch. Reactivation cannot select a device or operating mode.
In order to access the control screens, the individual must enter a correct password then press Enter.
There are three levels of password protection; Operator, Supervisor, & GE W&PT. The operator
password is factory set; consult the CLSC for the operator password. The supervisor password can
be modified from the HMI. There is no limit to the number of times another password can be
attempted. The password must be re-entered after a set amount of time of inactivity. For details of
password privileges consult the CLSC.
13.2 Screen Color-Coding
The color-coded -status indicates a device’s mode. The HMI uses the color-coding shown below.
Table 3: HMI Color Code Devices Chart
Color Valve Pump
Green Open On

Color Valve Pump
Red Closed Off
Yellow Failure Failure
The mode, step and in steps with a duration timer the time remaining in the step is displayed on the
train screen at the HMI.
14 Power Interruption / Power Up
When a loss of power occurs, the affected trains will immediately proceed to POWER OFF mode.
After power returns, the plant powers up and trains will start-up automatically as described in the
CLSC. The CLSC lists the order in which the common equipment and trains will power up; it also
specifies the mode that a train will proceed to from POWER OFF mode.

This page has been
AO # 200443
Town of Taos, MBR
Operations Sequence Chart for Train Sequenced Equipment
Legend
This column is for the GE W&PT Tags
T - Indicates that the valve is throttling in Auto.
ion
O - Indicates that the valve/motor is open/on in Auto.
lat
air
s
Iso
e
lve
M - Indicates that the valve is to be manually opened by the operator.
ite
ite
alv
tio
sed
lor
Va
rite
lor
X - Indicates that the valve/motor is closed/off in Auto.
d
nV
p
ola
an
on
um
ch
res
ch
clic
rai
t Is
C - Indicates that valve cycles though an open/close sequence.
al
l
em
i
po
h
lat
po
P
mp
ign
oc
Cy
al D
en
r to
Hy
-x - Indicates that there are multiple trains associated with this tag number.
Iso
nD
Hy
ci d
Operating Mode
yp
id
co
tS
rum
ion
u
de
Ac
m
LS - Indicates that the valve/pump will retain the last state it had (open/closed, on/off) to avoid damaging equipment.
tio
cid
cA
H
g
s
an
tor
ue
rat
diu
Ta
ea
diu
um
t
era
ric
ic A
s
-M
itri
jec
eq
- In
Ae
-H
GE
So
Cit
So
i
eA
d
pR
-E
NE
Cit
So
ne
N-
N-
Step Description Step #
y
TE
TE
N-
N-
ran
ela
um
UM
RA
bra
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
ss
LEA
LEA
pD
mb
MB
RM
RM
SP
ce
CU
CL
CL
m
EA
EA
p
R. C
R. C
Pro
Me
Ste
Ste
ME
Me
VA
RA
PE
CL
PE
CL
M.
M.
Manual
Tag Numbers Valves Chemical Pump Valves Drain Pumps & Blowers
For 20-E-801-
20-HV-501-x
23-FV-331-1
23-FV-131-1
23-FV-331-2
23-FV-131-2
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-301-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-130-x
23-FV-330-x
20-FV-802-x
The Operations Sequence Chart (OSC), Control Logic Summary Chart (CLSC) and the Control Narrative (CN) should all be read to assist in the understanding of plant
20-P-301-x
20-B-200
MB-P-5
MB-P-x
operations.
Comments & Sequencing Logic

OFF 1
Stops all rotating equipment, and leaves valves as they were.
Step 1 LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X X 6 1
Waits for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Train remains OFF until the operator changes the train to another operational mode.
If the On button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
If the Neutralization button is pressed proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION - step 1.
If the Maintenance Clean button is pressed proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
Step 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2
If the Recovery Clean button is pressed proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN - step 1.
If Prime Train pushbutton is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
If the Backpulse button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1.
Only proceeds to the step indicated if the resources are available and the interlocks preventing the action are not present.
SHUTDOWN 2
Shutdown Step 1 LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X X 6 1
Tank Fill Step 2 X X X X X X X X X X X O X X 2 When 20-LS-201E-x is active proceeds to the next step.
Train remains in this mode until the operator changes the train to ON or OFF mode.
Shutdown Step 3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 3 If the On button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
If the Off button is pressed proceeds to OFF - step 1.
POWER OFF 3 3
Train remains in this step until it is enabled by the start-up sequence steps.
Step 1 1
All Devices OFF Consult the CLSC for specific details.
STANDBY 5 5
Step 1 LS LS LS LS LS X X X X X X X X X 6 1
Tank Fill Step 2 X X X X X X X X X X X O X X 2 When 20-LS-201E-x is active, proceeds to the next step.
Aerates for 20-KQS-201C seconds every 20-KQS-201D seconds.
Runs the ejector intermittently according to Master Ejector Cycle Timer.
The train remains in this step indefinitely until one of the following occurs:
If a start train trigger is active, defined in the CLSC, the train proceeds to the PRODUCTION - step 1.
STANDBY Step 3 CN1 X X X X X X X X X O
N4
X
N5,N6
O
N1
X 3
If the Backpulse button is pressed proceeds to BACKPULSE - step 1.
If the Maintenance Clean button is pressed proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1.
If the Prime Train button is pressed proceeds to PRIME - step 1.
Only proceeds to the step indicated if the resources are available and the interlocks preventing the action are not present.
PRIME 8 8 Only one train can be in PRIME mode at a time but more than one train can be in a priming step.
Holds this step for step duration
If PRIME was initiated from STANDBY then proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
Priming Train Step 1 X X X X X X X X X X O X X X 20-KQS-801D 1
If the Prime button was pressed in OFF, then train proceeds to OFF - step 1.
If the On button was pressed in Off or Shutdown, then proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
PRODUCTION 14 14
Step 1 C O O X X X X X X X O O X X 6 1 Waits for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
Permeates until the end of the current PRODUCTION cycle, then:
If there is a demand for the train to run and there is no MAINTENANCE CLEAN request noted below or if the train is unable to proceed to the MAINTENANCE CLEAN, proceeds to
either BACKPULSE - step 1 or RELAX - step 1.
Permeate Step 2 C O O X X X X X X X X O O O 2
If a MAINTENANCE CLEAN request is active proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN - step 1. (A MAINTENANCE CLEAN requests refers to either a scheduled request or the
Maintenance Clean button is selected.)
BACKPULSE 20 20 Only one train can be in BACKPULSE or RELAX at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C O X X X X X X X X O O LS X 6 1 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Step 2 C O X X X X X X X X O O O X 6 2 Waits for step delay, and then proceeds to the next step.
Page 1 of 4
Process Controls: J. Jackson The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. OSC_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ
AO # 200443
Town of Taos, MBR
Legend
ion
lat
air
s
Iso
e
lve
ite
ite
alv
tio
sed
lor
Va
rite
lor
d
nV
p
ola
an
on
um
ch
res
ch
clic
rai
t Is
al
l
em
i
po
h
lat
po
P
mp
ign
oc
Cy
al D
en
r to
Hy
Iso
nD
Hy
ci d
Operating Mode
yp
id
co
tS
rum
ion
u
de
Ac
m
tio
cid
cA
H
g
s
an
tor
ue
rat
diu
Ta
ea
diu
um
t
era
ric
ic A
s
-M
itri
jec
eq
- In
Ae
-H
GE
So
Cit
So
i
eA
d
pR
-E
NE
Cit
So
ne
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
N-
N-
ran
ela
um
UM
RA
bra
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
ss
LEA
LEA
pD
mb
MB
RM
RM
SP
ce
CU
CL
CL
m
EA
EA
p
R. C
R. C
Pro
Me
Ste
Ste
ME
Me
VA
RA
PE
CL
PE
CL
M.
M.
Manual
For 20-E-801-
20-HV-501-x
23-FV-331-1
23-FV-131-1
23-FV-331-2
23-FV-131-2
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-301-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-130-x
23-FV-330-x
20-FV-802-x
20-P-301-x
20-B-200
MB-P-5
MB-P-x
operations.

Backpulses the membrane train.
B.P. Starts Step 3 C O X X X X X X X X X O O O 20-KQS-301B 3
Holds this step for step delay or until the level in the CIP/backpulse tank is at or below the setpoint for 20-LAL-301 then the train proceeds to the next step .
Step 4 C O X X X X X X X X X O O X 6 4 Waits for step delay, for flow to stop, then proceeds to the next step.
If there is a demand for the train to run, proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1.
If there is no demand for the train to run, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
B.P. Stops Step 5 C O X X X X X X X X X O O X 5
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from OFF, proceeds to OFF - step 1.
If the BACKPULSE was initiated from STANDBY, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
RELAX 25 25 Only one train can be in RELAX and BACKPULSE at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C O X X X X X X X X O O LS X 12 1 Waits for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Step 2 C X X X X X X X X X X O O X 20-KQS-301B 2 Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step .
If there is a demand for the train to run, proceeds to PRODUCTION - step 1.
Step 3 C X X X X X X X X X X O O X 3
If there is no demand for the train to run, proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
MAINTENANCE CLEAN 53 53 Only one train can be in MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION at a time.
Permeating Stops Step 1 C X X X X X X X X X O X LS X 12 1 Waits 12 seconds, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Aerates the membrane train.
Tank Aeration Step 2 C X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201A 2
Holds this step for step delay, then proceeds to the next step.
N3 N3
Initial B.P. Step 3 C O X O O X X X X X X X X X 6 3 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Train Step 4 X O X ON3 ON3 X X O
N3
ON3 X X X X O 20-KQS-301D 4
Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
N7 N3 N3
Train Soak Step 5 X O X O O X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301E 5 Holds this step for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
N3
Repeated B.P. Step 6 X O X O ON3 X X X X X X X X X 6 6 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Train Step 7 X O X ON3 ON3 X X O
N3
ON3 X X X X O 20-KQS-301C 7
Holds for step delay then proceeds to the next step.
Holds this step for step delay then:
N7 N3
Train Soak Step 8 X O X O ON3 X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301E 8 Repeats MAINTENANCE CLEAN - steps 6 to 8 for 20-QS-301F iterations.
After the last iteration proceeds to the next step.
Water B.P. Step 9 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 9 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
B.P. Train Step 10 C O X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301D 10
N7 Aerates the membrane train.
Mem. Tk. Aeration Step 11 C O X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201A 11
Holds this step for step delay, typically 300 seconds, then proceeds to the next step.
M. Clean Complete Step 12 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 12 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to STANDBY - step 1.
RECOVERY CLEAN 82 82 Only one train can be in MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION at a time.
Step 1 C X X X X X X X X X O X X X 6 1 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Tk. Aeration Step 2 C X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201B 2
Step 3 C X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 3 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Prompts operator:
"Open 20-HV-501-x and start MB-P-5 to drain the tank"
Tk. Drain Step 4 X X X X X X X X X M X X X X 4
Drains the membrane tank.
When 20-LS-201S-x is active then go to the next step.
Manual Flush Step 5 X X X X X X X X X M X X X X 20-KQS-301T 5 Holds this step for step delay (0 seconds adjustable from 0-1800 seconds) then proceeds to the next step.
Prompts operator:
"Stop MB-P-5 and close 20-HV-501-x to complete tank drain. Press Advance to continue."
When operator presses "Advance" then go to the next step.
Page 2 of 4
AO # 200443
Town of Taos, MBR
Legend
ion
lat
air
s
Iso
e
lve
ite
ite
alv
tio
sed
lor
Va
rite
lor
d
nV
p
ola
an
on
um
ch
res
ch
clic
rai
t Is
al
l
em
i
po
h
lat
po
P
mp
ign
oc
Cy
al D
en
r to
Hy
Iso
nD
Hy
ci d
Operating Mode
yp
id
co
tS
rum
ion
u
de
Ac
m
tio
cid
cA
H
g
s
an
tor
ue
rat
diu
Ta
ea
diu
um
t
era
ric
ic A
s
-M
itri
jec
eq
- In
Ae
-H
GE
So
Cit
So
i
eA
d
pR
-E
NE
Cit
So
ne
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
N-
N-
ran
ela
um
UM
RA
bra
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
ss
LEA
LEA
pD
mb
MB
RM
RM
SP
ce
CU
CL
CL
m
EA
EA
p
R. C
R. C
Pro
Me
Ste
Ste
ME
Me
VA
RA
PE
CL
PE
CL
M.
M.
Manual
For 20-E-801-
20-HV-501-x
23-FV-331-1
23-FV-131-1
23-FV-331-2
23-FV-131-2
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-301-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-130-x
23-FV-330-x
20-FV-802-x
20-P-301-x
20-B-200
MB-P-5
MB-P-x
operations.

RECOVERY CLEAN - steps 8 to 15 are executed for 20-QS-301V iterations (1 Iteration, adjustable from 0 - 3).
After the last iteration proceeds to Step 16.
Tk Flush (Auto) Step 7 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 7
IF 20-QS-301V is 0, proceeds to Step 16.
Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Step 8 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 8 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Repeat B.P with Permeate Step 9 X O X X X X X X X X X X X O 9 Hold this step until 20-LS-301B is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above 20-LS-201E-x (Cleaning level trigger) setpoint then proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 11.
N7 Holds this step until 20-LS-301A is active:
Train Soak (Pause Tank Fill) Step 10 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 10
Repeats RECOVERY CLEAN - steps 8 to 10.
Tk. Aeration Step 12 C X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201B 12
Prompts operator:
"Open 20-HV-501-x and start MB-P-5 to drain the tank"
Tk. Drain Step 14 X X X X X X X X X M X X X X 14
Drains the membrane tank.
When 20-LS-201S-x is active then go to the next step.
Prompts operator:
"Stop MB-P-5 and close 20-HV-501-x to complete tank drain. Press Advance to continue."
When operator presses "Advance" then go to the next step.
N3
Repeat B.P. with Chemical Step 17 X O X O ON3 ON3 ON3 X X X X X X O 17 Hold this step until 20-LS-301B is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above (90% x 20-LS-201E-x setpoint) then proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 19.
Train Soak Step 18 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 18
Tk Fill with Permeate Step 19 X O X X X X X X X X X X X O 19 Hold this step until 20-LS-301B is active then proceeds to the next step.
When in this step and the membrane tank level is at or above (20-LS-201E-x setpoint) then proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 21.
Step 20 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 20
Step 21 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 21 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to the next step.
Aerates the membrane tank, if enabled, for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-KQS-301R seconds in this step.
Mem. Tk. Chemical Soak Step 22 CN2 X X X X X X X X X X X O
N2
X 20-KQS-301P 22
RECOVERY CLEAN COMPLETE Step 23 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 23 Prompts operator to press button and "Proceed to NEUTRALIZATION". When button is pressed, proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION step 1.
NEUTRALIZATION 71 71 Only one train can be in MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION at a time.
Starts pump.
Tk. Fill Step 1 X X X X X X X X X X X O X X 1
When the membrane tank level is at or above the setpoint for 20-LS-201C-x then proceeds to next step.
Tk. Aeration Step 3 C X X X X X X X X X X X O X 20-KQS-201J 3
Holds this step for step delay, typically 60 seconds, then proceeds to the next step.
Train soaks without aeration for step delay, typically 900 seconds, then either proceeds to the next step if clean was with sodium hypochlorite or proceed to step 7 if clean
Tk. Soak Step 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20-KQS-301U 5
was with citric acid.
Prompts operator.
"Check the chlorine concentration in the membrane tank.
Operator prompt Step 6 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 Solution is neutralized if chlorine concentration is below 10 mg/L."
Operator presses Confirm Neutralization to proceed to next step, or presses Resume Neutralization to return to NEUTRALIZATION step 5.
Page 3 of 4
AO # 200443
Town of Taos, MBR
Legend
ion
lat
air
s
Iso
e
lve
ite
ite
alv
tio
sed
lor
Va
rite
lor
d
nV
p
ola
an
on
um
ch
res
ch
clic
rai
t Is
al
l
em
i
po
h
lat
po
P
mp
ign
oc
Cy
al D
en
r to
Hy
Iso
nD
Hy
ci d
Operating Mode
yp
id
co
tS
rum
ion
u
de
Ac
m
tio
cid
cA
H
g
s
an
tor
ue
rat
diu
Ta
ea
diu
um
t
era
ric
ic A
s
-M
itri
jec
eq
- In
Ae
-H
GE
So
Cit
So
i
eA
d
pR
-E
NE
Cit
So
ne
N-
N-
y
TE
TE
N-
N-
ran
ela
um
UM
RA
bra
EA
EA
N-
N-
EA
EA
ss
LEA
LEA
pD
mb
MB
RM
RM
SP
ce
CU
CL
CL
m
EA
EA
p
R. C
R. C
Pro
Me
Ste
Ste
ME
Me
VA
RA
PE
CL
PE
CL
M.
M.
Manual
For 20-E-801-
20-HV-501-x
23-FV-331-1
23-FV-131-1
23-FV-331-2
23-FV-131-2
20-FV-210-x
20-FV-211-x
20-FV-301-x
20-FV-320-x
23-FV-130-x
23-FV-330-x
20-FV-802-x
20-P-301-x
20-B-200
MB-P-5
MB-P-x
operations.

Flush Piping Step 8 X O X X X X X X X X X X X O 20-KQS-301M 8
NEUTRALIZATION complete Step 9 X O X X X X X X X X X X X X 6 9 Waits for step delay, for valve alignment, then proceeds to OFF - step 1.
DEVICE SPECIFIC NOTES:
Aeration valves open every 20-KQS-201D seconds. The aeration flow demand increases 5 seconds after the valve is requested to open on the first train to be aerated and the train is aerated for 20-KQS-201C seconds. If more than one train is being aerated, the next train's valve opens and after six seconds the
N1
previous train's valve closes. When the last train is aerated, the aeration valves close 30 seconds after the aeration flow demand decreases.
N2 Aeration valves open every 20-KQS-301R seconds. Increase the aeration flow demand 5 seconds after the valve is requested to open and the train is aerated for 20-KQS-301Q. Aeration valves close 5 seconds after aeration flow demand is decreased.
N3 Depending on the chemical requested for the clean. The sodium hypochlorite and citric acid cannot be selected for the same clean.
N4 The Master Ejector Cycle Timer operates train ejectors to maintain prime on all trains that are in STANDBY step 3.
N5 The Recirculation pump runs every KQS-MB-P-C-x and stops every KQS-MB-P-D-x seconds.
N6 When no trains are in the production cycle, then the train with the highest Starting priority in Standby should retain a RAS demand and keep its mixed liquor feed pump running – there should not be a time without a mixed liquor pump running unless entire system is in OFF.
GENERAL NOTES:
1 For operator protection, sodium hypochlorite pumps are interlocked at the PLC with the citric acid pumps to prevent them from running at the same time Mixing sodium hypochlorite and citric acid generates chlorine gas. Chlorine gas is toxic at levels greater than 1 ppm. Refer to CLSC for further information.
2 Devices will follow the start-up sequence in the CLSC when powering up.
Page 4 of 4
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Controls Logic Summary Chart
CLSC_200443_Taos_R00_04Oct10_JJ
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Tag Type Description Component Equipment Setpoint Units Set Action or Derivation Reset Notes
Min Max
Plant Information and Control Panel Devices

A. Info ZeeWeed® Trains Plant All There are 4 similar, ZeeWeed® trains. Tags with a suffix of "-x"
represent 4 tags, one for each train. The "-x" represents a -1,
through to -4 for each of the trains.
A. Info Controls Documents Plant All The OSC, CLSC and Control Narrative, along with the P&IDs, should
be reviewed in their entirety to assist in the understanding of plant
operations.
A. Info Returning a Train to Run Plant All Any action, i.e. an alarm, which causes a train to shutdown will
require the operator to put the train back to ON from SHUTDOWN to
restart the train.
A. Info Returning a Device to Auto Plant All Any device which is placed into manual, i.e. due to an alarm, will
need to be placed back into Auto by the operator.
A. Info Setpoints Plant All All setpoints to be verified in the field. Changes may be required for
field conditions & requirements.
A. Info Device Display Colors, Line Display Colors Plant All The following color scheme is used for device status:
& Status (HMI & SCADA)
Green - indicates a pump/blower is on and a valve is open.
Red - indicates a pump/blower is off and a valve is closed.
Yellow - indicates a pump/blower or valve has an alarm.
A device placed in MCC control will have MCC displayed over or

beside the device.
A device placed in MANUAL control will have MAN displayed over or

beside the device.
A. Info Displays/Alarms, Setpoints & Selections Plant All All active alarms are displayed on the screen. Alarms are tracked
(HMI & SCADA) on the alarm summary screen.
All setpoints and selections, for example "Auto/Start/Stop", are

displayed on the screen.
A. Info Display Instrumentation Values (HMI & Plant All The following items are to be displayed:
SCADA)
1) All analog instrumentation signals wired directly to the GE W&PT
PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
2) All analog instrumentation signals communicated to the GE
W&PT PLC by another PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
3) Transmembrane Pressure (TMP)
A. Info Trending Analog Values Plant All On plants which incorporate a SCADA system the items below are to
be trended.
1) All analog instrumentation signals wired directly to the GE W&PT

PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
2) All analog instrumentation signals communicated to the GE
W&PT PLC by another PLC. (e.g., Flow, Pressure, Turbidity)
3) Transmembrane Pressure (TMP)
Update time is 5 sec. for all items. Minimum storage time is 2

months.
A. Info Trending PID Loops Plant All All PID loop parameters are trended.
HMI screen graphically displays Setpoint (SP), Process Variable

(PV), and Control Variable (CV).
A. Info PLC Address(es) Ethernet Control I/P Address:
Sub Net Mask:
Gateway (LAN Modem assigned address):
A. Info HMI Address(es) Ethernet Control I/P Address:
Sub Net Mask:
A. Info Date & Time Synchronization (HMI & Plant All Every day when the time is 2:22 am, The PLC date and time are synchronized to the HMI/SCADA Date &
SCADA) OR Time .
When the operator presses the "Synchronize PLC
Clock Now" button. Date & Time shown on the HMI/SCADA screens are the PLC date
and time.
PLC_TIME.SYNC_ALM Alarm Clock Synchronization Failed Settings All IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y
When there is a clock synchronization request for When synchronization occurs.
10 seconds.
A. Info Heartbeat Settings Control A "heartbeat" is required between the PLCs to ensure there is GE is not providing a PLC
communication.
Each PLC will maintains a independent "heartbeat", which

increments every second.
The PLC's will look at the other PLC's "heartbeat" to see if it is

changing.
SYSTEM_INFO.NOT_AUTO Alarm Not All Devices In Auto Settings Control IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y
When there is at least one device, wired to the - all steps, displays on HMI screen "Not All Devices In Auto." When all devices are in Auto.
GE PLC, that is not in Auto.
Page 1 of 18
Issued: October 4, 2010 The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies.
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
HEARTBEAT_LOST Alarm Loss of Heartbeat Settings Control IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: Y Y
When the "heartbeat" in the client's PLC is not - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Communication with other When the "heartbeat" in the client's PLC is
incremented in 5 seconds. PLCs has been lost." incremented.
Since GE is not providing the PLC the actions of this alarm cannot
be defined
CP_SURGE_SUPPRESSOR_"Y" Alarm Control Panel Surge Suppressor Needs Surge Control IN ALL MODES: When the control panel surge suppressor Y one tag for each surge
Replacing Suppressor - all steps, when the control panel surge contact no longer indicates a failure suppressor
suppressor contact indicates a failure
PLC_LOW_BAT_"Y" Alarm PLC Battery Low Control Control IN ALL MODES: When the PLC battery is normal. Y one tag for each battery
- all steps, when the PLC Battery is low
A. Info Buttons Interface Control After a button is pressed at the HMI, it is reset after one scan time.
LOG_OFF Button Log Off Security Control Returns Security Level to Viewer.
GENERAL_CALLOUT Alarm General Callout Interface Control IN ALL MODES: When the conditions requiring the callout Y
- all steps, when any condition requiring a callout are cleared.
is activated.
CLEAR_NOTIFICATION Button Clear Notification Interface Control Clears the notification signal.
ALRM_NOTIFICATION Digital Out Alarm Notification Interface Control When an alarm is initiated. Provides signal for device to notify the operator an alarm has When the Clear Alarm Notification or 10
occurred. minutes have passed since the signal was
Conditions requiring notification are identified by the activated.
"NOTIFICATION" column on the right side of the CLSC.
Device may be a horn, light or other means of notification.

A. Info ADMIN Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When ADMIN logs out or after timer times
entered. Provides the following: out.
• Access to view all screens.
User name: ADMIN • Access to view and make adjustments of Setpoints.
Password: (available only to GE W&PT • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational
Personnel) modes.
• Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF buttons.
• Resetting of all Alarms.
• Manual & Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves.
• Access to view and make adjustments of all set points, including
PID tuning parameters.
• Manual control of PID's.
A. Info HMI Supervisor Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When the Supervisor logs out or after timer
entered. Provides the following: times out.
User name: SUPER • Access to view and make adjustments of Setpoints.
Password: (available only to Supervisor) • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational
modes.
• Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF button views.
• Manual & Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves.
• Manual control of PID's.
• Access to view PID control setpoints & graphics, but can not adjust
PID tuning parameters.
A. Info HMI Operator Password Access Security Control When the proper Username and Password are Starts 4 hour timer. When the Operator logs out or after timer
entered. Provides the following: times out.
User name: OPER • Access only to view Setpoints.
Password: GE W&PT six digit AO number • Access to view and make adjustments of all train operational
modes, excluding manual.
• Access to view and selection of train ON/OFF button views.
• Auto view Operation of all Pumps and Valves, not Manual.
• Access only to view PID control setpoints & graphics.
A. Info HMI Default Password Access Security Control Access to major screens.
Silence horn and acknowledge alarms.
No access to alarm reset.
A. Info HMI Screen Blanking Security Control Automatically turns off screen after 30 minutes of continuous idle When the screen is touched in any location.
time.
Configured in Control Panel - Displays Properties.

20-KQS-201E Setpoint Train Rotation Time Trains Control 1 72 4 hr. IN PRODUCTION: When timer times out, at the setpoint; When timer times out and there is at least Y This timer balances the usage
- as soon as there is at least one train in one train in STANDBY, timer resets and of trains and prevents trains
PRODUCTION, timer starts. System triggers a Standby request, if there is a train in STANDBY resumes timing, from spending extended time
The setpoint not operator adjustable. step 3 with no Standby alarms and is available to start. OR in STANDBY.
when the train with the highest priority to The membranes tanks are
If there are no trains in STANDBY step 3 available to start, when stop is not in the Production cycle, timer inside. There is no need for
timer times out, Standby request is ignored and maintained.. resets and resumes timing, winter mode.
OR
when there are no trains in PRODUCTION,
BACKPULSE, or RELAX, timer resets and
stops.
Feed System
Page 2 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
15-FC-401 Derived Plant Flow Demand Level Feed The plant flow demand equals the average influent flow plus the This signal is communicated
plant flow demand trim. to the plant PLC.
15-FC-401 = 15-FCY-401+ 15-FXI-401
15-FI-401 Comm Plant Feed Flow Flow Feed 0 [MAX FEED gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen. The Plant Feed flow is the
FLOW] basis for permeate demand.
Actual instrument is 15-FE/FIT-401.
15-FXI-401 Derived Moving Average Plant Feed Flow Flow Feed 0 [MAX FEED gpm The moving average is for 15 minutes and the sample time is once A moving average is used to
FLOW] every 1 minute. prevent rapid changes and
These times can be adjusted if required. Unless GE W&PT Process equalize intermittent spikes in
Group provides the information use the default values. plant demand.
15-FAT-401 Alarm Plant Feed Flow Transmitter Out of Range Flow Feed 0 [MAX FEED gpm IN ALL MODES: When the transmitter is in range. Y Y
FLOW] When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the
calibrated range for 2 seconds.
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.)
15-FQI2-401 Derived Today's Plant Feed Volume Volume Feed 0 1000000000 gal Totalize feed flow. At midnight after current value is put into 15
FQI3-401.
At midnight this value is stored at 15-FQI3-401.
15-FQI3-401 Derived Yesterday's Plant Feed Volume Volume Feed 0 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set valve to 15-FQI2-401 at midnight. Y
15-LC-401 Setpoint Membrane Feed Collection Channel Level Level Membrane 0 [MAX TBD in. Operator entered level setpoint. This level is used to calculate
Setpoint Feed Collection CHANNEL This level is used to calculate the Plant Demand Trim Flowrate. It is the trim plant flow demand. It
Channel LEVEL] in the middle of the maximum and minimum levels for the trim is in the middle of middle of
volume the maximum and minimum
levels for the trim volume.
15-LCH-401 Setpoint Membrane Feed Collection Channel High Level Membrane 0 [MAX TBD in. This is the maximum Membrane Feed Collection Channel level Typically set to about 12 in.
Level Setpoint Feed Collection CHANNEL setpoint where plant flow demand is at the maximum value. Used to above 16-LCL-401 setpoint.
Channel LEVEL] calculate the Plant Demand Trim Flowrate 15-FCY-401.
Operator entered value. It is in the middle of the operating band
15-FCY-401 Derived Plant Flow Demand Trim Flow Membrane -[MAX FEED [MAX FEED gpm Plant Flow Demand Trim Flowrate is proportional to Membrane Feed The plant trim is calculated to
Feed Collection FLOW] FLOW] Collection Channel level, as shown below. maintain a fairly constant level
Channel in the bioreactor.
15-FCY-401 = [Max. Peak Flow x (15-LI-401 - 15-LC-401) / (15-LCH-
401 - 15-LC-401)] This is added to a
communicated flow demand to
Where: establish the plant permeate
Maximum control level is 15-LCH-401 where permeate demand demand.
must equal the maximum peak flow for the entire plant.
Control level is 15-LC-401 is in the middle of the maximum and The trim can range between
minimum levels for the trim volume. the maximum plant demand in
PHF is the peak flow for the plant. This value may be less than the the positive and negative
peak flow. If the controls are erratic the value may be adjusted directions. This allows the
This is the plant permeate trim flow used to calculate the net trim to drive the plant demand
permeate flow for each train in PRODUCTION, 20-FCY-301A-x. to the maximum or zero,
despite the communicated
demand signal.
15-LAH-401 Alarm Membrane Feed Collection Channel Alarm Level Membrane 0 [MAX TBD in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the level is below this setpoint. Y
High Feed Collection CHANNEL - all steps, when the level is above this setpoint - all steps, sets the plant flow demand equal to the peak flow for the
Channel LEVEL] for 8 seconds. plant
ZeeWeed Process Information

A. Info Display of Operational Mode and step Mode Control The current operating mode and the step number is displayed on the Only the mode name and step
number. screen. number are required. Step
descriptions are not required.
Time remaining for some steps is displayed.
A. Info Mode Selection through ON Mode Control IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y Y
- as required in OSC steps of each mode, if the ON button is
pressed the train proceeds to PRIME step 1 and will cycle through
modes automatically as required provided all necessary equipment
is in auto and available.
Interlock Number of trains permitted in a given mode Mode Control Consult the OSC for details. Interlocks are shown in the
OSC in the first line of each
mode.
20-HMS-201A-x Button ON Button Mode Control IN OFF & SHUTDOWN: Y Y
steps as per OSC, proceeds to PRIME step 1.
Consult interlocks in CLSC and OSC for more information.
20-HMS-201B-x Button OFF Button Mode Control IN ALL MODES :

steps as per OSC, proceeds to OFF step 1.
NOTE:
User is responsible for the use of this button to ensure that a
cleaning solution will be handled as required before proceeding to
production.
Page 3 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-HMS-201C-x Button PRIME Button Mode Control IN OFF & STANDBY:

steps as per OSC, proceeds to PRIME step 1.

20-HMS-201D-x Button BACKPULSE Button Mode Control IN OFF, STANDBY & PRODUCTION:
steps as per OSC, proceeds to BACKPULSE step 1.

20-HMS-20G-x Button M. CLEAN with CITRIC ACID Button Mode Control IN OFF, STANDBY & PRODUCTION:
steps as per OSC, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 1.

20-HMS-201F-x Button M. CLEAN with SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE Mode Control IN OFF, STANDBY & PRODUCTION:
Button steps as per OSC, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 1.

20-HMS-201I-x Button R. CLEAN WITH CITRIC ACID Button Mode Control IN OFF:
steps as per OSC, proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 1.

Initiates a recovery clean with citric acid.
20-HMS-201J-x Button R. CLEAN WITH SODIUM Mode Control IN OFF:
HYPOCHLORITE Button steps as per OSC, proceeds to RECOVERY CLEAN step 1.

Initiates a recovery clean with sodium hypochlorite.
20-HMS-201K-x Button NEUTRALIZATION Button Mode Control IN OFF & RECOVERY CLEAN:
steps as per OSC, proceeds to NEUTRALIZATION step 1.

A. Info Standby Priority Demand ZeeWeed® A train that has been in PRODUCTION the longest time has the
highest priority to proceed to STANDBY from PRODUCTION.
A train in demand override, has the lowest priority to proceed to
STANDBY.
A. Info Starting Priority Demand ZeeWeed® A train that has been in STANDBY the longest time has the highest
priority to proceed to PRODUCTION from STANDBY.
NUM_TR_PROD Derived Number of Trains Cycling through Trains ZeeWeed® This is the number of trains in PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, and
Production RELAX.
NUM_TR_PROD_SUP Derived Number of Trains Cycling through Trains ZeeWeed® This is the number of trains in PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, or
Production with supervisory Flow Setpoint RELAX, with a supervisory flow setpoint.
20-KQS-801D Setpoint Priming Duration Sequence ZeeWeed® 30 300 60 sec. IN PRIME: IN PRIME: When the timer times out.
step 1. - starts timer, when the timer times out proceeds as per the OSC.
20-KQY-301 Setpoint Production Cycle Timer - total time to Sequence ZeeWeed® 8 15 12 min. When a train enters the production cycle for the Value entered at the HMI, in minutes. When the full production duration has
complete one Production sequence plus first time and no other train is in the production expired.
one Backpulse sequence. cycle. Time remaining in the production cycle for each train, 20-KI-301-x, is
displayed, in seconds.
The timer keeps running through all of the valve alignment steps and
through backpulse.
If all trains are in OFF or POWER OFF the time is retained. When
trains enter the production cycle the timer resumes.
Membrane Aeration System

20-KX-201 Derived Standby Aeration Order Sequence Membrane IN STANDBY: In STANDBY, trains are
Aeration step 3, trains are aerated for 20-KQS-201C seconds one at a time, aerated sequentially.
immediately one after another until the last train in STANDBY is
aerated.
Trains are aerated in order according to the train number.

For example, if trains 1 and 2 are in STANDBY, train 1 is aerated
first, followed by train 2.
The aeration order is repeated for the trains in STANDBY every 20-
KQS-201D seconds.
A. Info Calculated 10/30 Aeration Status Sequence Membrane When a train is enabled for 10/30 aeration and its calculated status Details of 10/30 aeration
Aeration is 10/30 Aeration. triggers are not included in the
- when a train switches from Standby to Production, it is aerated in control documents.
10/30 if it has a partner.
- 10/30 aeration only occurs for trains in STANDBY, BACKPULSE,
RELAX, and PRODUCTION when they have a partner.
Page 4 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
A. Info 10/30 Aeration Train Pairing Sequence Membrane IN STANDBY, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, & RELAX: The first two trains permitted
Aeration Trains in 10/30 aeration pair up based on the time that the aeration to enter 10/30 are paired
mode changed from 10/10 to 10/30 aeration. i.e. The first and together.
second trains to enter 10/30 pair in the sequencing. This does not
necessarily correspond to the train number.
If there is an odd number of trains in 10/30 aeration, the train with the
highest STANDBY priority is aerated in 10/10, with the other trains
pairing based on the time that their aeration mode changed as
above.
20-FY-301-x Trigger Net Permeate Flow Trigger, 10/30 Aeration Sequence Membrane 347 gpm IN STANDBY, BACKPULSE, RELAX, IN STANDBY, BACKPULSE, RELAX, PRODUCTION: This trigger clears when the flow is less 10/30 aeration is prevented
Aeration PRODUCTION: - the train's aeration status is switched to 10/10 aeration. than this setpoint. when the train's flow demand
- when 20-FCY-301A-x or 20-FCY-301B-x is - the number of blowers operating is adjusted as required. is higher than this level.
greater than this setpoint for 5 minutes.
A. Info Resistance Calculation for 10/30 Aeration Flow Membrane The resistance calculation will be run from the end of a BP/RELAX to Details of 10/30 aeration
Aeration the beginning of a BP/RELAX for every cycle for each train (i.e. triggers are not included in the
permeation cycle). The trigger to be in 10/10 or 10/30 (outputs from control documents.
Ri-resistance initial and Rc-resistance cake) will always be saved for
the last complete cycle.
20-HS-210A-x Button Enable/Disable 10/30 Aeration Flow Membrane IN ALL MODES: 10/30 Aeration will only occur
Aeration - the 10/30 aeration is enabled/disable when conditions permit.
20-FV-210-x Button Cyclic Valve , Mem. Tk. Mode Selection Valve Membrane Changes mode to selected mode.
20-FV-211-x "Auto, Open, Close" Aeration When the valve is manual 10/30 is prevented.
The modes "Open" and "Close" are only available when the
20-ZAO-210-x Alarm Cyclic Valve , Mem. Tk. Failed to Open Valve Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE & RELAX When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y An aeration valve that fails to
20-ZAO-211-x Aeration - all steps, when the open limit switch is not - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. open will prevent proper
activated for 7 seconds when the valve is asked aeration.
to open. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY
CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION: The train must be shut down
- all steps, continues Maintenance Clean or Recovery to prevent over-fouling.
Clean/Neutralization without aeration. Once steps are complete, the
train proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1.
20-ZAC-210-x Alarm Cyclic Valve , Mem. Tk. Failed to Close Valve Membrane IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION & BACKPULSE: When the close limit switch is activated. Y Y An aeration valve that fails to
20-ZAC-211-x Aeration - all steps, when the close limit switch is not - all steps, continues to cycle valve. Displays on alarm banner "Train close will prevent the train
activated for 7 seconds when the valve is asked has a Cyclic Valve Failure, Inadequate Membrane Aeration may be from stopping aeration.
to close. Occurring". Train does not proceed to Standby due to an active
Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger, (i.e., 15-FSYL-401 has no The train is required to
effect for this train). continue PRODUCTION, but
the operator must address the
Maintenance Cleans and Recovery Cleans are prevented. failure before proper aeration
10/30 Aeration is disabled. is restored.
IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
- all steps, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 9. After the
last step of MAINTENANCE CLEAN proceeds to SHUTDOWN step
1. Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. Displays on alarm
banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
-all steps, continue steps.
20-KQS-210 Setpoint Mem. Tk. Cyclic Valve Cycle Time for Valve Membrane 10 sec. Valves will alternate between open and close positions every 10
10/10 Aeration Aeration seconds. One valve will be open and another will be closed. For
example, when valve 20-FV-210-x is open for 10 seconds the PLC
opens valve 20-FV-211-x and then delays for 2 seconds before
closing valve 20-FV-210-x. This applies to all the cyclic aeration
valves.
20-KQS-201C Setpoint Train in Standby Aeration Duration Sequence Membrane 120 600 300 sec. IN STANDBY: IN STANDBY: When train is not in Standby step 3. Trains are periodically aerated
Aeration step 3. step 3, aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-201C seconds in STANDBY to prevent solids
every 20-KQS-201D seconds. Starts step with no mixing. settling.
20-KQS-201D Setpoint Train in Standby Aeration Frequency Sequence Membrane 1800 sec. IN STANDBY: IN STANDBY: When the timer times out.
Aeration step 3. step 3, aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-201C seconds
This setpoint is not adjustable. every 20-KQS-201D seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
IN ALL MODES Calculation for 10/10 or 10/30 status:

- 10/30 aeration must be enabled for the train, 20-HS-210A-x
- based on the resistance controller and the 10/30 Aeration Flow
Trigger 20-FY-301-x the PLC selects the either 10/10 or 10/30
aeration status for each train in the plant. (This includes the trains
not in the production cycle.)
- determine the number of operating blowers required and then
adjust the number of blowers operating.
20-HS-200B Button Enable/Disable Standby Aeration Sequence Membrane IN ALL MODES:
Aeration - enables/disables the frequency and duration timers for Standby
Aeration
Page 5 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-FY-200 Comm Membrane Aeration Air Flow Flow Membrane 0 [MAX AIR SCFM Displays value with engineering units on screen.
Aeration FLOW]
20-FC-200-x Derived Mem. Tk. Membrane Aeration Air Flow Flow Membrane 0 1000 TBA SCFM Membrane Aeration Requirement Per Train Airflow requirement per train is
Requirement Per Train Aeration a fixed, constant value.
20-FQ-200 Derived Membrane Aeration Demand Flow Membrane 0 [MAX AIR SCFM 20-FQ-200 = Sum of 20-FC-201-x for the trains with an aeration
Aeration FLOW] demand.
20-FAH-200 Alarm Membrane Aeration Air Flow High Flow Membrane 0 100 110 % IN ALL MODES: When the aeration flow as a percentage of Y
Aeration - all steps when the aeration flow as a percentage the aeration flow setpoint is is below the
of the aeration flow setpoint is at or above the alarm setpoint.
alarm setpoint for 120 seconds.
20-FAL-200 Alarm Membrane Aeration Air Flow Low Flow Membrane 0 100 80 % IN ALL MODES: When the aeration flow as a percentage of Y
Aeration - all steps when the aeration flow as a percentage the aeration flow setpoint is is above the
of the aeration flow setpoint is at or below the alarm setpoint.
alarm setpoint for 120 seconds.
20-FALL-200 Alarm Membrane Aeration Air Flow Low, Low Flow Membrane 0 100 50 % IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION, RELAX, BACKPULSE: When the aeration flow as a percentage of Y Y Y
Aeration - all steps when the aeration flow as a percentage - all steps, the train proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. the aeration flow setpoint is is above the
of the aeration flow setpoint is at or below the IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN, alarm setpoint.
alarm setpoint for 120 seconds. NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps continue.
Membrane Tank
20-LI-201-x Analog In Mem. Tk Level Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 in. Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
Actual instrument is 20-LE/LIT-201-x.

20-LAT-201-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Transmitter Out of Range Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y Membrane trains must be
When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. shutdown if the level in the
calibrated range for 2 seconds. tank cannot be determined to
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: protect the membranes.
- Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
- Displays on alarm banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
20-LAHH-201-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level High High Level ZeeWeed® IN ALL MODES: When the level Alarm high is no longer Y Y This indicates that a high level
When the level Alarm high has been active for active. alarm was not solved by
more than 90 seconds. ramping up production.
20-LAH-201-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level High Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 130 in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When 20-LS-201A-x is active. Y The plant demand must be set
When the level is at or above this level for 8 - all steps, sets the plant flow demand equal to the peak flow for the to the maximum to prevent
seconds. plant possible overflow of mixed
liquor.
- all steps, alarm only. This level is set above the
normal operating band, but
IN RECOVERY CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION: below the overflow level.
- all steps, alarm only.
20-LS-201A-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level to Enable Membrane Tank Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 124 in. IN ALL MODES: Resets 20-LAH-201-x This level is below the LAH
Feed When the level is at or below this level for 8 level and placed within the
seconds. normal operating band.
20-LS-201C-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level 3 for Fill and Aerate Level ZeeWeed® 104 in. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION: Target setpoint is a level
When the level is at or above this setpoint for 2 - proceeds to the next step. about 12 inches (300 mm)
seconds in the steps as indicated in the OSC. above the LY2-3426 setpoint
Target setpoint is a level about 12 inches above the 20-LS-201E-x but prevents the membrane
setpoint but prevents the membrane tank from flowing over the weir. tank from overflowing.
20-LS-201E-x Trigger Mem. Tk Level Above Membranes Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 92 in. IN ALL MODES: Resets 20-LAL-201-x. This level is the lowest point in
When the level is at or above this level for 8 the normal operating range.
seconds. The train will come out of standby and resume production if there is
a demand to produce water.
20-LAL-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 90 in. IN ALL MODES except RECOVERY CLEAN: IN PRODUCTION: When 20-LS-201E-x is active. Y Y Y Train is driven to STANDBY to
When the level is at or below this level for 8 - all steps, proceeds to STANDBY step 1. prevent membrane exposure.
seconds.
This level is just above the membrane fibers in the cassette. This level is just above the
membrane fibers in the
cassette.
20-LALL-201A-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Low Level ZeeWeed® 20-LAL-201- in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the level is above the setpoint. Y Y This alarm indicates that the
x When the level is at or below the setpoint for - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Membrane Tank 'X' Possible membranes have been
more than 3600 seconds. Membrane Exposure." exposed for an extended
duration and the operator is
required to immediately raise
the tank level.
20-LS-201S-x Trigger Mem. Tk Empty Tank Level ZeeWeed® 0 132 3 in. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN: When the level is at or above this setpoint This level is very near the
When the level is at or below this setpoint for 2 steps as indicated in the OSC, proceeds to next step. for 5 seconds bottom of the tank, or bottom
seconds in the steps as indicated in the OSC. of level transmitter range.
Page 6 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-LAL-201B-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Level ZeeWeed® IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the switch is no longer active. Y Y Y Train is driven to STANDBY to
- all steps, when switch is active for 5 seconds. - all steps, proceeds to STANDBY step 1. prevent membrane exposure.
This level is just above the membrane fibers in the cassette. This switch is just above the
membrane fibers in the
cassette.
20-LALL-201C-x Alarm Mem. Tk Level Low Low Level ZeeWeed® IN PRODUCTION: IN ALL MODES: When the switch is no longer active. Y Y This switch is set below the
- all steps, when switch is active for 5 seconds. - all steps, displays on alarm banner "Membrane Tank 'X' Possible below the operating band to
Membrane Exposure." protect the membranes from
exposure.
This alarm is used as a

backup for the level
transmitter.
Permeate System
20-FAH-301A-x Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow High Flow Permeate 0 1500 864 gpm IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y This alarm is usually set to
- all steps when the flow is at or above the - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. 110% of the maximum
setpoint for 10 seconds. instantaneous flow setpoint to
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. protect the membranes from
over-fluxing.
20-FCH-301 Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Maximum Flow Permeate 700 790 785 gpm This is the upper limit for 20-FC-301A-x This is the maximum
Flow Setpoint acceptable instantaneous flow
that does not exceed the
membrane flux requirements.
20-FCYH-301A Setpoint Net Permeate Flow Maximum Setpoint 1 Flow Permeate 600 695 695 gpm When all trains are available. This is the upper limit for 20-FCY-301A-x and 20-FCY-301B-x. This is the required net
All trains are available when there are no trains in permeate flow to achieve PHF
OFF, SHUTDOWN, MAINTENANCE CLEAN or with all trains available (N
RECOVERY CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION. condition).
20-FCYH-301B Setpoint Net Permeate Flow Maximum Setpoint 2 Flow Permeate 400 463 463 gpm When there is one train, or more than one train, This is the upper limit for 20-FCY-301A-x and 20-FCY-301B-x. This is the required net
not in service. permeate flow to achieve PHF
A train is not in service when it is in OFF, without all trains available (N-1
SHUTDOWN, MAINTENANCE CLEAN or condition).
RECOVERY CLEAN/NEUTRALIZATION.
15-FSYH-401A Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Start Trigger for Demand Permeate 153 274 180 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or above this Puts one train to production that has the highest starting priority. Start & Stop triggers are
One Train Running setpoint for 10 seconds calculated based on process
requirements and generated
using a trigger generation tool.
15-FSYL-401A Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger - Demand Permeate 60 247 150 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or below this Puts one train to standby that has the highest standby priority. Y Y
One to No Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYH-401B Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Start Trigger for Demand Permeate 247 434 340 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or above this Puts one train to production that has the highest starting priority.
Two Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYL-401B Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger - Demand Permeate 213 400 300 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or below this Puts one train to standby that has the highest standby priority. Y Y
Two to One Train Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYH-401C Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Start Trigger for Demand Permeate 587 774 680 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or above this Puts one train to production that has the highest starting priority.
Three Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYL-401C Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger - Demand Permeate 366 533 460 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or below this Puts one train to standby that has the highest standby priority. Y Y
Three to Two Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYH-401D Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Start Trigger for Demand Permeate 927 1114 1020 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or above this Puts one train to production that has the highest starting priority.
Four Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
15-FSYL-401D Trigger Plant Permeate Demand Standby Trigger - Demand Permeate 519 706 612 gpm When the plant flow demand is at or below this Puts one train to standby that has the highest standby priority. Y Y
Four to Three Trains Running setpoint for 10 seconds
20-FCL-301 Setpoint Instantaneous Permeate Flow Minimum Flow Permeate 150 200 165 gpm This is the lower limit for 20-FC-301A-x This level is the minimum
Flow Setpoint stable flow that the process
pump can safely supply.
20-FAL-301A-x Alarm Instantaneous Permeate Flow, Flow Low Flow Permeate 100 200 150 gpm IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y This alarm is usually set to
- all steps, when the pump is running and the flow - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. 90% of the minimum
is at or below the setpoint for 10 seconds. instantaneous flow setpoint to
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. protect the pump from under-
speed conditions.
20-FAT-301-x Alarm Permeate Flow Transmitter Out of Range Flow Permeate 0 1500 gpm IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y Trains must shut down if the
When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: pressed. permeate flow cannot be
calibrated range for 2 seconds. - all steps, the train proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. determined as there is no way
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) to set pump speed.
20-FI-301A-x Analog In Instantaneous Permeate Flow Flow Permeate 0 1500 gpm Displays value with engineering units on screen.
Actual instrument is 20-FE/FIT-301-x.

20-FQIY-301A-x Derived Last Production Cycle's Net Permeate Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal Totalize the net permeate flow during the last production cycle. Y
Volume
Page 7 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-FQIY-301B-x Derived Today's Permeate Volume Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal Total Train Production Volume for Today = Totalized Permeate At midnight after current value is put into 20
volume during Production to the end of the cycle minus Total FQIY-301C-x.
Backpulse volume from process pump when backpulsing.
At midnight this value is stored at 20-FQIY-301C-x.
20-FQIY-301B-x = Totalized 20-FI-301A-x (In Production) - Totalized

20-FI-301B-x (During Backpulse)
20-FQIY-301C-x Derived Yesterday's Permeate Volume Volume Permeate -10000 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set value to 20-FQIY-301B-x. Y
20-FIR-301A-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow Prior to Last Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y
Backpulse When the Pre-Backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201A, is Analysis Chart:
active. - prior to last backpulse
- during last backpulse
- after last backpulse
- after previous backpulse
20-FIR-301C-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow After Last Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y
Backpulse When the Post-backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201C, is Analysis Chart:
20-FIR-301D-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow After Previous Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Move value of 20-FIR-301C-x into 20-FIR-301D-x. Y
Backpulse When the Post-backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201C, is
active. Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Chart:
- prior to last backpulse
20-FFY-301-x Setpoint Net Instantaneous Production Flow Flow Permeate 1.00 1.3 The system recalculates then freezes this value in In Auto This adjustment factor is used
Correction Factor Production step 2 when 20-FIC-301A-x is set to 20-FFY-301-x = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301A-x)/(20 to determine the
Auto. KI-301-x) instantaneous flow required to
In Sup deliver the desired net
20-FFY-301-x = (20-KQY-301 + 20-FQI-301B-x/20-FCY-301B-x)/(20 permeate flow.
KI-301-x)
Where: This value is calculated only
20-KI-301-x is the time remaining to next Backpulse, and, once per production cycle.
In Auto SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301A-x) × 20-FFY-301-x
In Sup SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301B-x) × 20-FFY-301-x
20-FCY-301A-x Derived Target Net Permeate Flow Calculated Flow Permeate 20-FCL-301 20-FCYH- When auto setpoint is selected. This is the value used in the calculation of 20-FC-301A-x. This is the Net Permeate each
301A train is required to produce to
Target Net Permeate Flow = (Plant Flow Demand - ∑ Supervisory meet the desired plant
Entered Flows) ÷ (Number of Trains In Production/Backpulse - production rate.
Number of Trains In Production/Backpulse with a Supervisory
Setpoint)
20-FCY-301A-x = (15-FC-401 - ∑ 20-FCY-301B-x for trains with

supervisory SP) ÷ (NUM_TR_PROD - NUM_TR_PROD_SUP).
Initially:
20-FCY-301A-x = 20-FCY-301B-x when alternating between auto
and supervisory setpoint. This is a bumpless transfer.
20-FCY-301B-x Setpoint Target Net Permeate Flow Operator Flow Permeate 20-FCL-301 20-FCYH- ### gpm When supervisory setpoint is selected. This is the value used in the calculation of 20-FC-301A-x. The operator can use this
Entered 301A setpoint to override the
Initially: calculated permeate
20-FCY-301B-x = 20-FCY-301A-x when alternating between auto requirement.
and supervisory setpoint. This is a bumpless transfer.
20-FIC-301A-x PID Permeate Instantaneous Flow Proportional Flow Permeate IN PRODUCTION: PV is the permeate flow, 20-FI-301A-x This controller adjusts the
Integral Derivative Controller steps as per the OSC SP = 20-FC-301A-x pump speed to maintain the
CV is the speed of the process pump. required flow rate.
The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20-
PDSLL-301-x action.
Deadband=0, Loop Update=0.5 seconds

E=SP-PV
20-FC-301A-x Derived Permeate Flow Instantaneous Flow Flow Permeate 20-FCL-301 20-FCYH- gpm Instantaneous Permeate Flow Setpoint = Target Net Permeate Flow This is the Instantaneous
Setpoint 301A × Net Instantaneous Production Correction Factor permeate required for the train
In Auto SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301A-x) × 20-FFY-301-x to meet its Net permeate
In Sup SP: 20-FC-301A-x = (20-FCY-301B-x) × 20-FFY-301-x requirement.
20-HS-201E-x Button Permeate Flow Auto Setpoint Button or Flow Permeate Permeate Flow Auto Setpoint Button
Permeate Flow Supervisory Setpoint Button Allows the operator to use the calculated setpoint for the train's net
permeate flow.
Permeate Flow Supervisory Setpoint Button:

Allows the operator to use a supervisory setpoint for the train's net
permeate flow.
When pressed the system will use the operator entered setpoint for
the trains net permeate flow until changed by the user.
Page 8 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-HS-201Q-x Button Demand Override Enabled Button or Sequence Permeate Demand Override Enabled Button This button will force a train to
Demand Override Disabled Button IN ALL MODES: enter and stay in
- all steps, train will not be effected by the low flow demand trigger. PRODUCTION independent
Demand Override Disabled Button: of the plant and train demand.
IN ALL MODES:
- all steps, train will be effected by the low flow demand trigger. The train flow setpoint will still
be determined automatically
Note: This button does not affect the speed of the process pumps unless the supervisory
setpoint is also selected.
This button returns trains to
automatic start and stop
triggering.
20-YA-301A-x Alarm Process Pump Fail Pump Permeate IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION & BACKPULSE MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN PRODUCTION & BACKPULSE & Y Y Y
- all steps requiring the pump to run, when the - all steps, places pump into manual-stop. The train proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN
MCC running confirmation is missing for 5 SHUTDOWN step 1. When the train's ON or OFF button is
seconds. IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN: pressed.
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. IN RECOVERY CLEAN &
IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next When process pump is placed into auto
step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out. and Recovery Clean Fails Timer clears
- 20-KQS-301W starts then continue steps.
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner
counts down)
20-KQS-301W Alarm Recovery Clean Fails Timer Pump Permeate 120 min IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: IN RECOVERY CLEAN & Y Y Y Alarms that halt a
steps 1 to 20, when one of the following alarms - proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. NEUTRALIZATION: RECOVERY CLEAN or
are active 20-YA-301A-x 20-FAH-301B-x, 20- When all hold step alarms clear. NEUTRALIZATION will hold
FAL-301B, 20-PDAH-301B-x, 20-PAHH-601B-x, the train in that mode until this
20-LALL-301 is active for 120 continuous timer times out. This provides
minutes. a delay while the operator can
attempt to clear the alarm.
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, when one of the following alarms are When this timer times out, the
active 20-YA-301A-x 20-FAH-301B-x, 20-FAL- trains will be shut down, and,
301B, 20-PDAH-301B-x, 20-PAHH-601B-x, 20- as a result, refilled with mixed
LALL-301 is active for 120 continuous minutes. liquor. This prevents the
membranes from drying out.
20-HA-301-x Alarm Process Pump MCC Not in Auto Pump Permeate IN ALL MODES: Pump control is removed from the PLC and the pump is placed in When the MCC is returned to Auto. Y
- all steps, when the MCC is no longer in Auto. the MCC control.
When reset, the pump control is returned to the PLC.

20-SMS-301A-x Setpoint Process Pump Permeating Start Speed Pump Permeate 25 100 60 % IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION:
- all steps where the pump is requested to start. - all steps, this is the pumps starting speed, held for 3 seconds,
before starting PID control.
20-SMS-301B-x Setpoint Process Pump Backpulsing Start Speed Pump Permeate 25 100 50 % IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE:
20-SMS-301C-x Setpoint Process Pump CIP & Neutralization Start Pump Permeate 25 100 40 % IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN &
Speed & NEUTRALIZATION: NEUTRALIZATION:
20-KQI-301-x Derived Process Pump Pump Permeate 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is
Accumulated Run Time When the pump is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the pump on the screen. pressed, run time resets to 0 hours.
20-HS-301-x Button Process Pump Mode Selection "Auto, Start Pump Permeate Only the mode selected and the Stop button are Changes mode to selected mode.
Forward, Start Reverse, Stop" visible on the HMI. Other buttons are hidden from
view. The modes "Start Forward", "Start Reverse" and "Stop" are only
available when the supervisory password has been entered.
To change the pump operating mode, operator
must press the Stop button on the HMI for the
pump.
When the Stop button is pressed there is a time

delay of 5 seconds to ensure water flow has
stopped. After this time, all buttons become
visible on the HMI.
20-SC-301-x Setpoint Process Pump Speed Pump Permeate IN PRODUCTION:
- all steps, this setpoint is overwritten by the CV value from PID loop
flow controller 20-FIC-301A-x to control the pump.
IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN &

NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, this setpoint is overwritten by the CV value from PID loop
flow controller 20-FIC-301B-x to control the pump.
Page 9 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-PDIR-301A-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP Prior to Last TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y
Backpulse - when the Pre-Backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201A, is Analysis Chart:
20-PDIR-301B-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP During Last TMP Permeate IN BACKPULSE & RELAX: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y
Backpulse/Relax - when the During Backpulse/Relax trigger, 20-KS Analysis Chart:
201B, is active. - prior to last backpulse/relax
- during last backpulse/relax
- after last backpulse/relax
- after previous backpulse/relax
20-PDIR-301C-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP After Last TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y
Backpulse - when the Post-backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201C, Analysis Chart:
is active. - prior to last backpulse
20-PDIR-301D-x Derived Backpulse Analysis TMP After Previous TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION: Move value of 20-PDIR-301C-x into 20-PDIR-301D-x. Y
Backpulse - when the Post-backpulse trigger, 20-KS-201C,
is active. Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Analysis Chart:
- prior to last backpulse
20-PDALL-301-x Alarm TMP Low Low TMP Permeate -8.0 0.0 -7.0 psig IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y This alarm will shut down the
- all steps, when the TMP is at or below this - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. train under cases of
setpoint for 5 seconds. uncontrollable TMP to prevent
membrane damage. Due to
issues with NPSH (permeate
pump elevation is close to
operating water level), the
max TMP will have to be
limited to-7 psi.
20-PDSLL-301-x Trigger TMP Low-Low TMP Permeate -8.0 0.0 -6.0 psig IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: IN ALL MODES: This trigger allows the PLC to
- all steps, when the TMP is at or below this - all steps, captures the initial value for the maximum of the 20-FIC- -all steps, when the TMP is above the manage TMP by ramping
setpoint. 301A-x CV as: setpoint, then increases the maximum down the pump.
value for 20-FIC-301A-x CV by 0.25% This allows the train to
Initial value for the maximum CV = (CV value of 20-FIC-301A-x) - every second until it reaches 100%. maintain a reduced level of
0.25 production without shutting
down or damaging
Then reduces the maximum value for 20-FIC-301A-x CV by 0.25% membranes.
every second until it reaches to the its minimum of 25%.
20-PDILL-301-x Indicator TMP Low-Low Display TMP Permeate IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: The operator is informed when
- all steps, when maximum value for 20-FIC-301A--all steps, the maximum value for 20-FIC-301A-x CV is limited to a - all steps, when the maximum value for 20- TMP limiting is occurring.
x CV is below 100%. value below 100% . FIC-301A-x CV is at 100%.
Displays "TMP at limit!" indication on the screen.
20-PDI-301-x Derived TMP TMP Permeate TMP = Membrane Header Pressure + Conversion Factor x (Height TMP (Trans Membrane
of the Pressure Transmitter Above the Top of the Membranes + Pressure) is a measurement
Height from the Bottom of the Tank to the Top of the Membrane of the pressure differential
Fibers - Membrane Tank Level) across the surface of the
membranes.
Consult Control Narrative for Further Details.
For WW deep membrane tanks where bottom of cassette is 30 in.) TMP is what drives water
WHEN 20-LI-201-x IS ABOVE 30 in.: (permeate) to cross the
20-PDI-301-x = 20-PI-301-x + C x (A+B - 20-LI-203-x) membrane. Excessive TMP
can damage the membranes.
WHEN 20-LI-201-x IS AT OR BELOW 30 in.:
20-PDI-301-x = 20-PI-301-x + C x (A+B - 30)
Var.A = 60 in. (Top of Membranes to Pressure Transmitter)

Var.B = 90 in. (Bottom of Tank to top of the Membrane Fibers)
C = 0.036127 psig/in.
20-PAHH-301A-x Alarm Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -3.0 0.0 -0.3 psig IN PRODUCTION: IN PRODUCTION: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y This alarm will shutdown the
High High - all steps, when the process pump is running and - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed. train to prevent damage to the
the pressure is at or above this setpoint for 10 pump or membranes,
seconds.
20-PAT-301-x Alarm Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -15.0 15.0 gpm IN ALL MODES: IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y Trains must shut down if the
Transmitter Out of Range When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: pressed. pressure cannot be
calibrated range for 2 seconds. - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. determined, to protect the
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) membranes.
20-PI-301-x Analog In Permeate Membrane Header Pressure Pressure Permeate -15.0 15.0 psig Displays value with engineering units on screen.
Actual instrument is 20-PE/PIT-301-x.
Page 10 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-HS-301-x Button Permeate Header Valve Mode Selection Valve Permeate Changes mode to selected mode.
"Auto, Open, Close"
Recirculation/RAS System
FC-MB-P-x Setpoint RAS Pump Flow Setpoint Flow Recirculation 0 3500 ### gpm IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, RELAX: Recirculation is set to occur at
RAS Setpoint = Flow Factor multiplied by train flow demand a constant multiple of the
MC-MB-P-x = FFY-MB-P * 20-FC-301A-x production rate.
Flow setpoint is updated every 15 minutes.
IN ALL OTHER MODES:

flow setpoint is 2170 gpm.
FFY-MB-P Setpoint Flow Factor For RAS Pumps Flow Recirculation 2.0 6.0 5.0 N/A Common setpoint for all trains in PRODUCTION, Flow Factor, FFY-MB-P, is used to calculate the RAS pump's flow This is the constant multiple
BACKPULSE & RELAX. setpoint, FC-MB-P-x. for recirculation.
YA-MB-P-x Alarm/Com RAS Pump Fail Pump Recirculation IN ALL MODES: IN STANDBY, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE & RELAX: When the pump is placed into auto or Y Y
m - all steps requiring the pump to run, when the - all steps, the train proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. manual-start.
MCC running confirmation is missing for 5
seconds. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN &
NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, continues steps until mode is completed then proceeds to
SHUTDOWN step 1.
KQI-MB-P-x Derived RAS Pump Pump Recirculation 0 30000 hours IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the Reset Run Time button is
Accumulated Run Time When the pump is operating. Displays accumulated run time for the pump on the screen. pressed, run time resets to 0 hours.
HS-MB-P-x Button RAS Pump Mode Selection "Auto, Start, Pump Recirculation Changes mode to selected mode.
Stop"
The modes "Start" and "Stop" are only available when the
KQS-MB-P-C-x Setpoint Standby RAS On Duration Pump Recirculation 2 20 5 min. IN STANDBY: IN STANDBY: When the timer times out or when the train
- steps as per OSC, when KQS-MB-P-D-x has - starts timer for KQS-MB-P-C-x is not in STANDBY.
timed out. - the pump starts without delay for KQS-MB-P-C-x minutes and
stops for KQS-MB-P-D-x seconds.
KQS-MB-P-D-x Setpoint Standby RAS Off Frequency Pump Recirculation 0, 10 30 30 min. IN STANDBY: IN STANDBY: When the timer times out or when the train
- steps as per OSC, when KQS-MB-P-C-x has - starts timer for KQS-MB-P-D-x is not in STANDBY.
timed out. - stops pump.
Pumps remain Off until timer KQS-MB-P-D-x times out.
When the value of KQS-MB-P-D-x is 0, the RAS is constant.
Backpulse System
20-KQS-301G Derived Staggered Backpulse Order Sequence Backpulse Staggered Backpulsing: Staggered backpulsing
The time slots to do backpulse are evenly distributed throughout one involves backpulsing each
production cycle. The distribution is based on the maximum number train separately and spreading
of trains installed in the plant. The production cycle is 12 minutes the backpulses evenly
and there are 4 trains. A backpulse is scheduled to occur every 3 throughout the global
minutes. Each train is assigned a time slot to do backpulse production timer.
according its train number, e.g., train 1 is backpulsed in the first time
slot, and train 2 is backpulsed in the second time slot, etc. Any train
that is not in a production cycle will be skipped.
20-KQS-301B Setpoint Backpulse/RELAX Duration Sequence Backpulse 5 200 30 sec. IN BACKPULSE: IN RELAX & BACKPULSE: When timer times out.
step 3. - starts timer. Proceeds as per OSC when timer times out.
IN RELAX:
step 2.
20-KS-201A Trigger Pre-Backpulse Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN PRODUCTION: Y
- end of in permeate step.
20-KS-201B Trigger Backpulse/Relax Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: Y
- 10 seconds into step 3.
IN RELAX:
- 10 seconds into step 2.
20-KS-201C Trigger Post-Backpulse Snapshot Trigger Info Backpulse IN PRODUCTION: Y
- 30 seconds into production steps.
20-FI-301B-x Derived Backpulsing Flow Info Backpulse 0 1500 gpm IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN,
NEUTRALIZATION:
- the flow measured by 20-FI-301
20-FC-301B Setpoint Backpulse Flow Setpoint Flow Backpulse 700 850 823 gpm Operator entered flow setpoint for backpulsing the entire train.
This is a plant setpoint.
Page 11 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-FIC-301B-x PID Process Pump - Backpulse, Maintenance Flow Backpulse IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE: This controller adjusts the
Clean Recovery Clean and Neutralization steps as per the OSC PV is the Backpulse flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x. pump speed to maintain the
Flow Proportional Integral Derivative IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: SP = 20-FC-301B. required flow rate for
Controller steps as per the OSC CV is the speed of the process pump, 20-SC-301-x. backpulsing in BACKPULSE,
IN RECOVERY CLEAN: The minimum CV is 25% and the maximum CV is defined by 20- MAINTENANCE CLEAN,
steps as per the OSC PDYH-301A-x action. RECOVERY CLEAN, and
IN NEUTRALIZATION: NEUTRALIZATION.
steps as per the OSC IN RECOVERY CLEAN and NEUTRALIZATION:
PV is the CIP flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x.
SP = 20-FC-301C.
CV is the speed of the process pump, 20-SC-301-x.
PDYH-301B-x action.
PV is the CIP flow rate measured at 20-FIT-301-x.
SP = 20-FC-301D
CV is the speed of the process pump, 20-SC-301-x.
PDYH-301B-x action.
Deadband = 0, LoopUpdate = 0.5 seconds

E=SP-PV
20-FAH-301B-x Alarm Process Pump Backpulsing, Flow High Flow Backpulse 700 915 905 gpm IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN BACKPULSE & MAINTENANCE Y Y Y
RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. CLEAN
- all steps when the backpulse flow is at or above IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the trains ON or OFF button is
the setpoint for 5 seconds. - all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next pressed.
step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out. IN RECOVERY CLEAN &
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. - 20-KQS-301W starts NEUTRALIZATION:
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner When permeate pump is placed into auto
counts down) and Recovery Clean Fails Timer clears
then continue steps.
20-FAL-301B-x Alarm Process Pump Backpulsing, Flow Low Flow Backpulse 200 450 394 gpm IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN BACKPULSE & MAINTENANCE Y Y Y
RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. CLEAN
- all steps where the pump is running and the IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the trains ON or OFF button is
backpulse flow is at or below the setpoint for 10 - all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next pressed.
seconds. step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out. IN RECOVERY CLEAN &
- 20-KQS-301W starts NEUTRALIZATION:
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner When permeate pump is placed into auto
20-FQI-301B-x Derived Backpulse Volume Volume Backpulse 0 10000 gal IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE:
- beginning of step 2 - all steps, totalizes backpulse flow. step 1
20-FIR-301B-x Derived Backpulse Analysis Flow During Last Flow Backpulse IN BACKPULSE & RELAX: Captures and Displays value and engineering units in Backpulse Y The flow during relax should
Backpulse/Relax - when the During Backpulse/Relax trigger, 20-KS Analysis Chart: be zero.
201B, is active. - prior to last backpulse/relax
- during last backpulse/relax
- after last backpulse/relax
- after previous backpulse/relax
20-HS-201F-x Button Enable Backpulse Button or Enable Relax Sequence Backpulse Enable Backpulse This selection will drive trains
Button Train will use backpulse mode and not relax mode. to BACKPULSE at the end of
Enable Relax each production cycle.
Train will use relax mode and not backpulse mode This selection will drive trains
to RELAX instead of
BACKPULSE at the end of
each production cycle.
20-LI-301 Analog In Backpulse Tank Level Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK in. Displays value with engineering units on screen.
HEIGHT]
Actual instrument is 20-LE/LIT-301.
20-LAH-301 Alarm Backpulse Tank Level High High Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK TBD in. IN ALL MODES: When the backpulse tank level is below this Y Y
HEIGHT] - all steps, when the backpulse tank level is at or setpoint.
above this setpoint for 10 seconds.
20-LS-301A Trigger Backpulse Tank Level Trigger High Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK TBD in. IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When 20-LS-301B is active. When this trigger is active,
HEIGHT] - when the backpulse tank level is at or above this - resets 20-LALL-301 permeate is no longer directed
setpoint for 3 seconds. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: to refill the backpulse tank.
-proceed according to the OSC
20-LS-301B Trigger Backpulse Tank Level Trigger High Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK TBD in. IN ALL MODES: IN RECOVERY CLEAN: When 20-LS-301A is active.
HEIGHT] - when the backpulse tank level is at or below this -proceed according to the OSC
setpoint for 3 seconds.
20-LAL-301 Alarm Backpulse Tank Level Low Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK TBD in. IN BACKPULSE: IN BACKPULSE: In the last step of Backpulse. Y When the level in the
HEIGHT] - all steps, when the backpulsing pump is running - auto stop the backpulse pump and continue steps. backpulse tank is low, the
and the backpulse tank level is at or below this pump is stopped for pump
setpoint for 10 seconds. protection.
Page 12 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-LALL-301 Alarm Backpulse Tank Level Low Low Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK TBD in. IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE: When the backpulse tank level is above the Y Y When the level in the
HEIGHT] RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, proceeds to the next step. setpoint 20-LS-301A. backpulse tank is low, the
- all steps, when the backpulsing pump is running - switch the mode of all trains to RELAX IN RECOVERY CLEAN & pump is stopped for pump
and the backpulse tank level is at or below this IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: NEUTRALIZATION: protection.
setpoint for 10 seconds. - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. When process pump is placed into auto
IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: and Recovery Clean Fails Timer clears
- all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next then continue steps.
step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out.
- 20-KQS-301W starts
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner
counts down)
20-LAT-301 Alarm Backpulse Tank Level Transmitter Out of Level Backpulse 0 [BP TANK in. IN ALL MODES: IN BACKPULSE: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y When the level in the
Range HEIGHT] When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the - all steps, proceeds to the next step. pressed. backpulse tank cannot be
calibrated range for 2 seconds. - switch the mode of all trains to RELAX determined, the pump is
(i.e. calibrated range = range max. - range min.) IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN, RECOVERY CLEAN & stopped for pump protection.
NEUTRALIZATION:
- all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1.
20-PDAH-301A-x Alarm Process Pump in Backpulse, TMP High TMP Backpulse 0.0 7.0 7.0 psig IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN BACKPULSE & MAINTENANCE Y Y Y When the TMP is too high, the
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. CLEAN backpulse pump is stopped to
- all steps, when the TMP is at or above this IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the train's ON or OFF button is protect the membranes. Due
setpoint for 5 seconds during backpulse. - all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next pressed. to issues with NPSH
step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out. IN RECOVERY CLEAN & (permeate pump elevation is
This is a common setpoint with multiple Alarms. - 20-KQS-301W starts NEUTRALIZATION: close to operating water
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner When process pump is placed into auto level), the max TMP will have
counts down) and Recovery Clean Fails Timer clears to be limited to 7 psi.
20-PDYH-301A-x Trigger TMP High TMP Backpulse 5.0 PDAH-8823 6.0 psig IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN, IN ALL MODES: This trigger allows the PLC to
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: NEUTRALIZATION: -all steps, when the TMP is below the manage TMP by ramping
- all steps, when the TMP is at or above this - all steps, captures the initial value for the maximum of the 20-FIC- setpoint, then increases the maximum down the pump.
setpoint. 301B-x CV as: value for 20-FIC-301B-x CV by 0.25% This allows the train to
every second until it reaches 100%. maintain a reduced level of
Initial value for the maximum CV = (CV value of 20-FIC-301B-x) - backpulse without shutting
0.25 down or damaging
membranes.
Then reduces the maximum value for 20-FIC-301B-x CV by 0.25%
20-PDIH-301A-x Indicator TMP High Display TMP Backpulse IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & RECOVERY CLEAN, IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN The operator is informed when
RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: NEUTRALIZATION: & RECOVERY CLEAN, TMP limiting is occurring.
- all steps, when maximum value for 20-FIC-301B--all steps, the maximum value for 20-FIC-301B-x CV is limited to a NEUTRALIZATION:
x CV is below 100%. value below 100% . - all steps, when the maximum value for 20-
Displays "TMP at limit!" indication on the screen. FIC-301B-x CV is at 100%.
20-PAH-601-x Alarm Process Pump in Backpulse, Switch 20- Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN PRODUCTION: Y
PSH-601-x Pressure High RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: step 1.
- all steps, when the switch is active for 5
seconds.
20-PAH-602-x Alarm Process Pump in Backpulse, Switch 20- Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN PRODUCTION: Y
PSH-602-x Pressure High RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: step 1.
- all steps, when the switch is active for 5
seconds.
20-PAHH-601B-x Alarm Process Pump in Backpulse, Pressure High Pressure Backpulse IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN & IN BACKPULSE, MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN BACKPULSE & MAINTENANCE Y Y Y When the Backpulse Pump
High RECOVERY CLEAN, NEUTRALIZATION: - all steps, proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. CLEAN discharge pressure is high,
- all steps, when both backpulse pressure high IN RECOVERY CLEAN & NEUTRALIZATION: When the train's ON or OFF button is the pump is stopped for pump
switches 20-PAH-601-x & 20-PAH-601-x are - all steps, places pump into manual-stop and proceeds to the next pressed. and piping protection.
active at the same time on the same train. step and waits in the step until 20-KQS-301W clears or times out. IN RECOVERY CLEAN &
- 20-KQS-301W starts NEUTRALIZATION:
Displays, "Train will be Shutdown due to active alarm" (banner When process pump is placed into auto
Clean In Place (CIP) System

20-FC-301C Setpoint CIP Pump Flow Setpoint - Recovery Clean Flow CIP 700 850 823 gpm Operator entered CIP flow setpoint for Recovery Clean, and
Neutralization.
This is a plant setpoint.
20-FC-301D Setpoint CIP Pump Flow Setpoint - Maintenance Flow CIP 300 500 492 gpm Operator entered CIP flow setpoint for Maintenance Clean.
Clean This is a plant setpoint.
20-YS-201A Trigger Membrane Tank Contains Cleaning CIP Sequence IN RECOVERY CLEAN (with Hypochlorite): IN ALL MODES: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
Solution - Chlorine - step 16. - all steps, displays banner "Train contains cleaning solution." - last step.
Contains Cleaning Solution, as indicated in the OSC, is defined as a
train that is (or was) in a RECOVERY CLEAN and the chemical has
not been neutralized.
The type of chemical solution is also noted. This status is used in the
event of a SHUTDOWN during a RECOVERY CLEAN.
20-YS-201B Trigger Membrane Tank Contains Cleaning CIP Sequence IN RECOVERY CLEAN (with acid): IN ALL MODES: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
Solution - Acid - step 16. - all steps, displays banner "Train contains cleaning solution." - last step.
Contains Cleaning Solution, as indicated in the OSC, is defined as a
train that is (or was) in a RECOVERY CLEAN and the chemical has
not been neutralized.
The type of chemical solution is also noted. This status is used in the
event of a SHUTDOWN during a RECOVERY CLEAN.
Page 13 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
CIP - Citric Acid Chemical Systems

23-HS-331-1 Button R. CLEAN Air to Citric Acid Pump Valve Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
Mode Selection "Auto, Open, Close"
23-HS-331-2 Button M. CLEAN Air to Citric Acid Pump Valve Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
23-HS-330-x Button Citric Acid Pump Valve Mode Selection Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
"Auto, Open, Close"
Interlock Prevent Starting of Citric Acid Pumps Pump CIP When a Sodium Hypochlorite Pump is ON. Blocks starting of any Citric Acid Pump, in auto or manual modes.
OR
When any train is in Maintenance Clean Chlorine
Clean or Recovery Clean Chlorine Clean.
CIP - Sodium Hypochlorite Chemical Systems

23-HS-131-2 Button M. CLEAN Air to Sodium Hypochlorite Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
Pump Valve Mode Selection "Auto, Open,
Close" The modes "Open" and "Close" are only available when the
23-HS-131-1 Button R. CLEAN Air to Sodium Hypochlorite Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
Pump Valve Mode Selection "Auto, Open,
Close" The modes "Open" and "Close" are only available when the
23-HS-130-x Button Sodium Hypochlorite Isolation Valve Mode Valve CIP Changes mode to selected mode.
Selection "Auto, Open, Close"
Interlock Prevent Starting of NaOCl Pumps Pump CIP When a Citric Acid Pump is ON. Blocks starting of any Sodium Hypochlorite Pump, in auto or manual
OR modes.
When any train is in Maintenance Clean Acid
Clean or Recovery Clean Acid Clean.
CIP - Maintenance Clean

20-KQS-201A Setpoint Maintenance Clean Aeration Step Timer Pump Maintenance 600 3600 900 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: This is the duration of initial
Clean - In aeration steps, as detailed in OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration. aeration in M. CLEAN.
Consult the OSC, Maintenance Clean steps, for details.

20-YS-201G-x Trigger Maintenance Clean Schedule Schedule Maintenance IN PRODUCTION & STANDBY: IN PRODUCTION: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Clean - all steps, when the system time is greater than - in permeate step, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 1. step 1.
or equal to the operator entered time to
start/enable the Maintenance Cleans, 20-KS- IN STANDBY:
201D-x, the train has not done a maintenance -proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 1.
clean since midnight, and a Maintenance Clean Only one Maintenance Clean can be scheduled per day.
has been selected to occur that day.
20-HS-201C-x Button Maintenance Clean to Occur on Given Day Schedule Maintenance Operator can select to have a Maintenance Clean on specific days o
Enable/Disable Button Clean the week. ENABLE indicates a Maintenance Clean for that train.
DISABLE indicates the PLC will not initiate a Maintenance Clean for
the train that day.
Only one Maintenance Clean can be scheduled per day, Sunday to
Saturday. Each day can have a different start/enabled and
stop/disabled time.
20-KS-201D-x Setpoint Maintenance Clean Start/Enable Time Schedule Maintenance 0 2400 Determined hr. Operator entered value to start/enable Maintenance Clean on the Operator- entered time to start
Clean by Operator given day. M. CLEAN.
20-FSH-375 Trigger Maintenance Cleans Delay or Aborted whenSchedule Maintenance System calculates the plant capacity as if there was one currently When the required production
Plant Flow Demand is high. Clean available train not in service. is too high to be
WHEN: accommodated with a train in
Current plant permeate demand is at or above [Max. net flow for MAINTENANCE CLEAN, that
Train 1 x Total number of trains available less one train]. clean is blocked from
IF: occurring.
15-FC-401 ≥
[(20-FCYH-301B) x (NUM_TR_PROD + # of tr. in Standby step 3
+ # of tr. in Maintenance Clean - 1]
The result of the calculation determines if one train can proceed to

do a Maintenance Clean and the remaining trains can meet the
current permeate demand.
Page 14 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-FAH-375-x Alarm Maintenance Clean Delay/Abort Alarm Schedule Maintenance When 20-FSH-375 is active and either the Prevents Maintenance Cleans from starting and aborts Maintenance When 20-FSH-375 is not active. Y Y
Clean Maintenance Clean is pending for train "X" or Cleans that are in progress.
train "X" is in a Maintenance Clean.
WHEN IN PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, OR RELAX:
The Maintenance Clean request is blocked and remains active.
Alarms and displays on the alarm banner "Maintenance Clean
delayed".
When alarm 20-FAH-375-x clears at lower plant demands, 20-FSH-
375 is not active, trains that have a Maintenance Clean request
active will proceed to Maintenance Clean step 1 when no other train
is in a Maintenance Clean, as described in the OSC.
WHEN IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:

steps 1 to 8, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 9.
steps 11, proceeds to MAINTENANCE CLEAN step 12.
Displays on the alarm banner "Maintenance Clean aborted"
23-HS-101A-x Button Maintenance Clean Sodium Hypochlorite Sequence Maintenance Allows the operator to select Sodium Hypochlorite Maintenance , all MAINTENANCE CLEANS
Button Clean Clean for each scheduled Maintenance Clean. selected/scheduled for this
train will use SODIUM
HYPOCHLORITE.
23-HS-201A-x Button Maintenance Clean Citric Acid Button Sequence Maintenance Allows the operator to select Citric Acid Maintenance Clean for each , all MAINTENANCE CLEANS
Clean scheduled Maintenance Clean. selected/scheduled for this
train will use CITRIC ACID.
20-KQS-301C Setpoint Maintenance Clean Repeated Pulse Sequence Maintenance 5 200 30 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Duration Clean steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.

20-KQS-301D Setpoint Maintenance Clean First & Last Pulse, Sequence Maintenance 5 200 120 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Pulse Duration Clean steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.

20-KQS-301E Setpoint Maintenance Clean Soak Duration Sequence Maintenance 5 600 270 sec. IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN:
Clean steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.

20-QS-301F Setpoint Maintenance Clean Number of iterations Sequence Maintenance 2 10 8 N/A IN MAINTENANCE CLEAN: Operator entered number of iterations for the chemical pulses in This value is set by process
Clean steps as noted in the OSC. Maintenance Clean mode. requirements.
This is the number of iterations the chemical pulses in Maintenance

Clean are repeated.
Consult the OSC, Maintenance Clean mode, for details.
CIP - Recovery Clean

20-KQS-201B Setpoint Recovery Clean Aeration Step Timer Sequence Recovery 0 3600 300 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN: This is the duration of initial
Clean steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration. aeration in R. CLEAN.
Consult the OSC, Recovery Clean steps, for details.

20-KQS-301T Setpoint Empty Tk Manual Flush Duration Sequence Recovery 0 1800 0 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Clean steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
Consult the OSC, Recovery Clean steps, for details.

20-QS-301V Setpoint Number of Iterations for Recovery Clean Sequence Recovery 0 3 0 N/A IN RECOVERY CLEAN: Operator entered number of iterations for the flushing the membrane
Mem Tk Flushing Clean steps as noted in the OSC. tank in Recovery Clean.
This is the number of iterations the flush step in Recovery Clean is

repeated.
Consult the OSC, Recovery Clean mode, for details.

20-KQS-301M Setpoint Neutralization Pulse Duration Sequence Neutralization 30 7200 120 sec. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:
steps as noted in the OSC. steps as noted in the OSC, this is the steps duration.
Consult the OSC, Neutralization steps, for details.

20-KQS-301P Setpoint Recovery Clean Extended Soak Duration Sequence Recovery 3 24 12 hr. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Clean - as per OSC. - duration of step as per OSC.
20-KQS-301Q Setpoint Recovery Clean Soak Extended Soak - Sequence Recovery 0, 30 300 60 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Mixing Duration Clean - in extended soak step and aeration is enabled, - setpoint is mixing duration with air in extended soak step.
and every time 20-KQS-301R times out. - aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-
KQS-301R seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
20-KQS-301R Setpoint Recovery Clean Soak Extended Soak Sequence Recovery 600 7200 1200 sec. IN RECOVERY CLEAN: IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Mixing Frequency Clean - as per OSC. - setpoint is mixing duration with air in extended soak step.
- aerates the membrane tank for 20-KQS-301Q seconds every 20-
KQS-301R seconds. Starts step with no mixing.
Page 15 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-HS-210C Button Extended Soak Mixing Enable/Disable Sequence Recovery Enable button: When selected, the cleaning
Button Clean When the button is selected there is intermittent aeration in the soak solution will be intermittently
step of Recovery Clean. mixed during the extended
Disable button: soak period of RECOVERY
When the button is selected there is no intermittent aeration in the CLEAN.
soak step of Recovery Clean
Neutralization System
20-KQS-201J Setpoint Neutralization Aeration Step Timer Sequence Neutralization 5 900 60 sec. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:

20-KQS-301U Setpoint Neutralization Soak Duration Sequence Neutralization 5 1200 900 sec. IN NEUTRALIZATION: IN NEUTRALIZATION:

20-HMS-201V-x Button RESUME NEUTRALIZATION Button Sequence Neutralization IN NEUTRALIZATION: The operator is required to
steps as per OSC, proceeds according to the OSC. confirm that
NEUTRALIZATION is
Consult interlocks in CLSC and OSC for more information. complete.
20-HMS-201W-x Button CONFIRM NEUTRALIZATION Button Sequence Neutralization IN NEUTRALIZATION:
steps as per OSC, proceeds to next step.
Vacuum System
20-HS-802-x Button Vacuum Ejector Compressed Air Valve Valve Vacuum Changes mode to selected mode.
20-PAH-301A-x Alarm Re-Priming Pressure High Pressure Vacuum 8.0 psig IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the train's ON or OFF button is Y Y Y
- when the compressed air ejector valve is - closes the ejector valves then proceeds to SHUTDOWN step 1. pressed.
requested open and the pressure, 20-PI-301-x, is
at or above this setpoint with no time delay. Displays on alarm banner "Priming Aborted"
20-KQS-802A Setpoint Train Ejector Operating Frequency - Master Sequence Vacuum 4 120 8 min. Operator entered value used as a Master Ejector Cycle Timer. This is the duration between
Ejector Cycle Timer Setpoint sets the frequency for ejector operation for each train. ejector opening on a single
Ejector for train X operates every 20-KQS-802A seconds. train.
Master Ejector Cycle Timer starts once any train is in STANDBY

step 3 and continues while there is at least one train in STANDBY
step 3. When there are no trains in this step, the cycle timer stops.
Train # ejector opens at time = # x 20-KQS-802B, of the Master

Ejector Cycle Timer as follows:
Train 1 ejector opens at start time = 1 x 20-KQS-802B
20-KQS-802B Derived Ejector Operating Interval - time between Sequence Vacuum sec. Derived setpoint is the ejector operation interval between any two This value is the time between
operating any two ejectors trains. successive calls to run an
This time is used to determine when to trigger an ejector to operate ejector.
in the Master Ejector Cycle Timer, as described in KY1-9200.
20-KQS-802B seconds = 60 sec. x 20-KQS-802A / (# of trains

installed)
20-KQS-802C-x Setpoint Train Ejector Open Duration Sequence Vacuum 5 30 15 sec. IN STANDBY step 3, & PRODUCTION: Operator entered value. This is the length of time each
- When ejector is required to operate according to Ejector opens for this duration. ejector is open during the
the start time calculated in 20-KQS-802A master cycle. This is a train
This is a plant setpoint. setpoint.
Treated Water System

20-FIY-375-x Derived Plant Permeate Flow Flow Plant 0 3000 gpm IN PRODUCTION and BACKPULSE:
Permeate - all steps, totalizes permeate flows (Sum of 20-FI-301A-x) minus
backpulse flow (Sum of 20-FI-301B-x).
20-FQI-375A Derived Today's Plant Production Volume Volume Plant -10000 1000000000 gal IN PRODUCTION: At midnight after current value is put into 20
Permeate - all steps, totalizes permeate volumes from each train. FQI-375B.
20-FQI-375B Derived Yesterday's Plant Production Volume Volume Plant -10000 1000000000 gal At midnight. Set value to 20-FQI-375A. Y
Permeate
20-TA-301 Alarm Plant Permeate Temperature Transmitter Temperature Plant 32 122 deg. F IN ALL MODES: When the transmitter is in range. Y Y
Out of Range Permeate When the transmitter is out of range by 2% of the
calibrated range for 2 seconds.
20-TI-301 Analog in Plant Permeate Temperature Temperature Plant 32 122 deg. F Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
Permeate
Actual instrument is 20-TE/TIT-301
Page 16 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
20-HS-320 Button Plant Permeate Turbidity Meter Isolation Valve Plant Changes mode to selected mode.
Valve Mode Selection "Auto, Open, Close" Permeate
20-AAT-320 Alarm Plant Permeate Turbidity Transmitter Out of Quality Permeate 0 10 NTU IN ALL MODES: IN ALL MODES: When the transmitter is in range. Y Y
Range When the transmitter is out of range by 1% of the - all steps, for all trains, changes to Relax mode and prevents
calibrated range for 2 seconds. scheduled Maintenance Cleans.
20-AI-320 Analog In Plant Permeate Turbidity Quality Permeate 0 10 NTU Displays value with engineering units on screen. Y
Actual instrument is 20-AE/AIT-320.

20-AAH-320A Alarm Permeate Turbidity High 1 Quality Permeate 0 10 5 NTU When any train is IN PRODUCTION: IN ALL MODES: When the turbidity reading is below this Y Y Backpulsing is prevented
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or - all steps, for all trains, changes to Relax mode and prevents setpoint. during times of turbidity spikes
above this setpoint for 20-KS-320A seconds. scheduled Maintenance Cleans. to prevent forcing foulants or
air back into the membranes.
20-AAH-320B Alarm Plant Permeate Turbidity High 2 Quality Permeate 0 10 1 NTU When any train is IN PRODUCTION: When the turbidity reading is below this Y
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or setpoint.
above this setpoint for 20-KS-320B seconds.
20-AAH-320C Alarm Plant Permeate Turbidity High 3 Quality Permeate 0 10 5 NTU When any train is IN PRODUCTION , When the turbidity reading is below this Y Y
BACKPULSE & RELAX: setpoint.
- all steps, when the turbidity reading is at or
above this setpoint for 20-KS-320C seconds.
20-KS-320A Setpoint Permeate Turbidity High 1 Timer Quality Permeate 0 60 10 sec. When any train is IN PRODUCTION: Timer is used to trigger high Alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320A is active. 320A setpoint.
20-AAH-320A setpoint, timer operates.
20-KS-320B Setpoint Plant Permeate Turbidity High 2 Timer Quality Permeate 0 300 60 sec. When any train is IN PRODUCTION: Timer is used to trigger high Alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320B is active. 320B setpoint.
20-AAH-320B setpoint, timer operates.
20-KS-320C Setpoint Plant Permeate Turbidity High 3 Timer Quality Permeate 0 300 30 sec. When any train is IN PRODUCTION: Timer is used to trigger high alarm. When turbidity reading is below 20-AAH-
- all steps, when turbidity reading is at or above When timer times out, 20-AAH-320C is active. 320C setpoint.
20-AAH-320C setpoint, timer operates.
Utility Air System

90-PAL-001 Alarm Compressed Air Pressure Low Low Pressure Utility Air IN ALL MODES: IN STANDBY: When 90-PSL-001 is no longer active. Y Y Y Y
- all steps, when 90-PSL-001 is active for 5 - intermittent aeration and priming is prevented
seconds.
IN PRIME, PRODUCTION, BACKPULSE, RELAX:
- all steps, proceeds to STANDBY step 1.
- all steps, proceeds to STANDBY step 1.
Displays on alarm banner "Maintenance Clean Aborted."
IN RECOVERY CLEAN:
Displays on alarm banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
IN NEUTRALIZATION:
Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
System Power
20-JAL-001 Alarm Plant Power Failure Plant System Power IN ALL MODES: All trains proceed to POWER OFF mode. When power is restored. Y Y
- all steps, when the system detects that power is
lost for 1.5 seconds. The system blocks all fail safe inputs that are normally closed (to
avoid nuisance alarms).
Page 17 of 18
AO # 200443
Town of Taos MBR
Notification
ZenoTrac®
Shutdown
Range Range
Standby
Callout
Min Max
Interlock Startup Step 1 Startup System Power When the system detects that power is restored. This startup sequence shows the order in which the devices in the
plant are re-enabled after a power interruption or after an emergency
stop has been reset.
All trains proceed to POWER OFF until power is resumed and the
train is enabled.
ZeeWeed® trains that were in STANDBY, PRODUCTION,

BACKPULSE/RELAX, or MAINTENANCE CLEAN prior to the power
failure, will proceed to STANDBY step 1 as per the start-up
sequence.
ZeeWeed® trains that were in RECOVERY CLEAN, prior to the
power failure, will proceed to SHUTDOWN step 1 as per the start-up
sequence. Displays on alarm banner "Recovery Clean Aborted."
ZeeWeed® trains that were in NEUTRALIZATION, prior to the
power failure, will proceed to SHUTDOWN step 1 as per the start-up
sequence. Displays on alarm banner "Neutralization Aborted."
A delay is provided in each step to allow for devices to start before
advancing to the next step. Steps are skipped for those devices
which are not ready.
Allows utility air compressors to run if required.
Allows transmitters to warm up and complete a self diagnostics.
Displays "Power-up Delay" on the screen.
Interlock Startup Step 2 Startup System Power 60 seconds after start of step 1 and 90-PSL-001 Re-enables all common, non-sequenced valves.
shows normal pressure.
Interlock Startup Step 3 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of the previous step. Allows train 1 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y Y
There is no delay if the device in the previous step
is not required. Train proceeds to either STANDBY step 1 or SHUTDOWN step 1.
See start-up sequence step 1 for more details.
Interlock Startup Step 4 Startup System Power 30 seconds after the start of previous step. Allows train 2 to come out of POWER OFF mode. Y Y
Train proceeds to either STANDBY step 1 or SHUTDOWN step 1.



Page 18 of 18
SECTION 5
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
LIST
This page has been
C = CRITICAL
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST FOR Town of Taos PROJECT NO. 200443 R = RECOMMENDED
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
Item Qty GE WATER # Tag # Item Details C R M CS
No. List
PLEASE NOTE: THIS IS THE MOST CURRENT RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST BASED ON THE BILL OF MATERIAL AT THE TIME OF REQUEST. FOR A FULL CUSTOM PRICED LIST PLEASE ALLOW 1-2
WEEKS FOR GENERATION.
PUMPS
1 SPARES FOR EJECTOR 1 VACUUM PUMP. X
2 SPARES FOR EJECTOR 1 VACUUM CHECK VALVE X

3 SPARES FOR EJECTOR 1 VACUUM GUAGE X
23-P-330-10
SPARES FOR CHEMICAL
4
INJECTION PUMP
1 23-P-330-11 CHEMICAL PUMP SPARE PARTS KIT X
23-P-130-10
SPARES FOR CHEMICAL
5
INJECTION PUMP
1 23-P-130-11 CHEMICAL PUMP SPARE PARTS KIT X
SPARES INCLUDE:
SCREW ROTOR TIP, FL 1036, CCW
SCREW ROTOR TIP, FL 1036, CW
T-PLUG FOR SCREW ROTOR TIP
COVER PROTECTION PLATE, HARDENED STEEL
20-P-301-1
AXIAL CASING PROTECTION PLATE, HARDENED STEEL
20-P-301-2
COUNTERSUNK SCREW; M8X20; STAINLESS STEEL
6 SPARES FOR PROCESS PUMP 1 PROCESS PUMP 20-P-301-3
20-P-301-4
MECHANICAL SEAL, CAST IRON; O-RING, BUNA-N X
O-RING; 1176 X 9
O-RING, 67 X 4
O-RING, 110 X 3
WITHDRAWAL TOOL FOR ROTOR BODY
SPECIAL TOOL FOR MECHANICAL SEAL
SPECIAL TOOL FOR HOLDING BUSH
VALVES
VALVE, BALL, 0.5", TRUE UNION, CPVC BODY, TEFLON SEATS, VITON O-RINGS,
23-FV-330-1
SOCKETWELD, Vented Ball , ASSEMBLY
23-FV-330-2
TYPE 233 C/W PA11 DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION ACTUATOR
7 BALL VALVE 0.5" 1 1033661 23-FV-330-3
23-FV-330-4
ASSEMBLY C/W TYPE 5470 120VAC SOLENOID X
VALVE CSA WITH NAMUR PLATE AND MANUAL OVERRIDE, CSA/UL APPROVED.
VALVE, BALL, 0.5", TRUE UNION, CPVC BODY, TEFLON SEATS, EPDM O-RINGS,
23-FV-130-1
SOCKETWELD, , ASSEMBLY TYPE 233 C/W PA11 DOUBLE
23-FV-130-2
ACTING PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION ACTUATOR, ASSEMBLY
8 BALL VALVE 0.5" 1 1033666 23-FV-130-3
23-FV-130-4
C/W CSA/UL A PPROVED SOLENOID PILOT VALVE 120/60 VAC TYPE X
5470
USA / ZENON Membrane Solutions
CAD / GE Water Process Technologies Canada RSPL200443XMR1 8/9/2011 AC 1 of 6
C = CRITICAL
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
No. List
VALVE, BUTTERFLY,, 8" CAST IRON LUG STYLE BODY,
20-FV-301-1
RATED VACUUM TO 50 PSI, UNDERCUT NYLON COATED DISC, SS SHAFT, EPDM
20-FV-301-2
SEAT, BRAY PNEUMATIC RACK AND PINION DOUBLE ACTING ACTUATOR SERIES
9 BUTTERFLY VALVE 8" 1 1041078 20-FV-301-3
20-FV-301-4
92/118, C/W NAMUR DIRECT MOUNT SOLEN OID 110VAC NEMA 4,4X S63 120V DIN X
WITH SPEED CONTROLS AND PLUG CONNECTOR;
VALVE, SOLENOID,
23-FV-131-1 2-WAY AIR/WATER 1/2" FNPT, SS BODY, VITON
23-FV-131-2 SEAL, NORMALLY CLOSED, 7/16" ORIFICE, Cv-3.3GPM (WATER) OR 110 SCFM
10 SOLENOID VALVE 1 1023781 23-FV-331-1
23-FV-331-2
(AIR), 0 PSI PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL REQUIRED, 0-230 PSI PRESS URE RANGE,
C/W TYPE H ELECTRICAL CONNECTION, IDENTIFICATIONL AND 1/2"
X
FNPT CONDUIT RING ADAPTOR,
0.5" ANGLE SEAT AND SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY

USED FOR VACCON EJECTOR
Type 2000 Piston Valve material
2/2-Ways Normaly Closed
Orifice: 13mm (1/2")
Seal: FKM (viton)
Body: Stainless Steel
11 ANGLE SEAT VALVE 1 1033457 Port: NPT 1/2"
Actautor: PA
X
Actuator Size: 50mm
FLOW ABOVE SEAT
VACUUM VERSION
Type 6518 Pilot Valve
Power Supply: 120 Volts / 60 Hertz / 2 Watts
BUTTERFLY VALVE, LUG, HIGH PERFORMANCE, 8", K-LOK

20-FV-210-1 ANSI 150#, 316SS LUG STYLE BODY, 316SS DISC,
20-FV-210-2 17-4pH,SS STEM, RTFE SEAT,FIBERGLASS RTFE IMPREGNATED BUSHINGS, C/W
20-FV-210-3 MORIN SERIES B-023 DA, DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC AC TUATOR SCOTCH YOKE
20-FV-210-4 STYLE, DUCTILE IRON ACTUATOR BODY AND END CAPS, SS CYLINDER C/W
20-FV-211-1 WESTLOCK QUANTUM POSITION MONITOR
20-FV-211-2 1/2" CONDUIT ENTRY, C/W WITH BUILT-IN 120VAC SOLENOID ENERGIZED TO
12 CYCLIC VALVE 8" 1 1033378
20-FV-211-3 CLOSE, MANUAL OVER RIDE, POWER LOSS OPENS, TWO SPDT MAGNUM PROXIMITY X
20-FV-211-4 SWITCHES 3A @ 120VAC, NEMA 4, 4,4X, C/W ASCO SERIES 112, 1/4" NPT
NOTE THE FILTER AIR REGULATOR FILTER/REGULATOR WITH PRESSURE GAUGE, , 25 MICRON FILTER
NEEDS TO BE VERTICAL WHEN WITH BOWL PROTECTOR, SEMI-AUTO DRAIN, PRESSURE CONTR OL RANGE 7-145 PSI,
INSTALLED COMES ASSEMBLED WITH TWO DELTROL 1/4" INLINE SPEED CONTROLS & TWO
PARKER ES25MB MUFFLERS FOR NOISE REDUCTION.
INSTRUMENTS
20-PI-302-1
PRESSURE GAUGE, 30PSI, SS CASE 100MM DIAL
20-PI-302-2
(4"), 0-30 PSI (DUAL SCALE PSI & kPa) 1/2" LOWER CONNECTION, GLYCERINE
13 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 1023430 20-PI-302-3
20-PI-302-4
FILLED, 3-2-3% ASME GR B ACCURACY, POLYCARBONATE WINDOW. X
20-PI-301-1 PRESSURE GAUGE, 30PSI, SS CASE, 100MM DIAL
20-PI-301-2 (4"), 30" MERCURY-30 PSI (DUAL SCALE IN MECURY & PSI/kPa) 1/2" LOWER
14 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 1023462 20-PI-301-3
20-PI-301-4
CONNECTION, GLYCERINE FILLED, 3-2-3% ASME GR B ACCURACY, POLYCARBONATE
WINDOW.
X
C = CRITICAL
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
No. List
23-PI-130-1
23-PI-330-1 PRESSURE GAUGE, 200PSI, SS CASE 63MM DIAL
DIAPHRAGM SEAL 1026673 TO BE (2.5"), 0-200 PSI (DUAL SCALE PSI & kPa) 1/4" LOWER CONNECTION,
15 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 1023435
ATTACHED TO PRESSURE GAUGES GLYCERINE FILLED, 3-2-3% ASME GR B ACCURACY, POLYCARBONATE WINDOW. X
23-PI-130-1 AND 23-PI-330-1
DIAPHRAGM SEAL FOR 23-PI-130-1 DIAPHRAGM SEAL, TYPE 300, ALL CLAMPED,
DIAPHRAGM SEAL FOR ABOVE AND 23-PI-330-1 PRESSURE 1/2" FNPT PROCESS CONNECTION, PVC HOUSING, TEFLON DIAPHRAGM, 1/4" FNPT
16
PRESSURE GAUGE
1 1026673
GUAGES GAUGE CONNECTION, GAUGE MOUNTED WITH GLYCERINE FILLING FLUID. X
20-PSH-601-1 20-PSH-601-2
20-PSH-601-3 20-PSH-601-4 PRESSURE SWITCH,
20-PSH-602-1 20-PSH-602-2 GENERAL PURPOSE MICROSWITCH, NEMA 4X ENCLOSURE, IP66, 15 AMP SPDT
20-PSH-602-3 20-PSH-602-4 CONTACT, Teflon DIAPHRAGM, 1/2" PROCESS CONNECTION, 0 TO 30 PSI NOMINAL
SP= RANGE (0.5 TO 1.5 PSI DE ADBAND ON POSITIVE PRESSURE), 500 PSIG PROOF
17 PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH 1 1033361 20-PSH-301-1 20-PSH-301-2
20-PSH-301-3 20-PSH-301-4
PRESSURE, FACTORY SET @ X PSIG (INCREASING/DECREASING), CSA APPROVED, X
20-PSH-302-1 20-PSH-302-2 PAPER TAG.
20-PSH-302-3 20-PSH-302-4
SP= 20PSIG INCREASING
sUPPLY AS 120VOLT
SWITCH, LEVEL, CABLE SUSPENDED 4" Ø FLOAT,
20-LSL-201B-1 20-LSL-201B-2 POLYPROPYLENE HOUSING, 39 FT LONG OIL RESISTANT PVC CABLE, 120VAC OR
18 LEVEL SWITCH LOW 1 1032157 20-LSL-201B-3 20-LSL-201B-4
20-LSLL-201C-1 20-LSLL-201C-2
220VAC, 1PH/60Hz, -20oC to 60oC OPERATING TEMPERATURE X
20-LSLL-201C-3 20-LSLL-201C-4
TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER, 0-50 DEGREE C.,

WITH TMT180 TRANSMITTER, PT100 CLASS B RTD, 75MM
INSERTION LENGTH, 316SS STRAIGHT TIP THERMOWELL WITH 3/4" MNPT PROCESS
20-TE-301
19 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER 1 1022657 CONNECTION, 4-20mA 2-WIRE ANALOG FIXE D RANGE OUTPUT, 10-36 VDC LOOP
POWERED,COATED ALUMINUM IP55 HOUSING, 1/2" NPT CONDUIT ENTRY, GREATER
X
OF 0.1% MEASURING RANGE OR 0.1 DEGREE C. ACCURACY.
TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE, ALUMINUM

RANGE -15 TO +15 PSI HOUSING W/ 1/2" NPT PROCESS CONNECTION, CAPACITIVE WETTED SENSOR W/
CERAMIC DIAPHRAGM: 2 BAR G, 200 KPA, 30 PSIG10X OVERLOAD PROOF.
LINEARITY = +/- 0.1%, TURNDOWN= 100 :1, HIGH RELIABILITY, 4-20 mA HART
20-PIT-301-1 OUTPUT W/ LINEARISATION & LCD DISPLAY, CSA CL. I II III, DIV 1, GROUP
20 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1 1026612
20-PIT-301-2 A-G. X
20-PIT-301-3
20-PIT-301-4 RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED IN THE BOM TEXT.
C = CRITICAL
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
No. List
TRANSMITTER, LEVEL, 316L 3"
150# ANSI FLANGE PROCESS CONNECTION, TRANSMITTER FOR HYDROSTATIC LEVEL
MEASUREMENT, TUBE (ROD) VERSION FOR MOUNTING IN TANKS, FLUSH MOUNTED
20-LIT-201A-1 CONTITE-SENSOR W/ METALLIC D IAPHRAGM ALLOY C4, HERMETICALLY WELDED.
20-LIT-201A-2 CSA, CL. 1, DIV 2, GROUP A-D. MEASURING RANGE: 0-15 PSIG. CELL W/
20-LIT-201A-3 LINEARITY < 0.2%, SILICON FILL & VITON SEAL. LOOP POWERED 4-20 mA W/
21 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 1030631 20-LIT-201A-4 DISPLAY, HART PROT. 316l SS NEMA 4X HOUSING W/ 1/2"" CON DUIT
CONNECTION.
X
ROD length = 132"
PLEASE STATE THE LENGTH OF THE PROBE, ROD LENGTHS AVAILABLE 16" to 160"
THE RANGE TO BE SPECIFIED IN THE BOM TEXT ("", FT, OR M)."
TRANSMITTER, LEVEL 316L 3"

150 # ANSI FLANGE PROCESS CONNECTION, TRANSMITTER FOR HYDROSTATIC LEVEL
MEASUREMENT, TUBE/ROD TYPE, ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 1/2" NPT, NEMA 4X/6P,
APPROVALS, CSA C/US IS C1.I, II, III DIV .1 Gr.A-G, CSA C/US IS C1.I
DIV.2 Gr.A-D, Ex ia, C:zone 0,1,2/US:zone0, 1, 2,20, 21, 22, 4-20mA
HART.
22 LEVEL TRANSMITTER 1 LEVEL TRANSMITER
ROD LENGHT 132"
X
NO TAG ALLOCATED.
QUOTE 80617964, 19-05-2011
MISCELLANEOUS
STRAUB COUPLING, NON-RESTRAINT, FLEX 1L, F1L 3" IPS, E, 316L SS CASING,
LP & INSERT, 3.7" LONG, 3" NOM INNER DIAMETER (88.9
MM), 5.4" OUTER DIAMETER, 1 PC, PRESSURE RATING: 232 PSI,
316L SS FULL VACUUM RATED STRIP INSERT EPDM SEALING SLE EVE, 2 X BOLTS,
23 STRAUB COUPLING 3" 9 1027929
M8, 5.5 FT.LB, X
MAX PIPE GAP 1".
STRAUB COUPLING, NON-RESTRAINT, FLEX 1L, F1L 4" IPS, E, 316LSS CASING,
LP & INSERT, 3.7" LONG, 4" NOM INNER DIAMETER (114.3
MM), 5.4" OUTER DIAMETER, 1 PC, PRESSURE RATING: 232 PSI,
316L SS FULL VACUUM STRIP INSERT EPDM SEALING SLEEVE, 2 X BOLTS, M8,
5.5 FT.LB, X
MAX PIPE GAP 1".
STRAUB COUPLING, NON-RESTRAINT, FLEX 1L, F1L 6" IPS, E, 316L SS CASING,
LP & INSERT, 4.21" LONG, 6" NOM INNER DIAMETER (168.3 MM), 7.5" OUTER
DIAMETER, 1 PC PRESSURE RATING: 232 PSI, 316L SS FULL VACUUM RATED
STRIP INSERT EPDM SEALING SL EEVE, 2 X BOLTS, M10, 7.5 FT.LB. X
FILTER ONLY FOR - FILTER, COMPRESSED AIR, GENERAL PURPOSE, 40 MICRON

ELEMENT, 1/4" NPTF CONNECTIONS, C/W SIGHT GAUGE AND TWIST DRAIN, METAL
26 40 MICRON FILTER 5 1031135
BOWL X X
C = CRITICAL
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
No. List
ZEE-WEED Membrane Spares
REQUIRED FOR REGULAR CASSETTE & MEMBRANE MAINTENANCE.
ZW500D V2.1.3 KIT INCLUDES: INTERCONNECTION STRIP, O-RINGS, BOLTS, NUTS, WASHERS, MODULE RELEASE TOOL,
27
CASSETTE SPARE PARTS KIT
1 1029418
LOCKING KEYS. X
ZW 500D Module Permeate
28
Adapter
1 1028578 SINGLE MODULE ADAPTER FOR FLUSHING/BUBBLE TESTING X
29 ZW500D REMOVAL TOOL 1 1032836 ZW500D MDL REMOVAL TOOL(REV5-NOV2007) X
ZW500D, DUMMY ELEMENT, TOP AND BOTTOM FILLED WITH URETHANE
30 ZW500D Blank Header 1 1029083 X
( 4 ) 20cc SYRINGE, ( 10 ) NEEDLES (PURPLE), ( 5 ) 22G NEEDLES, SILICONE ( SHELF LIFE OF 6 MONTHS ),
31 Fiber Repair Kit 1 1022887
SCISSORS 4 1/2", ( 2 ) GLOVES. X X
32 Silicone Dispensing Gun 1 1025796 FOR USE WITH FIBER REPAIR KIT. X
Pneumatic Silicone Injection Tool Compressed Air Injection Gun (requires 10cc barrels)
33
(LITTLE JOE)
1 1028260 *Option to above Item* X
Membrane Maintenance Station -
34
Tank
1 1027906 PLASTIC WORK TANK WITH METAL STAND X
35
Pump Kit
1 1027907 SKID MOUNTED - PUMP FOR FLUSHING/PRESERVING MODULES X
36
Hose Kit
1 1027908 3 HOSE SECTIONS FOR CONNECTION PUMP KIT TO MODULES X
37
Work Tray
1 1027985 SLIDING TRAY FOR TOP OF TANK X
PORTABLE INSTRUMENTS FOR TESTING THE INTEGRITY OF ZEEWEED MEMBRANES. THE UNIT
INCLUDES A HIGH ACCURACY DIGITAL PRESSURE DISPLAY, A PRECISION AIR REGULATOR WITH
38 Bubble/Pressure Decay Test Kit 1 1023613 PRESET UPPER LIMIT PRIMARY. PROTECTION AT 8 PSI, A SECONDARY AIR RELIEF PROTECTION VALVE,
COALESCING AIR FILTER, STAINLESS STEEL CASING WITH HANDLE, 20 FEET OF 1/4 TUBING, 2X3" AND
X
2X4" CAMLOCK END CAPS EACH WITH A 1/4" FEMALE QUICK CONNECT.
C = CRITICAL
M = MAINTENANCE
CS = CONSUMABLES
Item Check
No. List
TTF IS AN ANALYTICAL TEST PARAMETER THAT PROVIDES CRITICAL DATA ON THE FILTERABILITY
OF MIXED LIQUOR BIOREACTOR SLUDGE
LAB EQUIPMENT PACKAGE
(1) CERAMIC BUCHNER FUNNEL 100 MM DIAMETER (1) ERLENMEYER SUCTION 1000ML SUCTION
TIME TO FILTER KIT FLASK
39
LAB EQUIPMENT
1 1030547 FOR WASTE WATER
(1) FILTER PAPERS, GLASS MICRO-FIBRE, 9CM, BOX OF 100 (1) GRADUATED CYLINDER 100 ML PLASTIC X
(1) RUBBER STOPPER 1 HOLE, # 8, PACK OF 12 (1) BEAKER 250 ML, PLASTIC (1) POCKET THERMOMETER
0-120F
(1) STOPWATCH
VACUUM PUMP EQUIPMENT

(1) VACUUM PUMP; 120 VAC/60 HZ OR 250 VAC/50 HZ (1) VACUUM REGULATOR, 0 TO 29" HG,
2.47CFM WITH GAUGE
TIME TO FILTER KIT
40
VACUUM PUMP
1 1030548 FOR WASTE WATER (1) MALE PIPE ADAPTER, POLYETHYLENE, 1/8" X 1/4", (1) REDUCER BUSHING, 3/8X1/8, THREAD X
THREAD, NYLON
X
(1) NIPPLE 1/8"X1" NPT(M) X NPT(M), 316SS (6) FEET OF 1/4" PLASTIC TUBE
TIME TO FILTER KIT

41
FILTER PAPERS
1 1030539 FILTER PAPERS, GLASS MICRO-FIBRE, 9CM, BOX OF 100 X X
DELIVERY TIME AVERAGES
PLC, INSTRUMENTS - 4 - 6 WEEKS TRANSMITTERS 8 - 12 WEEKS

MEMBRANE SPARES - STOCK - 2 WEEKS GAUGES, VALVES, SWITCHES - 4 - 6 WEEKS
FILTERS BELTS - STOCK - 2 WEEKS PUMPS, BLOWERS, MIXERS ETC - 8 - 12 WEEKS
TERMS:
QUOTATION #
FCA OAKVILLE, ONTARIO CANADA
PAYMENT TERMS: TE BE NEGOTIATED AT A LATER DATE

PRICES ARE VALID 30 DAYS.
ONCE A SPARE IS USED. IT SHOULD BE REPLACED IN INVENTORY
FREIGHT, TAXES AND DUTIES EXTRA WHERE APPLICABLE
DELIVERY VARIES FROM STOCK TO 12 WEEKS
LIST COMPLETED BY ALEX CAVICCHI - AUG 1 2011
PHONE # 905-465-3030 EXT 3383

EMAIL: alex.cavicchi@ge.com
SECTION 6
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA
SHEETS
This page has been
GLYCEROL Page 1 of 7
MSDS Number: G4774 * * * * * Effective Date: 05/25/05 * * * * * Supercedes: 08/10/04
GLYCEROL
1. Product Identification
Synonyms: 1,2,3-propanetriol; glycerin; glycol alcohol; glycerol, anhydrous
CAS No.: 56-81-5
Molecular Weight: 92.10
Chemical Formula: C3H5(OH)3
Product Codes:
J.T. Baker: 2135, 2136, 2140, 2142, 2143, 2988, 4043, M778
Mallinckrodt: 0564, 5092, 5093, 5100
2. Composition/Information on Ingredients
Ingredient CAS No Percent Hazardous

--------------------------------------- ------------ ------------ ---------
Glycerin 56-81-5 90 - 100% Yes
3. Hazards Identification
Emergency Overview
--------------------------
http://www.jtbaker.com/msds/englishhtml/G4774.htm 8/26/2005
CAUTION! MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO SKIN, EYES, AND RESPIRATORY

TRACT. MAY AFFECT KIDNEYS.
SAF-T-DATA(tm) Ratings (Provided here for your convenience)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Health Rating: 2 - Moderate (Life)
Flammability Rating: 1 - Slight
Reactivity Rating: 0 - None
Contact Rating: 1 - Slight
Lab Protective Equip: GOGGLES; LAB COAT; VENT HOOD; PROPER GLOVES
Storage Color Code: Green (General Storage)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Potential Health Effects

----------------------------------
Inhalation:
Due to the low vapor pressure, inhalation of the vapors at room temperatures is unlikely.
Inhalation of mist may cause irritation of respiratory tract.
Ingestion:
Low toxicity. May cause nausea, headache, diarrhea.
Skin Contact:
May cause irritation.
Eye Contact:
May cause irritation.
Chronic Exposure:
May cause kidney injury.
Aggravation of Pre-existing Conditions:
Persons with pre-existing skin disorders or eye problems or impaired liver or kidney
function may be more susceptible to the effects of the substance.
4. First Aid Measures

Inhalation:
Remove to fresh air. Get medical attention for any breathing difficulty.
Ingestion:
Induce vomiting immediately as directed by medical personnel. Never give anything by
mouth to an unconscious person. Get medical attention.
Skin Contact:
Immediately flush skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove contaminated
clothing and shoes. Wash clothing before reuse. Thoroughly clean shoes before reuse. Get
medical attention if irritation develops.
Eye Contact:
Immediately flush eyes with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes, lifting upper and lower
eyelids occasionally. Get medical attention if irritation persists.
5. Fire Fighting Measures

Fire:
Flash point: 199C (390F) CC
Autoignition temperature: 370C (698F)
Slight fire hazard when exposed to heat or flame. Slight fire hazard when exposed to heat or
flame.
Explosion:
Above flash point, vapor-air mixtures may cause flash fire.
Fire Extinguishing Media:
Use any means suitable for extinguishing surrounding fire. Water spray may be used to
extinguish surrounding fire and cool exposed containers. Water spray will also reduce fume
and irritant gases.
Special Information:
In the event of a fire, wear full protective clothing and NIOSH-approved self-contained
breathing apparatus with full facepiece operated in the pressure demand or other positive
pressure mode.
6. Accidental Release Measures

Ventilate area of leak or spill. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment as specified
in Section 8. Contain and recover liquid when possible. Collect liquid in an appropriate
container or absorb with an inert material (e. g., vermiculite, dry sand, earth), and place in a
chemical waste container. Do not use combustible materials, such as saw dust. Do not flush
to sewer!
7. Handling and Storage

Keep in a tightly closed container, stored in a cool, dry, ventilated area. Protect against
physical damage. Isolate from incompatible substances. Containers of this material may be
hazardous when empty since they retain product residues (vapors, liquid); observe all
warnings and precautions listed for the product.
8. Exposure Controls/Personal Protection

Airborne Exposure Limits:
For Glycerin Mist:
- OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL):
Total Dust: 15 mg/m3 (TWA);
Respirable Fraction: 5 mg/m3(TWA).
- ACGIH Threshold Limit Value (TLV):
10 mg/m3
Ventilation System:
A system of local and/or general exhaust is recommended to keep employee exposures
below the Airborne Exposure Limits. Local exhaust ventilation is generally preferred
because it can control the emissions of the contaminant at its source, preventing dispersion
of it into the general work area. Please refer to the ACGIH document, Industrial
Ventilation, A Manual of Recommended Practices, most recent edition, for details.
Personal Respirators (NIOSH Approved):
If the exposure limit is exceeded and engineering controls are not feasible, a half facepiece
particulate respirator (NIOSH type P95 or R95 filters) may be worn for up to ten times the
exposure limit or the maximum use concentration specified by the appropriate regulatory
agency or respirator supplier, whichever is lowest.. A full-face piece particulate respirator
(NIOSH type P100 or R100 filters) may be worn up to 50 times the exposure limit, or the
maximum use concentration specified by the appropriate regulatory agency, or respirator
supplier, whichever is lowest. Please note that N filters are not recommended for this
material. For emergencies or instances where the exposure levels are not known, use a full-
facepiece positive-pressure, air-supplied respirator. WARNING: Air-purifying respirators
do not protect workers in oxygen-deficient atmospheres.
Skin Protection:
Wear protective gloves and clean body-covering clothing.
Eye Protection:
Use chemical safety goggles. Maintain eye wash fountain and quick-drench facilities in
work area.
9. Physical and Chemical Properties

Appearance:
Clear oily liquid.
Odor:
Odorless.
Solubility:
Miscible in water.
Specific Gravity:
1.26 @ 20C/4C
pH:
(neutral to litmus)
% Volatiles by volume @ 21C (70F):
0
Boiling Point:
290C (554F)
Melting Point:
18C (64F)
Vapor Density (Air=1):
3.17
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg):
0.0025 @ 50C (122F)
Evaporation Rate (BuAc=1):
No information found.
10. Stability and Reactivity

Stability:
Stable under ordinary conditions of use and storage.
Hazardous Decomposition Products:
Toxic gases and vapors may be released if involved in a fire. Glycerin decomposes upon
heating above 290C, forming corrosive gas (acrolein).
Hazardous Polymerization:
Will not occur.
Incompatibilities:
Strong oxidizers. Can react violently with acetic anhydride, calcium oxychloride, chromium
oxides and alkali metal hydrides.
Conditions to Avoid:
Heat, flames, ignition sources and incompatibles.
11. Toxicological Information
Oral rat LD50: 12,600 mg/kg. Investigated as a mutagen, reproductive effector.
--------\Cancer Lists\------------------------------------------------------
---NTP Carcinogen---
Ingredient Known Anticipated IARC Category
------------------------------------ ----- ----------- -------------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No None
12. Ecological Information

Environmental Fate:
When released into the soil, this material is expected to readily biodegrade. When released
into the soil, this material is not expected to evaporate significantly. When released into
water, this material is expected to readily biodegrade. This material is not expected to
significantly bioaccumulate. When released into the air, this material may be moderately
degraded by reaction with photochemically produced hydroxyl radicals. When released into
the air, this material may be removed from the atmosphere to a moderate extent by wet
deposition.
Environmental Toxicity:
This material is not expected to be toxic to aquatic life.
13. Disposal Considerations
Whatever cannot be saved for recovery or recycling should be managed in an appropriate

and approved waste disposal facility. Processing, use or contamination of this product may
change the waste management options. State and local disposal regulations may differ from
federal disposal regulations. Dispose of container and unused contents in accordance with
federal, state and local requirements.
14. Transport Information

Not regulated.
15. Regulatory Information

--------\Chemical Inventory Status - Part 1\---------------------------------
Ingredient TSCA EC Japan Australia
----------------------------------------------- ---- --- ----- ---------
Glycerin (56-81-5) Yes Yes Yes Yes
--------\Chemical Inventory Status - Part 2\---------------------------------

--Canada--
Ingredient Korea DSL NDSL Phil.
----------------------------------------------- ----- --- ---- -----
Glycerin (56-81-5) Yes Yes No Yes
--------\Federal, State & International Regulations - Part 1\----------------

-SARA 302- ------SARA 313------
Ingredient RQ TPQ List Chemical Catg.
----------------------------------------- --- ----- ---- --------------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No No No
--------\Federal, State & International Regulations - Part 2\----------------

-RCRA- -TSCA-
Ingredient CERCLA 261.33 8(d)
----------------------------------------- ------ ------ ------
Glycerin (56-81-5) No No No
Chemical Weapons Convention: No TSCA 12(b): No CDTA: No

SARA 311/312: Acute: Yes Chronic: Yes Fire: No Pressure: No
Reactivity: No (Pure / Liquid)
Australian Hazchem Code: None allocated.

Poison Schedule: None allocated.
WHMIS:
This MSDS has been prepared according to the hazard criteria of the Controlled Products
Regulations (CPR) and the MSDS contains all of the information required by the CPR.
16. Other Information

NFPA Ratings: Health: 1 Flammability: 1 Reactivity: 0
Label Hazard Warning:
CAUTION! MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO SKIN, EYES, AND RESPIRATORY
TRACT. MAY AFFECT KIDNEYS.
Label Precautions:
Avoid breathing mist.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing.
Keep container closed.
Use with adequate ventilation.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
Label First Aid:
If inhaled, remove to fresh air. Get medical attention for any breathing difficulty. In case of
contact, immediately flush eyes or skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Get
medical attention if irritation develops or persists.
Product Use:
Laboratory Reagent.
Revision Information:
MSDS Section(s) changed since last revision of document include: 3.
Disclaimer:
*******************************************************************************
Mallinckrodt Baker, Inc. provides the information contained herein in good faith but
makes no representation as to its comprehensiveness or accuracy. This document is
intended only as a guide to the appropriate precautionary handling of the material by
a properly trained person using this product. Individuals receiving the information
must exercise their independent judgment in determining its appropriateness for a
particular purpose. MALLINCKRODT BAKER, INC. MAKES NO
REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH
RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION SET FORTH HEREIN OR THE PRODUCT
TO WHICH THE INFORMATION REFERS. ACCORDINGLY, MALLINCKRODT
BAKER, INC. WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM USE OF OR RELIANCE UPON THIS INFORMATION.
*******************************************************************************
Prepared by: Environmental Health & Safety

Phone Number: (314) 654-1600 (U.S.A.)
This page has been
SECTION 7
SERVICE & SUPPORT
This page has been
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding the various support services
offered by GE W&PT. All service bulletins associated with the Town of
Taos MBR ZeeWeed Wastewater Treatment System are to be inserted at
the end of this section.
7.2 CONTACTING GE W&PT SERVICE

Upon subscribing to GE W&PT’s 24/7 technical support service and
activating your customer account, a 4-digit security code will be issued.
Provide this code when contacting the Service Department, which can
be reached at:
PHONE: 1-866-439-8272.
EMAIL: GEWater.TechnicalSupport@ge.com.
Contact your facility representative for additional information about the

24/7 technical support service and other services provided by GE W&PT.
7.3 MYZENON
TIP: In the event of a MyZENON (www.MyZENON.com) provides an information exchange
lost MyZENON location between GE W&PT and your facility. It is strongly recommended
password, contact the
Service Department that the contact information for all facility supervisors be posted and
immediately. regularly updated in order to allow for better support.
Rev. 0 Service & Support

August, 2011 7-1
7.4 AVAILABLE SERVICES

GE W&PT delivers a comprehensive range of services beyond system
design and installation. Contact the Service Department to enquire
about the following services:
• ZenoTrac® automated process data monitoring and analysis.
• Site visits and component audits.
• Training programs.
• 24/7 technical support.
• Emergency call-out support.
• OEM components and consumable products inventory.
• O&M agreements.
• Plant commissioning, optimization, and upgrades.
• System controls support.
• Component calibration and preventive maintenance planning.
7.4.1 ZENOTRAC
ZenoTrac is a powerful plant support tool available to those system
owners who choose to subscribe. It provides fully automated process
data monitoring and trend analysis, and stores information in a
centralized database. This information is then presented as a series of
charts and provided to operators through email, a secure web site, or as
printed reports.
With ZenoTrac, operators can view trends, solve process problems

quickly, improve plant productivity, reduce the impact of operator
turnover, and manage continuous software enhancements.
Service & Support Rev. 0

7-2 August, 2011
7.4.2 SITE VISITS

GE W&PT service professionals are on-hand for both emergency service
calls (call-outs) and planned service visits. Areas of plant operation that
they can assist with include instrument calibration, preventive
maintenance planning, process monitoring, and DCS code
modifications. Contact the Service Department and ask them to develop
a service plan tailored to your system.
Emergency call-outs are invoiced based on the Field Services Labor Rate
Sheet, which can be found on MyZENON or obtained by contacting the
Service Department.
7.4.3 TRAINING
Training for all operators is provided at the time of plant commissioning.
Customized training packages are available. Contact the Service
department for more information.
Rev. 0 Service & Support

August, 2011 7-3
This page has been
SECTION 8
GLOSSARY
This page has been
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The following sections define acronyms, abbreviations, and terms used
within this manual and the water treatment industry in general.
This glossary is intended to address all aspects of the products and

services offered by GE W&PT, and may include some information that
does not apply to this system.
8.2 ACRONYMS & ABBREVIATIONS

Table 8.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations
Acronym Definition Acronym Definition
BBD Brine Blowdown MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
BMU Brine Make-up MLVSS Mixed Liquor Volatile
Suspended Solids
BOD Biological Oxygen Demand MMF Multi-Media Filtration
c/w complete with MMI Man Machine Interface (see
HMI)
CaCO3 Calcium Carbonate MOV Motor Operated Valve
CBD Concentrate Blowdown NaOCl Sodium Hypochlorite

CEB Chemically Enhanced NaOH Sodium Hydroxide
Backwash
CFS Cubic feet per second ng/L nanograms per liter
CIP Clean In Place NH3 Ammonia
CLC Controls Logic Chart NO2 Nitrite
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand NO3 Nitrate
CPU Central Process Unit NTU Nephelometric Turbidity Unit

CMU Concentrate Make-Up O2 Molecular Oxygen
CN Control Narrative OI Operator Interface

CR Concentrate Recycle OIT Operator Interface Terminal
DCS Distributed Control System ORP Oxidation reduction potential
DF Dilute Feed OSC Operations Sequence Chart
DO Dissolved Oxygen OSP Off-Spec Product
EBCT Empty bed contact time OUR oxygen uptake rate
ECIP Electrode Clean In Place PAC Powdered Activated Carbon
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-1
Table 8.1 - Acronyms & Abbreviations

Acronym Definition Acronym Definition
ED Electrodialysis P&ID Piping & Instrumentation
Diagram
EDI Electrodeionization PDT Pressure Decay Test
EDR Electrodialysis Reversal PC Personal Computer
EF Electrode Feed PFD Process Flow Diagram
EW Electrode Waste PID Proportional Integral Derivative
ESD Emergency Shutdown PLC Programmable Logic Controller
E2PROM Electronically Erasable POV Pneumatically Operated Valve

Programmable Read Only
Memory
FeCl3 Ferric Chloride ppb parts per billion
GAC Granular activated carbon ppm parts per million

GFD Gallons per ft2 per Day psi pounds per square inch
gpm gallons per minute psid pounds per square inch

differential
HCl Hydrochloric acid psig pounds per square inch gauge
HCO3 Bicarbonate RAS Return Activated Sludge
H2S Hydrogen sulfide RO Reverse Osmosis
H2SO4 Sulfuric Acid SCADA Supervisory Control & Data

Acquisition System
H3PO4 Phosphoric Acid scfm standard cubic feet per minute
HMI Human Machine Interface SDI Silt Density Index

kg/L kilograms per litre TDS Total Dissolved Solids
kPa kilo pascals TKN Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen
L Litre TMP Transmembrane Pressure
LMH Litres/m2 of Membrane Area g/L Micrograms per liter
per Hour
LRV Log Removal Value USgpm US gallons per minute
FeCl3 Ferric Chloride UV Ultraviolet
GFD Gallons per ft2 per Day VFD Variable Frequency Drive
LSI Langelier Saturation Index VS Volatile Solids

MCC Motor Control Center VSS Volatile Suspended Solids
mg/L milligrams per liter ZW ZeeWeed
Glossary Rev. 0
8-2 August, 2011
8.3 DEFINITIONS
AC MOTOR Consists of two basic parts: A rotating cylinder called a Rotor and a
stationary part called a Stator. The Stator surrounds the Rotor. It has
coil windings, which produce an alternating magnetic field. This
magnetic field causes current to flow through the Rotor conductors,
resulting in a rotational force. The Rotor spins at a speed proportional
to the frequency of the applied alternating current. The motor rotates
at a set rotation depending on the frequency of the winding
configuration.
ACID A solution having an excess of hydrogen (H+) ions (with a pH of less than
7.0).
ACTIVATED SLUDGE The floc produced in raw or settled wastewater due to the growth of
bacteria and other organisms in the presence of dissolved oxygen (DO).
ACTUATED VALVE Any valve with an actuator that is controlled by an external command.
ADSORPTION Non-permanent attachment of a particular molecule to a solid

substrate.
ADVISORY ALARM A process alarm, which alerts the operator, that action is needed to
prevent an impending shutdown, or to restore the components to a
normal state.
AEROBIC BACTERIA Any bacteria requiring free oxygen for the metabolic breakdown of
material.
AEROBIC ZONE An environment where there is dissolved air or free oxygen.
AIR COMPRESSOR Air compressors provide oil-free, pressurized air for the operation of the
actuated valves.
AIR DIAPHRAGM Air diaphragm metering pumps provide chemical dosing at measured
METERING PUMPS rates. This dosing is set manually and it is regulated either by the
amount of compressed air driving the pump or by setting the
backpressure of the pumps.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-3
AIR DRYER Air dryers protect pneumatic devices, like valves and air diaphragm
pumps, from damage due to condensation in the compressed air. The
controls on the air dryer allow for adjustment of dew point and
temperature setpoints.
AIR FLOW SWITCH Air flow switches, located in the membrane aeration piping or the
supplemental aeration piping, are used to indicate when a specific flow
rate has been reached for a blower. This flow rate identifies low
aeration to the membranes or bioreactor, triggering an alarm or alert.
AIR RELEASE VALVES Air release valves allow the air to separate from the permeate to
prevent air locks in the permeate piping.
ALARM A visible or audible indication that an operator is expected to take

action to rectify or prevent an abnormal situation. An alarm may be an
operator interface screen message, a pilot light, a buzzer, or another
form of communication to the operator.
ALARM BEACON A visible device for alerting an operator when a new alarm occurs, such
as a flashing or rotating light.
ALERT A warning to the operator that a process or component is operating

outside normally accepted limits and requires attention to prevent the
occurrence of an alarm.
ALTERNATION A control scheme for 2 or more pumps or process units in parallel,

where the unit that has been running for the longest time is stopped
first, and the unit that has been in readiness to start for the longest time
is started first.
ALKALINE A solution having an excess of hydroxyl (OH) ions (with pH greater than
7.0).
ALKALINITY A measure of the capacity of water or wastewater to neutralize an acid.

Alkalinity in wastewater results from the presence of carbonate,
bicarbonate, and hydroxide. Alkalinity in water helps to resist changes
in pH caused by the addition of acids. A measure of the amount of
HCO3 present in water, generally expressed as an amount of CaCO3
equivalent.
ANAEROBIC Any bacteria that can survive in partial or complete absence of oxygen
BACTERIA by using molecular oxygen found in nitrates and sulfates.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-4 August, 2011
ANAEROBIC ZONE An environment where there is an absence of any electron receptor

(nitrate, sulfate or oxygen).
ANALOG An electrical signal that is proportional to the size of the variable being
monitored or controlled. Analog signals in our systems are exclusively
4-20 mA, but an analog signal can be 0-20 mA or 0-10 VDC.
ANION An ion that is negatively charged resulting from the dissociation of

salts, minerals, or acids in water.
ANTISCALANT In membrane systems, a compound added to feedwater to increase

concentrations at which scalants will precipitate, thereby increasing
efficiency.
ANOXIC ZONE An environment where there is an absence or deficiency of free

oxygen.
AUTOMATIC FLOW Automatic flow valves are used when regular changes are required in
VALVE the state of the valve (fully open or fully closed only). They are controlled
by the PLC.
BACKPULSE A mode of operation in which the flow of permeate is reversed through

the ZeeWeed membrane and directed from the inside of the fibers to
the outside. During backpulse, there is a net flow of solids away from
the membrane surface due to the combined effects of the membrane
aeration and the backpulse of permeate.
BACKWASH TMP The change in TMP over a permeation cycle that overrides the
TRIGGER permeation time in order to trigger a backwash.
BACKWASH TROUGH The trough on the side of the membrane tank that collects the water
during a backwash and discharges it to the backwash channel.
BIOCHEMICAL The measurement of the amount of oxygen required by

OXYGEN DEMAND microorganisms to oxidize (eat) the organic matter (food) in the water.
(BOD) This test is used to estimate the amount of organic matter in a sample.
The units of BOD5 are mg/L. The ‘5’ refers to the duration of the test (5
days). Due to the long period of time required to perform the test,
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is becoming a more common test to
measure the amount of ‘food’.
BIOCIDE A chemical for preventing biological growth.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-5
BIOLOGICAL OXYGEN See Biochemical Oxygen Demand.

DEMAND (BOD)
BIOMASS The mixture of biodegradable material, bacteria, and biosolids present

in a biological wastewater treatment system.
BIOSOLIDS The by-product from the biodegradation of organics by bacteria.
BLOWER Blowers provide aeration to recirculate influent in the ZeeWeed

membrane tank and for scouring the membranes to prevent
membrane fouling. In a bioreactor, blowers are used to introduce air in
order to create an aerobic environment for BOD removal.
CASSETTE A reinforced steel or plastic framework that provides structure and

(ZEEWEED) support for membrane modules and associated permeate and
aeration piping. Regardless of the number of modules it contains, a
cassette is typically considered a single unit in terms of monitoring and
testing performance. Not all ZeeWeed systems include cassettes, but
instead feature membrane modules supported directly within the
membrane tank.
CHEMICAL OXYGEN A test used to estimate the amount of organic matter within a sample.
DEMAND (COD) A strong chemical oxidizing agent is used to measure the amount of
organic matter that can be oxidized. The COD of wastewater is
generally higher than the BOD because more compounds can be
chemically oxidized than can be biologically oxidized. The units of COD
are mg/L. Generally the BOD/COD ratio varies from 0.4 to 0.8.
CHEMICAL FEED The required concentration (example: design dosage) of anti-scalant

REQUIREMENTS and/or acid and/or sodium bisulfite specific to each membrane
system.
CHEMICALLY Backwash and soaking of ultrafiltration (UF) membranes with a

ENHANCED chemical solution in order to remove scale and fouling from the
BACKWASH (CEB) membrane surfaces.
CHLORINE CONTACT The part of a water treatment plant where effluent is disinfected by
CHAMBER chlorine.
CIP MODE The system operating mode in which the unit is undergoing the CIP
procedure.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-6 August, 2011
CLEAN-IN-PLACE A system or procedure for cleaning a membrane system without

(CIP) removing or disassembling the system. CIP involves the circulation of
chemicals through the membrane system to remove scale and
biological fouling from the piping and membranes.
COAGULANT An agent that causes dissolved or fine impurities to group together

(coagulate). Coagulants are typically inorganic compounds, such as
ferric chloride or alum.
COAGULATION The addition of inorganic coagulants into raw water prior to filtration.
This promotes clumping (aggregation) of dissolved or fine impurities.
CO-CURRENT FLOW Flow across and through a membrane where the feed/reject and
permeate flow in the same direction and parallel to the membrane
surface.
COLOR Color can occur as the result of decaying or organic debris in the water.
COMPOSITE A membrane with two or more distinct layers.

MEMBRANE
CONCENTRATE The portion of the feed solution that does not pass through the
membrane, in which solids or ions are at an increased concentration.
Also known as reject or retentate.
CONCENTRATE A method in which overall recovery is increased by reusing a fraction

RECYCLE (CR) of the concentrate stream. Also refers to the portion of the concentrate
stream that exits the membrane stack, and is repressurized by the
concentrate recycle pump and returned to the stack concentrating
stream.
CONCENTRATE The process stream flowing through the concentrate compartments of

STREAM a membrane stack.
CONCENTRATE Portion of the concentrate stream displaced by concentrate makeup

BLOWDOWN (CBD) and sent to waste.
CONCENTRATE Portion of the feed stream added to the concentrate recycle stream to
MAKEUP (CMU) control ionic concentrations in the concentrate stream.
CONCENTRATION The amount of a given compound in the reject as a multiple of the

FACTOR amount in the feed stream.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-7
CONDUCTIVITY A device for measuring conductivity in aqueous solutions, primarily to

SENSOR obtain information on total ionic concentrations (example: dissolved
compounds).
CONTACTOR The electrical switch component of the motor starter. The contactor
protects the PLC by isolating it from the high currents and voltages
necessary to run most motors. A contactor operates as follows: an
output of 120 V or less from the PLC energizes a magnetic coil and/or
coils in the contactor. The magnetic field causes the contact(s) to pull
in, completing the motor’s circuit.
CONTROLS LOGIC A component of a system’s Control Strategy. Written in spreadsheet

CHART (CLC) form, the CLC lists the control logic elements of a system, such as
process variables, motors, valves, PID controls, alarms, and operator
selections. For each control element, the chart defines attributes such
as tag number, description, unit of measure, range, setpoint, and
control actions.
CONTROL NARRATIVE A component of a system’s Control Strategy. Written in narrative text

(CN) form, the CN describes the high-level functions of programmable
controllers and operator interfaces. This document also defines any
control system details that are not included in the associated Control
Logic Chart (CLC) and Operations Sequence Chart (OSC).
CONTROL STRATEGY The document, or set of documents, that defines the function of
programmable controllers and operator interfaces that will be used to
control a process system. Generally, a GE W&PT control strategy
includes a Control Narrative (CN), a Control Logic Chart (CLC), and an
Operations Sequence Chart (OSC).
CONTROL VALVE A valve with a positioning actuator (not an open/closed actuator) for
manipulating a process flow, or a self-actuated valve. Typically tagged
“FCV”, “LCV”, “PCV”, or “TCV” on a P&ID.
CORROSION The attack upon metals by chemical agents, converting them to non-
metallic products. Stainless steel has a passive film created by the
presence of chromium (and often other alloying elements) that resists
this process.
CRITICAL ALARM An alarm condition that requires the operator’s immediate attention to
allow the system to run at the necessary level of production, or to
investigate a potentially unsafe condition.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-8 August, 2011
CRITICAL FAILURE A condition that triggers a process alarm that causes the unit to shut
down immediately, because continued operation could present an
immediate hazard or cause damage to the system.
CROSS-FLOW Flow across and through a membrane where the feed/reject stream
FILTRATION flows parallel to the membrane while the permeate stream flows
perpendicular. The flow pattern reduces fouling on the media surface.
Cross flow filtration necessitates a certain amount of the feed being
lost to maintain flow.
CROSS LEAK Hydraulic transfer of water between manifolds in the stack (from the
demineralizing stream to the concentrate stream).
CURRENT The movement of electrons through a conductor (such as wire).

Electrical current is analogous to the flow of water through a pipe.
Current is measured in Amperes (A) or milliAmperes (mA). The current
direction can be either direct (DC) or alternating (AC). The current draw
of a motor is stamped on the factory nameplate of the motor. This is
the tested maximum ampere draw of the motor under full load
conditions (FLA).
CURRENT DAY TOTAL A totalized value that is reset to zero at midnight.
CYCLIC AERATION Cyclic aeration valves control the air flow to the ZeeWeed membrane
VALVES cassettes, typically in 10 second intervals. The PLC controls the
operation of cyclic aeration valves.
DECHLORINATION The process of removing residual chlorine from water. GE W&PT

typically uses specially formulated, thin film composite RO membranes,
which have a limited tolerance for the free chlorine found in most
municipal water supplies. Hence, dechlorination is typically required
upstream of the RO membranes. Activated carbon filters or sodium
bisulfite are used to remove the free chlorine. With ZeeWeed
membrane systems, dechlorination with the use of sodium bisulfite, is
required after a chlorine Recovery Clean procedure.
DECONCENTRATION An operation to periodically drain water from a membrane tank to

reduce the average solids concentration when permeation is stopped.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-9
DEMAND A dynamic setpoint that is typically used for controlling a system with
multiple process trains or units in parallel (example: an integer setpoint
for the number of trains or pumps that should be running or a flow
setpoint for the desired system production rate).
DEMINERALIZATION The process of reducing the quantity of minerals or salts in an aqueous

solution.
DEMINERALIZING Process stream flowing through and out of the demineralizing

STREAM compartments of the membrane stack.
DENITRIFICATION The biological process by which nitrate is converted to nitrogen gas.

This process occurs in the absence of free oxygen (example: anoxic
zone of a bioreactor).
DISSOLVED OXYGEN The amount of free oxygen dissolved in water or wastewater. Dissolved
(DO) oxygen levels are measured to ensure that sufficient oxygen is
available for the biological population to degrade the wastewater
during aerobic digestion. DO is normally expressed in mg/L, ppm, or
percent of saturation. Oxygen dissolves into the mixed liquor by
diffusion across the water surface and aeration.
DIGITAL VS. ANALOG A digital (discrete) electrical signal is either on or off. This signal is used
SIGNALS for simple on/off control of devices or alarm/alert setpoints.
DILUTE FEED The stream that serves as the feed water source for demineralization.
DISTRIBUTED A centralized electronic monitoring and control system for unit

CONTROL SYSTEM operations.
(DCS)
DRY CONTACT An electrically isolated relay contact that is not directly connected to a
power source. Typically used for sending a contact closure to a remote
control circuit where the circuit power comes from a remotely located
controller.
EDUCTOR A jet pump for withdrawing a fluid or powdery substance from a space.
EFFLUENT The flow of a liquid out of a system or process.
EJECTOR A device for removing air from the system.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-10 August, 2011
ELECTRICAL POWER The rate of consumption of electrical energy. Power is calculated by

multiplying the current by the voltage. Power is usually expressed in
watts (W), kilowatts (kW), or horsepower (Hp).
ELECTRICAL STAGE Cell pairs bounded by two electrodes.
ELECTROMAGNETIC Electromagnetic flow meters (mag meters) measure liquid flow rate.
FLOW METERS (MAG The PLC uses this information to regulate pump speed and to totalize
METERS) flow.
ELEMENT The smallest membrane entity replaceable in a ZeeWeed cassette. (See

also Module).
EMERGENCY STOP The manual stopping of operation as quickly and reliably as possible,
using a circuit that meets the requirements of NFPA 79, Chapters 9 and
10.
ENGINEERED UNITS A numerical data value that is correct for its unit of measure, so it does
not need to be scaled for use or display.
EVENT An occurrence that is not an alarm condition.
FAULT An abnormal condition that affects the ability of a device to perform its
normal function. “Fault” should generally be used instead of “failure”,
“failed”, or “faulted”, and should not be used where “alarm” would be
applicable.
FEED A water stream entering a unit treatment process.
FILTRATE Liquid exiting a filtration process with reduced content of solids or

contaminants. (See also Permeate).
FILTRATION CYCLE A repeated sequence of permeate production and backpulse.
FLOC A mass of clumped solids or precipitates formed in sewage by

biological or chemical activity.
FLOCCULANTS Materials that can precipitate into aggregates or flocs from finely
suspended particles. The suspended materials can then be separated
from the water.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-11
FLOCCULATION The process of creating aggregates or flocs from finely suspended

particles that can later be separated from the water. Flocculation is
often aided by a coagulant addition.
FLUX A measure of the rate at which permeate passes through the filtration
membrane, per unit surface area of membrane. Flux is usually
measured in GFD (gallons per ft2 per day) or LMH (liters per m2 per
hour). Flux = permeate flow rate / membrane surface area.
FOOD-TO- The mass (kg) of organic matter fed to the bioreactor each day per unit
MICROORGANISM mass of microorganism. Expressed as (kg BOD (or COD) / kg VSS - d).
RATIO (F:M)
FOULANTS The unwanted materials that deposit on the surface of a membrane.
FOULING The buildup of unwanted materials on the surface or within the pores
of the filtration membrane. Fouling reduces the active surface area of
the membrane and results in a reduction in permeability.
GLYCERIN Glycerin is the impure commercial form of glycerol. Glycerin is used to

(GLYCEROL) preserve and prevent membranes from drying out or freezing.
GLYCEROL See Glycerin.
HAND VALVES FOR Hand valves are used to control flow in situations where regular
FLOW CONTROL changes in flow are not required. The valve is in the fully open or fully
closed position.
HAND VALVES FOR Hand valves for isolation are used in situations where regular changes
ISOLATION in the valve’s state are not required. The valve is in the fully open or fully
closed position. Types of hand valves used for isolation include ball
valves, butterfly valves, and gate valves.
HARDNESS A measure of the amount of calcium and magnesium present in water.

A property of water that can produce scale as a result of the presence
of calcium and magnesium salts in solution.
HEADLOSS The drop in pressure of water flow through a resin bed.
HIGH A condition in which a process variable is greater than its normal value
or range of values. This condition is typically used for control and/or for
an advisory alarm.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-12 August, 2011
HIGH-HIGH A condition in which a process variable is greater than a High setpoint.

This condition typically causes an automated shutdown.
HUMAN MACHINE A typical panel-mounted operator interface, which allows the operator
INTERFACE (HMI) access and control of the various component functions of a system. An
HMI may be an operator interface with proprietary software or a
Windows-based industrial computer running SCADA software.
HYDRAULIC The time required to displace the working volume of a bioreactor, by

RETENTION TIME the feed flow into the bioreactor, in a continuous flow system.
(HRT) HRT (d) = anoxic and aerobic bioreactor volume (L) / feed flow rate (L/d)
HYDROMETER Measures the specific gravity of fluids.
HYDROXYL The anion of water. The chemical formula is OH-.
IMMEDIATE A shutdown alarm condition that causes the process unit to stop
SHUTDOWN ALARM immediately (because continued operation could damage the system)
instead of using the normal shutdown sequence that might include
flushing or cleaning.
INFLUENT A liquid flow into a tank or system.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS Inputs/outputs refer to the direction of the electronic signal in

reference to the PLC. Inputs are signals that come into the PLC via an
external device. Outputs are signals that are sent from the PLC to an
external device. Inputs/outputs can be either digital or analog signals.
INTERLOCK A control scheme for preventing a mechanism or action from being set
in motion when another mechanism or action is in operation, because
the two operating simultaneously might produce undesirable results.
ION An electrically charged particle with a positive or negative charge,

formed by the dissociation of a salt, mineral, or acid in water.
ION EXCHANGE The process by which salts (cations and anions) are removed from
water by using electricity to replace undesirable ions with a certain
charge with desirable ions of the same charge.
ION EXCHANGE The process of restoring the ion exchange resin to its fully charged
REGENERATION state.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-13
LANGELIER A measure of the tendency of water to dissolve or deposit calcium

SATURATION INDEX carbonate (scaling). LSI is calculated based on the total alkalinity,
(LSI) hardness, total dissolved solids (TDS), pH, and temperature of the
water, and scaling. An LSI of 3.0 is indicative of a potential for severe
scaling. The LSI is a calculated, dimensionless number that is used to
determine the tendency of a water supply to foul RO membranes with
calcium carbonate scale. It is dependent upon the following:
• the calcium content of the water supply.
• the bicarbonate alkalinity of the water supply.
• the pH of the water.
• the temperature of the water.
If the LSI is negative, there is no potential for calcium carbonate scale

as CaCO3 dissolves in water. If the LSI is zero, there is no potential for
scaling or CaCO3 dissolving. If the LSI is positive, there is a potential for
CaCO3 scale, the magnitude of the potential being dependent upon the
magnitude of the LSI number. An LSI of 3.0 would be considered to be
a water with severe scaling tendencies.
As the concentrate stream moving through a reverse osmosis unit

becomes more and more concentrated in dissolved minerals, the LSI of
the water changes from the inlet of the system to the final concentrate
outlet. As all RO membrane processes are staged (except for single
element systems) with the concentrate out of one membrane feeding
into the next, the worst LSI (example: most positive) is seen in the water
coming out of the last membrane from the last housing. If it is predicted
that this LSI will in fact be positive, it is common practice to either:
• polish the raw water, reducing the calcium and magnesium

contents.
• feed antiscalant chemical, which 'negates' the effects of the

calcium.
• feed an acid to lower the pH and move the LSI in a negative

direction.
LEVEL SWITCH Level switches are placed in tanks to indicate very high or very low tank
levels.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-14 August, 2011
LEVEL TRANSMITTERS Level transmitters measure the liquid level in membrane tanks. The PLC
uses these levels to calculate the permeate rate or the feed flow rate to
maintain appropriate tank levels.
LOW A condition in which a process variable is less than its normal value or
range of values. This condition is typically used for control and/or for an
advisory alarm.
LOW-LOW A condition in which a process variable is lower than the Low setpoint.
This condition typically causes an automated shutdown.
LUMEN The internal cavity within the hollow fiber of a ZeeWeed membrane
through which air and permeate flow.
MAINTENANCE A cleaning procedure consisting of aeration, backpulsing, and soaking

CLEAN the ZeeWeed membranes. The operator selects either citric acid or
sodium hypochlorite as the cleaning solution.
MANIFOLD A flow path that feeds several other flow paths.
MAN MACHINE See Human Machine Interface (HMI).

INTERFACE (MMI)
MC-1 (CITRIC ACID) A proprietary cleaning chemical available from GE W&PT and designed
to remove inorganic foulants from membranes.
MEMBRANE Thin barriers or films of material with many small pores of a

predetermined size. These pores allow solvent and other smaller
molecules, ions, or particles to pass through while preventing the
passage of other materials. Membranes are designed to allow the
separation of permeate streams from feed streams.
MEMBRANE The process of using blowers to provide turbulence at the membrane

AERATION surface to reduce accumulation of foulants on the membranes.
MEMBRANE A biological wastewater treatment system that uses a membrane to

BIOREACTOR separate water from biomass.
MEMBRANE BLOWER Membrane blowers provide aeration to recirculate influent and provide
turbulence to membrane surfaces to reduce membrane fouling.
MEMBRANE The ratio of the flux and the transmembrane pressure at that flux value.
PERMEABILITY Usually expressed in L/m2/h/kPa or GFD/psi.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-15
MEMBRANE SURFACE A measurement of the effective surface area of each element.

AREA
METERING PUMP A chemical metering pump is an electronically-controlled, solenoid or

motor-driven diaphragm pump used for metering fluids, such as acid,
base, and hypochlorite. The stroke length and rate of the pump can be
manually set from the control panel on the pump face. Electronic
metering pumps dose chemicals into the ZeeWeed system at
measured rates. Changing the stroke frequency and stroke length can
control the dosing rate, allowing it to be fixed or paced to achieve the
correct dosing rate.
MHO A measure of conductance. It represents the ratio of the current

flowing through a conductor, measured in amperes, to the potential
difference between the end to the conductor, measured in volts. A mho
is a unit of conductance equal to the reciprocal of the ohm, expressed
as amperes/volt.
MICROMHO (MHO) One millionth of a mho.
MICROSIEMENS (S) A measure of conductance equivalent to a micromho.
MIXED LIQUOR The liquid mixture present in the aeration tank of an activated sludge
system. The liquid is a mixture of activated sludge and water
containing organic matter undergoing activated sludge treatment. The
mixed liquor is a living ‘soup’ of microorganisms that requires food,
oxygen, nutrients, proper pH, and correct solids retention time.
MIXED LIQUOR A measure of the quantity of suspended solids in the aeration tank of
SUSPENDED SOLIDS an activated sludge treatment system. Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
(MLSS) (MLSS) is usually measured in milligrams per liter (mg/L).
MIXED LIQUOR The portion of the Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS) that vaporizes
VOLATILE when heated to 550ºC ± 50ºC (1022ºF ± 122ºF). This volatile portion is
SUSPENDED SOLIDS mainly organic material and thus indicates the biomass present in the
(MLVSS) aeration tank. The portion of solids that does not vaporize is mostly
inorganic substances.
MODULE FLOW RATE The fluid flow rate through the module, which is normally equal to the
sum of the permeate and concentrate flow rates. Measured in US gpm
or liters/minute.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-16 August, 2011
MOLECULAR WEIGHT The size of the molecule that determines whether or not the molecule
CUT-OFF is small enough to pass through the membrane’s pore.
MOTOR CONTROL The control panel that holds the motor starters and breakers for the
CENTER (MCC) various system components.
MOTOR A number of important motor components consist of a motor starter,

FUNDAMENTALS contactor, overload, A.C. motors, variable frequency drive, and pump
rotation verification.
MOTOR ROTATION A pump may be severely damaged if started in reverse rotation. Three-
CHECK phase motors can run either clockwise or counter-clockwise
depending on how they are wired. It is essential to verify motor
rotation before operating a pump. Rotation should be checked each
time the motor’s three-phase power is disconnected. A coupled pump
should always be uncoupled before checking the rotation.
MOTOR STARTER A starter allows the PLC to operate a motor while remaining electrically
isolated from the motor circuit. A motor starter consists of a contactor
and an overload.
NAVIGATION The process of getting from one graphic or pop-up screen on an

operator interface to another.
NEPHELOMETRIC A measurement of the turbidity (opacity) of water.

TURBIDITY UNIT
(NTU)
NITRATE Nitrate is the most highly oxidized form of nitrogen found in

wastewater. Total Kjedahl Nitrate (TKN) is converted to nitrate during
nitrification. Nitrate is converted to nitrogen gas during denitrification.
Nitrate is chemically written as NO3-.
NITRIFICATION The biological process by which ammonia is converted to nitrite and

then to nitrate.
NITRITE Nitrite is the middle step of nitrification where ammonia is converted to

nitrite and then to nitrate. Nitrite is relatively unstable and easily
oxidized to the nitrate form. Nitrite is chemically written as NO2-.
NO VS. NC A circuit is either open (off) or closed (on). A circuit is closed if current
SWITCHES flows through it; a circuit is open if there is no current.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-17
NON-CRITICAL An alarm condition that needs to be addressed but that does not
ALARM require immediate operator attention.
NON-CRITICAL A process alarm condition which starts an orderly shutdown of the unit.
FAILURE
NORMALLY OPEN The circuit is open when no forces are acting on the switch.
SWITCH (NO)
NORMALLY CLOSED The circuit is closed when no forces are acting on the switch.
SWITCH (NC)
OFF-SPEC PRODUCT Portion of product stream sent to the feed tank or waste tank for not
(OSP) meeting product quality standards.
OPERATOR Also called Human Machine Interface (HMI) or Man Machine Interface
INTERFACE (OI) (MMI). A display screen through which system conditions can be
monitored and controlled.
OPERATOR Also called Human Machine Interface (HMI) or Man Machine Interface
INTERFACE TERMINAL (MMI).
(OIT)
ORGANIC LOADING The mass of organic matter feed to the anoxic and aerobic reactors
RATE each day per unit volume. Expressed as kg of COD/m3 of nitrification
reactor/d or kg of BOD5/m3 of nitrification reactor/d. The organic
loading rate can be reported using the units of mg/L/min.
OPERATIONS A component of a system’s Control Strategy. Written in spreadsheet

SEQUENCE CHART form, the OSC shows the required sequences for process operations.
(OSC) For each process sequence step, the chart defines attributes such as
pump states, valve actuations, step times, interlocks, and control
actions.
OVERLOAD Provides thermal overload protection to the motor. This occurs when
the motor is drawing a higher current than its full load amperage (FLA)
for an extended period. Common thermal overloads use bimetallic strip
switches or heater coils. Common features on an overload are as
follows:
• A reset button/dial that allows the motor circuit to reset

manually after it has been tripped, or the overload to reset itself
automatically after a few minutes.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-18 August, 2011
• A trip current dial (for bimetallic strip overloads) sets the current
(usually at or slightly above the FLA) at which the circuit will trip.
• A test button trips the circuit manually.
• A trip indicator window displays a colored indicator when the

circuit is tripped.
OXYGEN UPTAKE The rate of oxygen at which microorganisms consume food in the
RATE (OUR) bioreactor. The rate at which the microorganisms use oxygen (OUR)
can be a direct indicator of their biological activity. OUR is measured in
mg of O2 consumed/L of biomass/minute.
PANELVIEW HMI Provides an interface between the operator and the PLC. The
(HUMAN MACHINE PanelView screen enables the operator to monitor the system’s
INTERFACE) operation. The touch-screen controls and/or push buttons allow the
operator to control the system.
PARTICLE COUNTS The number of particles per 100 ml of filtrate water. Water can be
microscopically examined using a particle counter, which classifies
suspended particles by number and size.
PARTICLE COUNTER Particle counters are placed in piping to measure the particle count,
verify membrane integrity, and ensure the quality of the permeate.
PARTICULATES Very small suspended solids in water. They vary in size, shape, density,
and electrical charge, and can be gathered together by coagulation
and flocculation.
PASSIVATION A chemical treatment used to expedite the natural passive quality of

stainless steels. When exposed to air, stainless steels passivate
naturally due to the presence of chromium. The rate of natural
passivation varies. To ensure that a passive layer forms rapidly after
pickling, a solution of nitric acid and water is applied to the metal
surface. Passivation does not remove embedded surface
contamination. Thorough water rinsing must follow all passivating
treatments.
PASSIVE A characteristic condition of stainless steels, which impedes normal

corrosion tendencies, and renders the steel passive to its environment.
PERMEATE The portion of the feed solution that passes through the membrane.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-19
PERMEATE FLOW The permeate flow rate per unit of membrane area. This is used for a
RATE (FLUX) specific system with a fixed number of membranes. The term can be
used interchangeably with permeate flow rate. The most common
usage is in GFD (gallons of permeate per square foot of membrane
area per day) or in LMH (liters of permeate per square meter per day).
PERMEATE HEADER The piping running along the length of the membrane tank that collects
permeate from each of the permeate manifolds.
PERMEATE The piping running across the top of the cassette (parallel to the main
MANIFOLD axis of the cassette) that collects the permeate from the individual
stacks. The permeate is discharged to the permeate header.
PICKLING When stainless steels have been heated to elevated temperatures

(such as during welding), an oxide scale will form on the surface unless
the material is surrounded by a protective atmosphere. Any such
oxides must be removed to restore the stainless steel to its optimum
corrosion resistance.
The part is immersed in a pickling solution to remove oxides and loosely

embedded iron. Pickling paste can be used to clean larger affected
areas in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
PH The measure of the acidity or alkalinity of a solution, based on the

concentration of hydrogen ions. pH values are expressed as numbers
on a scale of 0 to 14. With values less than 7 being acidic, and greater
than 7 being basic.
PH ANALYZER pH analyzers measure the pH levels in the recirculation line during

Recovery Cleans. The PLC uses the analyzer to monitor the pH of the
cleaning chemicals and to control the dosing of neutralizing chemicals.
POP-UP SCREEN A screen design that is displayed by selecting buttons on a graphical

screen of the HMI. The pop-up screen overlays a portion of the
graphical screen. Pop-up screens are typically used for controlling a
motor or entering setpoints.
POWER SUPPLY A device that converts an AC input to a DC output.
PORE SIZE The size of the holes in the membranes.
PPM Parts per million. 1 ppm = 1 mg/L (assuming specific gravity = 1.0).
Glossary Rev. 0
8-20 August, 2011
PRESSURE DROP A loss of pressure due to friction or flow restriction.
PRESSURE GAUGE A device used for measuring the pressure of a gas or liquid.
PRESSURE Pressure transmitters, located on the permeate header, are used to

TRANSMITTER control pump speed during production, backpulse, and membrane
integrity tests of the conventional membrane systems. The
transmitters inform the PLC of high or low pressures, triggering an
alarm.
PROCEDURE The strategy for carrying out a process. It may refer to a process that
does not result in the production of a product, for example a Clean-In-
Place (CIP) procedure.
PRODUCT WATER A treated water stream exiting a unit treatment process.
PROGRAMMABLE A microprocessor-based controller that uses programmable memory

LOGIC CONTROLLER to store instructions in order to control a process. The main
(PLC) components of a PLC are the power supply, processor, memory, input
interface, and output interface.
PROPORTIONAL A control scheme in which the controller output is varied to maintain a

CONTROL process variable to a certain ratio of another variable. As an example,
proportional control is used to vary a chemical dosing pump speed in
proportion to the water flow at the chemical dosing location. This
control method ensures that the chemical concentration in the water
will not change when the water flow changes.
PROPORTIONAL Feedback control with proportional, integral, and derivative control

INTEGRAL action. This control method allows the PLC to manipulate a physical
DERIVATIVE (PID) device (control variable) to achieve a setpoint by constantly observing
CONTROL LOOP the response (process variable). A PID controller attempts to correct the
error between a measured process variable and a desired setpoint by
calculating and then outputting a corrective action that can adjust the
process accordingly and rapidly in order to keep the error minimal.
The PID loop contains the following three parameters:
Gain (Kc) - Proportional control.
Reset (Ti) - Integral control.
Rate (Td) - Derivative control.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-21
The proportional control term Kc changes the control variable by an

amount proportional to the setpoint deviation. The magnitude of Kc
determines the sensitivity of the PID control loop to process changes.
The larger the Kc value, the larger the proportional change in the
control variable.
The integral control term Ti is the time during which the actuating
variable is changed for an existing deviation. The magnitude of Ti
determines the amount of memory that the PID control loop exhibits. A
large Ti value has a low effect on the setpoint deviation and vice versa.
Controllers that use 1/Ti have opposite effects on the deviation.
The derivative control term Td changes the control variable by an

amount proportional to the rate of change (slope) of the setpoint
deviation. The larger the Td value, the more effect the rate of change of
the deviation has on the control variable and vice versa. Systems that
use 1/Td have the opposite effect.
RATE The tuning parameter for the derivative control action of a PID
controller.
RECOVERY The amount of water recovered as permeate divided by the amount of

feed water supplied to the system. High recovery ratios mean that a
large percentage of the water is collected as permeate, whereas a low
recovery results in most of the feed water going to the reject stream. As
the recovery ratio increases, the suspended solids concentration of the
reject stream increases. Higher solids in the reject stream represent
higher solids concentrations in the membrane tank. This may result in
higher transmembrane pressure (TMP) readings.
While membrane systems can be forced to run at a higher recovery

than designed, premature membrane fouling may result. Do not run
the system at a higher recovery than designed.
The formula for determining percent recovery is as follows:
Permeate Flow Rate x 100

Percent Recovery =
Feed Flow Rate
Glossary Rev. 0
8-22 August, 2011
RECOVERY CLEAN A chemical cleaning procedure used to restore ZeeWeed membrane

permeability.
RECTIFIER An electrical device that changes AC power to DC power.
REDOX/ORP The redox analyzer measures the ability of a solution to act as an

ANALYZER oxidizing agent or reducing agent. Redox potential/ORP (oxidation-
reduction potential) is measured in the range specified in the vendor
data. Positive readings indicate an oxidizing agent, while negative
readings indicate a reducing agent.
REINFORCED FIBER GE W&PT-patented hollow fiber used in the ZeeWeed 500 series
modules, consisting of a polymeric membrane on a strong support.
RESET The process of using a manual reset button to clear an alarm condition
after it has been resolved. The tuning parameter for the integral control
action of a PID controller.
RESIDUAL CHLORINE Residual chlorine analyzers are placed in the recirculation piping to
ANALYZER electronically measure the level of chlorine present during Recovery
Cleans. The PLC uses this online chlorine measurement to control the
neutralizing chemical dosing pumps.
RETENTATE See Reject.
REJECT Also known as Concentrate or Retentate. The portion of the feed

solution that does not pass through the membrane.
RUN TIME METER A run time counter for a motor or process unit, usually with units of
hours.
SCALE Precipitate of calcium carbonate or calcium sulfate.
SCALING The formation of a precipitate on a surface in contact with water as the

result of scale deposit. The process of converting a raw numerical value
to a value in engineering units.
SEQUENTIAL A control function intended to set the states of the pumps, valves, and
CONTROL other control devices of a process unit for a series of operation steps.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-23
SETPOINT An adjustable value for a process variable, which is used for controlling
a process. A controller will vary the process to keep the process
variable at the setpoint, or a process alarm and/or control action will
occur when the process variable reaches the setpoint.
SHUTDOWN ALARM An alarm that alerts the operator that action is needed to recover from
a situation where either a component is unable to operate, or the
control system has determined that operation is unsafe or undesirable.
SILICA ANALYZER A device for measuring silica concentrations in liquid.
SLUDGE WASTING The excess volume of biological sludge wasted daily from the
RATE bioreactor. Usually measured in L/d or g/d.
SODIUM A membrane cleaning and conditioning agent that removes organic

HYPOCHLORITE foulants and sanitizes the system permeate/treated water piping. This
(NAOCL) substance is a strong oxidant and disinfectant.
SOLENOID VALVE Solenoid valves provide on/off control for low flow volume locations,
including air diaphragm chemical pumps and pneumatic valves. The
PLC controls the solenoid valves.
SOLIDS RETENTION The time required to remove the working volume of the bioreactor’s
TIME (SRT) mixed liquor by the average flow rate of waste sludge from the system.
SRT (d) = Anoxic and Aerobic Reactor Volume (L)

Sludge Wasting Rate (L/d)
SOLUTE Material (such as salts) dissolved by a solvent (such as water).
SOLVENT Any material that acts to dissolve another. The solvent constitutes the
dissolving medium, or liquid portion, of a solution. Water is frequently
referred to as the universal solvent.
STRAINER A slotted or screen sieve for screening flowing liquid.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-24 August, 2011
SUPERVISORY A computer system that collects and records process data and alarms,
CONTROL AND DATA and provides a graphical user interface for a process system. It is
ACQUISITION typically a Windows-based desktop computer that runs a SCADA
(SCADA) software package. The SCADA, which is the center of the control
system, acts as a link between the PLC and the operator. It allows the
control of valves, pumps, and blowers. All electronic parameters are
displayed and setpoint values are stored.
SWITCH A device that produces a binary signal in response to an operator

action or the comparison of a process variable to a setpoint. For
example a High level switch converts a tank level into a binary signal
for high level. The device may be a mechanical float switch, a relay in
an electronic instrument, or a software comparator.
SYSTEM RECOVERY The system recovery ratio is the ratio of water recovered as permeate
versus the amount of feed water supplied to the system. A high
recovery ratio means that a large percentage of the water is collected
as permeate; a low recovery ratio results in most of the feed water
going to the reject stream. As the recovery ratio increases, the
concentration of the reject stream increases and the permeate quality
decreases. As the recovery ratio is lowered, the proportion of feed
water that is rejected increases.
The formula for determining percent recovery is as follows:
Permeate Flow Rate x 100

Percent Recovery =
Feed Flow Rate
TANK HEATER A CIP tank heater increases the temperature of the cleaning solution.
TEMPERATURE The feed water temperature has a pronounced effect on the

EFFECTS permeability through the membranes. As the operating temperature
increases, the permeability also increases.
TEMPERATURE Temperature transmitters monitor temperatures.

TRANSMITTER
TOTAL DISSOLVED The concentration of all solids dissolved in a solution (normally

SOLIDS (TDS) expressed in ppm).
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-25
TOTAL KJELDAHL The total concentration of nitrogen in a sample present as ammonia or

NITROGEN (TKN) bound in organic compounds. Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN) is usually
measured in mg/L.
TOTAL ORGANIC A measure of the amount of organic materials suspended or dissolved

CARBON (TOC) in water. Total Organic Carbon (TOC) is a quicker sampling method than
measuring Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) or Biological Oxygen
Demand (BOD) for determining the quality of the effluent.
TOTAL SOLIDS (TS) A measure of the amount of material that is dissolved or suspended in
a water sample, by weight. Total Solids is determined by allowing a
known volume to evaporate and then weighing the remaining residue.
Total Solids = Total Dissolved Solids + Total Suspended Solids
TOTAL SUSPENDED A measure of the solids (normally expressed in ppm) found in water,
SOLIDS (TSS) which can be removed by filtration.
TRAIN (ZEEWEED A group of cassettes connected to a common header through which

MEMBRANES) permeate is drawn. The number of cassettes included in a train can
vary depending on system type and requirements.
TRANSMEMBRANE The difference in pressure across a membrane (that is, between the
PRESSURE (TMP) outer and inner surface of membrane). TMP is the driving force behind
cross-membrane filtration, and is created by either increasing pressure
or by creating a partial vacuum on one side of the membrane.
TRIGGER A trigger allows a change in operation. It is a normal event that can

clear an alarm or be one of several points in a sequence of events.
TURBIDITY A measure (via light penetration) of the cloudiness of an otherwise clear

liquid. Measured in Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU). Sediment or
foreign particles stirred up or suspended in water.
TURBIDITY METER Turbidity meters are placed in the permeate piping or the feed piping
(TURBIDIMETER) to measure turbidity. When registering high turbidity, the PLC will
trigger an alarm and shut down the ZeeWeed system.
ULTRAFILTRATION Water treatment methods used to remove suspended solids, bacteria,

and viruses from water. This method operates using low pressures and
typically using hollow-fiber or rolled membrane elements.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-26 August, 2011
ULTRAVIOLET (UV) A light wave, at a specific wavelength, used to disinfect water. UV will
kill any viable bacteria, viruses, and parasites.
UNREINFORCED Conventional hollow fiber, which is based on a simple polymeric

FIBER structure, used in the ZeeWeed 1000 module.
VACUUM DEGASIFIER A tower to which a vacuum is applied and through which water
droplets descend to remove dissolved gas.
VACUUM PUMP Vacuum pumps remove air from the system and ensure that the
permeate/process pump remains primed.
VALVE TEST The process in which the operation of motor-operated valves may be
manually tested.
VARIABLE An electrical device attached to a pump motor used to automatically

FREQUENCY DRIVE adjust motor speed in response to process conditions. A VFD controls
(VFD) the speed of a pump by changing the frequency of the alternating
current to power the motor. For example, a pump motor operating at
1800 rpm at 60 Hz would run at 900 rpm if the frequency is reduced to
30 Hz.
VOLATILE SOLIDS The total content of suspended and dissolved solids in water, which are
(VS) volatile at 550ºC (1022ºF).
VOLATILE The suspended solids that can be filtered from a sample of water and
SUSPENDED SOLIDS are volatile at 550ºC (1022ºF).
(VSS)
VOLTAGE The difference in electrical potential across two points. This is

analogous to gauge pressure in water applications. Voltage is
measured in volts (V).
WATER HAMMER Instantaneous surges of water pressure caused by a sudden

interruption in water flow.
WATER SOFTENING The exchange of sodium by ion exchange.
ZENOGEM The trade name for GE W&PT’s process of using a ZeeWeed membrane
system to clarify effluent from a bioreactor.
Rev. 0 Glossary
August, 2011 8-27
ZENOTRAC The trade name for GE W&PT’s powerful plant process support tool
which provides fully automated process data monitoring and trend
analysis.
ZEEWEED The trade name for GE W&PT’s immersible hollow fiber filtration
module.
Glossary Rev. 0
8-28 August, 2011
GE Water & Process
Technologies
APPENDIX A
ZEEWEED 500D
IMMERSED HOLLOW-FIBER
ULTRAFILTRATION TECHNOLOGY
NOTICE
The enclosed materials are considered proprietary property of GE Water & Process Technologies. No assignments, either implied or expressed, of intellectual
property rights, data, know-how, trade secrets or licenses of use thereof are given. All information is provided exclusively for the addressee for the purposes of
evaluation and is not to be reproduced or divulged to other parties, nor used for manufacture or other means, or to authorize any of the above, without the
express written consent of GE Water & Process Technologies. The acceptance of this document will be construed as an acceptance of the foregoing conditions.
* Trademark of General Electric Company; may be registered in one or more countries.
This page has been
A.1
CAUTIONS
This page has been
A.1.1 CAUTIONS SPECIFIC TO THIS SUBSYSTEM
The following precautions must be read and adhered to by all system

operators.
• This appendix must be read and understood in its entirety before

operating the subsystem.
• Membranes placed in storage must be kept in the following

conditions:
• Moist at all times.
• Ambient temperature of between 5 - 35ºC (41- 95ºF).
• Protected from freezing temperatures.
• If work must be performed directly above the membrane tank,

ensure that debris (example: plastic pipe turnings) is prevented
from falling into the tank.
• The use of unapproved chemicals on ZeeWeed membranes will

render the warranty null and void and will leave the customer
solely responsible for any damage incurred as a result. Contact
GE W&PT before using any chemicals not outlined in this manual.
• To avoid damaging the membranes, all prescreening measures

must be in operation at all times. Do not bypass prescreening
processes under any circumstances.
• Compressed air used to test membrane integrity must be clean,

dry, and free of oil. Do not exceed the maximum recommended
pressure.
• Do not allow membrane fibers to come in contact with sharp

objects, become entangled with equipment or tools, or be pulled
tightly.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Cautions

August, 2011 A-1
• Do not clean the membranes with a high-pressure water stream

(example: pressure washer, firehose).
• If the system has been preserved (example: for shipment or

shutdown), any shipping preservatives must be flushed from the
system prior to startup.
• Membranes must be immersed in a biocidal solution prior to

storage, shipping, or system shutdowns longer than 72 hours.
• Membranes that are to be returned to GE W&PT must be cleaned,

sanitized, and preserved before shipment. Contact GE W&PT for
instructions before returning membranes.
ZeeWeed 500D - Cautions Rev. 0

A-2 August, 2011
A.2
SUBSYSTEM OVERVIEW
This page has been
A.2.1 INTRODUCTION
TIP: The term The ZeeWeed 500D is a supported hollow-fiber ultrafiltration membrane
'supported' refers to system that consists primarily of a series of modules housed within one
the fact that the
membrane polymer or more cassettes.
coats a braided
material that
reinforces the fiber.
A module is the basic building block and smallest replaceable unit within
the subsystem. Modules are joined together to form a cassette, which is
the smallest operable unit within the subsystem. The number of modules
contained within a cassette will vary depending on system capacity and
configuration.
Cassettes are suspended in a membrane tank and connected to

permeate collection and air distribution piping. They are inserted into
and removed from the membrane tank using an overhead lifting
apparatus, and are installed and maintained using a specialized set of
tools.
Figure A.2.1 - Typical ZeeWeed System Configuration
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Subsystem Overview

August, 2011 A-5
A.2.2 MEMBRANE FIBERS

The core of the ZeeWeed product line is the membrane fiber, an outside-
in supported polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) hollow tube. Two distinct
membrane chemistries exist; one for use in membrane bioreactors
(MBRs) and another for other applications, such as drinking water or
tertiary treatment.
The ultrafiltration membrane fiber has a nominal pore size of 0.04 µ and
is capable of removing suspended solids, protozoa, bacteria, and most
viruses. As a result, high-quality permeate can be produced with
minimum chemical addition and treatment. For more information, refer
to Table A.2.1 - Module Specifications.
A.2.3 MODULES
TIP: A special key is Membrane fibers are arranged vertically between the membrane
used to lock the module’s two headers. Water is drawn through the fibers and into the
module in place when
it is installed in the permeate header. From here, it then exits the module via the permeate
cassette. spigot or saddle.
Figure A.2.2 - ZeeWeed 500D Module
ZeeWeed 500D - Subsystem Overview Rev. 0

A-6 August, 2011
The following table provides general specifications for the ZeeWeed

500D module.
Table A.2.1 - Module Specifications

Module Dimensions
Height 2.19 m (7.2 ft)
Width 0.84 m (2.77 ft)
Depth 4.9 cm (1.9 in.)
Module Weight
Maximum shipping weight (crated) 26 kg (58 lbs) (wastewater)
28 kg (62 lbs) (drinking water)
Lifting weight (varies with solids 26 - 75 kg (58 - 163 lbs) (wastewater)
accumulation) 30 - 74 kg (66 - 163 lbs) (drinking water)
Membrane Properties
Nominal surface area 31.6 m2 (340 ft2) (wastewater)
40.9 m2 (440 ft2) (drinking water)
Material PVDF
Nominal pore size 0.04 
Surface properties Non-ionic, hydrophilic
Fiber diameter (outside/inside) 1.9 mm/0.8 mm
Flow path Outside-in
Operating Specifications
TMP range -55 - 55 kPa (-8 - 8 psi) (wastewater),
-90 - 90 kPa (-13 - 13 psi) (drinking water)
Maximum operating temperature 40ºC (104ºF)
Operating pH range 5.0 - 9.5
Cleaning Specifications
Maximum cleaning temperature 40ºC (104ºF)
Cleaning pH range 2.0 - 10.5
Maximum chlorine concentration 1,000 ppm

August, 2011 A-7
A.2.4 CASSETTES
Cassettes provide support to modules, and consist primarily of a
reinforced frame and permeate collection piping. When installed,
modules are connected in parallel into the top and bottom common
saddles, which are linked by a 5.08 cm (2 in.) PVC permeate downcomer
pipe. The top saddle connects into the 20.32 cm (8 in.) permeate
manifold. The cassette is then linked to an external permeate header on
the train using hard pipe or hose connections.
The cassette includes 7.62 cm (3 in.) aeration PVC downcomer pipes that
feed air into tube diffusers assembled into a grid at the bottom of the
cassette.
Figure A.2.3 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette

A-8 August, 2011
The following table provides general specifications for the ZeeWeed

500D cassette.
Table A.2.2 - Cassette Specifications

48M 64M
Size & Dimensions
Maximum number of ZeeWeed Forty-eight Sixty-four
modules
Length 2.11 m (6.93 ft) 2.11 m (6.93 ft)
Width 0.73 m (2.4 ft) 0.73 m (2.4 ft)
Height 2.08 m (6.84 ft) 2.08 m (6.84 ft)
Tie-Points
Permeate connection 15.24 cm (6 in.) 316 L SS 20.32 cm (8 in.) 316 L SS
vertical pipe horizontal pipe
Air connection All ZeeWeed 500D cassettes include two 7.62 cm (3 in.)
PVC vertical spigots
Weights
Maximum shipping weight (crated) 1,730 kg (3,815 lbs) 2,040 kg (4,500 lbs)
Lifting weight (varies with solids 1,335 - 4,260 kg 1,425 - 4,535 kg
accumulation) (2,945 - 9,385 lbs) (3,140 - 10,000 lbs)
A.2.5 THEORY OF OPERATION

The following sections provide information regarding the theory and
processes of UF in general and of the ZeeWeed 500D subsystem in
particular.
A.2.5.1 FILTRATION
Filtration is defined as the separation of one or more components from
a fluid stream. In conventional usage, it usually refers to the separation
of solid or insoluble particles from liquid or gaseous streams.

August, 2011 A-9
The most commonly employed membrane processes and the filtration

ranges in which they operate are shown in Figure A.2.4 - Filtration
Spectrum.
Figure A.2.4 - Filtration Spectrum
Membrane separation processes can be categorized in various ways,

three of which are pore size, molecular weight cut-off (MWCO), and
operation pressure.
As the pore size is reduced (and the MWCO decreases), the pressure
applied to the membrane for separation generally increases. The water
treatment objectives of each system decide the basis on which a
process is selected and operated.
A.2.5.2 ZEEWEED ULTRAFILTRATION

UF is a process that filters particles on the basis of size. In membrane
separations, UF is typically used to separate or remove relatively large
particles, such as microbes, bacteria, and macromolecules with
molecular weights greater than approximately 300,000. UF uses "loose"
membranes, meaning those that have relatively large pores.

A-10 August, 2011
The ZeeWeed membrane filtration surface is a neutral, strong polymeric

membrane cast on the outside surface of a porous support fiber. Each
fiber can be divided into three parts: the membrane, the support braid
(or reinforced structure), and the lumen, as shown in Figure A.2.5 -
ZeeWeed Membrane Fiber.
1. Membrane 4. Effluent
2. Reinforced structure 5. Lumen
3. Influent 6. Hollow fiber

Figure A.2.5 - ZeeWeed Membrane Fiber
Treated water passes through the membrane as permeate while

contaminants are rejected. The subsystem maintains a turbulent flow
pattern along the membrane fibers with the use of low-pressure air to
keep the filtration surface clear of contaminant buildup (fouling), which
causes a reduction in membrane efficiency.

August, 2011 A-11
Figure A.2.6 - ZeeWeed Membrane Schematic depicts a ZeeWeed

membrane fiber in operation. Permeate is pulled through the membrane
from the feedwater by a partial vacuum created within the membrane
fibers. Periodically, membranes are backpulsed by pumping permeate
back into the membrane fibers, forcing flow back out through the
membranes to scour foulants from their surfaces.
1. Support material 4. Aeration bubbles (for fluid agitation)
2. Membrane 5. Coarse bubble diffuser
3. Effluent (containing solids)

Figure A.2.6 - ZeeWeed Membrane Schematic

A-12 August, 2011
A.3
INSTALLATION & TESTING
This page has been
A.3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding subsystem installation,
initial testing, and maintenance procedures. This information must be
read and internalized in its entirety by the operators prior to installing or
operating the ZeeWeed subsystem.
A.3.2 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

The following must be available before the subsystem can be installed:
APPLICABLE DRAWINGS: The Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID),

General Arrangement (GA), Plot Plan, and Electrical drawings for the
system are provided in Volume III - Drawings Binder. These drawings will
be needed during installation.
WATER: Water introduced into the system during installation must be

free of particulates, and any debris that falls into the tanks must be
removed immediately.
ELECTRICITY: GE W&PT is not responsible for supplying power to the

subsystem. During installation, a qualified electrician must verify the
following:
• That all electrical connections meet local government and

industry standards.
• That all electrical cables have been properly fitted.
• That all 3-phase motors have been wired for proper rotation.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL: A qualified electrician, pipefitter, and millwright are

required on site when commissioning the system.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Installation & Testing

August, 2011 A-15
A.3.3 PERSONAL SAFETY

It is crucial that fall arrest equipment be worn when working overtop the
membrane tank. A fall arrest harness must be worn and appropriate tie-
off lanyards must be used while installing and/or working on a cassette.
A.3.4 RECEIVING CASSETTES

The following sections provide information regarding the steps involved
in receiving, inspecting, and uncrating new cassettes.
ZeeWeed 500D cassettes are shipped with modules installed. Cassettes

are sealed in a plastic bag filled with a preservative solution that
prevents the membranes from drying out. Ensure that this bag is not split
while the plywood shipping crate is being removed.
A.3.4.1 UNLOADING CASSETTES

The Installer is responsible for unloading membranes and equipment
when they arrive on site. During unloading, ensure the following:
• Equipment is unloaded onto a stable, level surface.
Only qualified personnel should operate a forklift.
• Shipping crates are moved only by lifting from the bottom with a
forklift.
• Any damage observed or caused during unloading is reported

immediately to GE W&PT.
Do not stack shipping crates.
ZeeWeed 500D - Installation & Testing Rev. 0

A-16 August, 2011
A.3.4.2 CONFIRMING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

After all subsystem components have arrived on site, confirm the
following:
• All equipment listed in the shipping manifest is accounted for.
Do not open membrane crates. Verification is limited to external

examination only.
• All equipment has arrived undamaged and with its packaging

unopened. Any signs of damage or non-conformance must be
reported immediately to GE W&PT, and should be documented
by digital photograph.
• None of the handling indicators attached to the membrane

crates have triggered. Refer to A.3.4.3 Confirming Handling
Indicators for more information.
A.3.4.3 CONFIRMING HANDLING INDICATORS

TIP: During All crates containing membranes are equipped with shipping indicators
membrane to protect the integrity of the membranes during shipment. The freeze
installation, the GE
W&PT FSR will inspect and heat indicators are located on the membrane crate and should be
and record the status checked immediately upon receipt. The FSR should document the
of secondary
indicators located indicator condition on the indicator check label, which is located on the
inside the shipping membrane crate.
crates.

August, 2011 A-17
A shipping indicator will trigger if ideal conditions were not maintained

during shipment. If a shipping indicator has triggered, inform GE W&PT
immediately.
Figure A.3.1 - Shipping Indicators
A.3.5 STORING MEMBRANES

The customer must provide all facilities and services required for the
storage, maintenance, protection, and security of the equipment and
materials delivered by GE W&PT.
When storing membranes and other equipment associated with the

subsystem, take the following precautions:
• Store equipment in assigned lay-down areas, indoors (or within a

secure shelter), and atop wooden pallets or similar form of raised
platform. Do not store equipment in locations where they may be
contaminated by dirt or water.
• If equipment is to be stored outdoors, the shelter used to house

them must be weatherproof, well ventilated, and secure against
theft and vandalism (example: construction trailer).
• Protect membrane crates from exposure to excessive vibration

or jostling.

A-18 August, 2011
Membranes must remain crated until the installer is ready to place

them in the membrane tank.
A.3.5.1 STORING CRATED CASSETTES

The following conditions should be ensured when storing crated
cassettes:
• Sheltered area protected from freezing, direct sunlight, or

extreme heat.
• Vacuum-sealed bag should remain sealed until membrane

installation is being performed.
The cassettes have been manufactured and preserved to comply with

the contractually specified delivery and installation schedule. Should
installation be delayed longer than one month, contact GE W&PT for
instructions.
A.3.5.2 STORING BAGGED MODULES

TIP: Contact GE New modules preserved with glycerin solution, bagged and factory-
W&PT before sealed, may be stored for up to 12 months from the date they were
attempting to remove
modules from a manufactured. For the exact expiry date of a particular module, contact
cassette. GE W&PT.
The following conditions should be ensured when storing bagged

modules:
• Stored in a sheltered area protected from freezing, direct

sunlight, extreme heat, and winds that could accelerate drying.

August, 2011 A-19
The glycerin solution used to preserve the membranes can create a

severe slip hazard if spilled. Clean any solution released from a
punctured membrane bag immediately.
• Module bags should be protected from being cut or punctured.
A.3.5.3 STORING WETTED MEMBRANES
Allowing membranes to dry out will damage them irreversibly.
If the preservative is flushed out or if the module has been in contact

with water, the membranes must not be allowed to dry out under any
circumstances. The membranes may be exposed to the air for a
maximum of 45 minutes, so long as they are out of direct sunlight and
wind. After this period, membranes should be immersed in water.
Spraying the membranes after this period is not sufficient to prevent
drying.
If membranes are frequently, lightly misted (not sprayed with fire hoses
or pressure washers) from the time they have been taken out of the
water, they may be left exposed to the air for a maximum of 6 hours at
a temperature between 5 - 35°C (41° - 95°F).
If required by compliance regulations, the standard procedures for

rinsing and disinfection may be used before membranes are put into
operation. If it is impractical to immerse or repeatedly spray the
membranes, the membranes should be cleaned, preserved in glycerin
solution, and rebagged according to membrane preservation procedure
outlined in A.3.12 System Shutdown and Membrane Preservation).
Contact GE W&PT for more information regarding storage durations and

procedures.

A-20 August, 2011
A.3.5.4 STORING WETTED CASSETTES

For storage periods of up to approximately 15 days, immersing
cassettes in water containing sodium hypochlorite (chlorine) with a
residual concentration of 3 mg/L is sufficient. Test this solution daily and
record the chlorine level. Add chlorine if the residual concentration drops
to less than 0.2 mg/L.
It is strongly recommended that a Recovery Clean be performed before

membranes are taken offline. Periodic aeration may also be necessary
to prevent anoxic or anaerobic conditions from developing in the tank.
Contact GE W&PT for additional instructions if a storage period longer

than 15 days is required.
A.3.6 PREVENTING DEBRIS CONTAMINATION

It is critical that debris capable of damaging the membranes (example:
anything over 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) in size) be prevented from entering a
membrane tank. Damage caused by debris is not covered by the
membrane warranty. Possible contamination pathways include:
• Feedwater laden with debris.
• Debris allowed to fall into the tank during work performed

nearby.
• Residue from piping or process equipment.
Examples of common materials that can cause damage include, but are
not limited to, the following:
• Cable ties.
• Plastic turnings from drilling.
• Pieces of wire.
• Broken measuring tapes.

August, 2011 A-21
• Weld slag and metal debris from grinding.
• Twigs and leaves.
• Shells and sand.
• Fish.
As a general rule, cover the membrane tank with a plastic sheet or

similar barrier whenever work that may generate debris is being
performed nearby.
A.3.7 UNCRATING AND INSTALLING CASSETTES

The purpose of this document is to outline the steps required to properly
install modules into a 500D 48E WW cassette installed with MARS.
Follow proper safety procedures to prevent injury when carrying out

this procedure.
These instructions are specific to this model of cassette.
Proper crane training is required along with a certified and inspected

crane.
Prior to installation of the membranes, all piping and tanks must be

installed, tested, and readied to accept membrane cassettes.

A-22 August, 2011
A.3.7.1 PREPARING THE SITE

The Membrane Pre-Installation Checklist must be completed before
cassettes can be uncrated and installed. The GE representative will
provide the Membrane Pre-Installation Checklist, the Membrane Map,
and Repair Log.
All loose shipped parts required for cassette installation must be located.
All guide brackets, permeate piping and air piping are to be installed as
per installation documentation supplied by GE W&PT.
Membrane tanks must be thoroughly cleaned and free of debris. There

must be enough water in the membrane tank to ensure that the fibers
are completely submerged within water.
Locate and reserve an area for proper cassette assembly and

unloading.
The following parts should be available:
• Forklift with extended forks rated for cassette weight – to move

crate
• Crane/hoist, slings, and lifting bracket – to upright cassette and

install cassette in tank. Lifting hoist requirements:
• 64 element cassette: 3000-4500 kg (6614-9921 lbs)
• 48 element cassette: 2800-3800 kg (6172-8377 lbs)
• 2 sheets of 1 in. thick foam (90 in. x 90 in.)
• Four (4) 3/4 in. lifting safety hoist rings rated for 2268 kg (5000
lbs), material: 4140 aircraft quality carbon steel (recommended
manufacturer ACTEK, part #46018) c/w 8 3/4 in. diameter SS flat
washers and 4 3/4 in. diameter SS hex nuts (included with
shipment)
• Four (4) slings
• Four (4) point spreader bar

August, 2011 A-23
• Two (2) point spreader bar
• Module Removal Tool
• NEFAB tool/flat head screwdriver – to uncrate the cassette
• Camera – for documenting the condition of the cassette and

indic in.” socket – to attach cassette arms
• 1 1/8 in. socket - to attach cassette arms
• PVC glue and primer – to install necessary PVC elbows to cassette
• Anti-Seize - use NSF grade only for drinking water applications

(for example, White Knight)
Always use trained operators and inspected equipment.
• Four (4) - 3 in. x 3/4 in. 316 SS bolts
• Eight (8) - 3/4 in. 316 SS nuts
• Four (4) - 3/4 in. 316 SS flat washers
• Four (4) - 3/4 in. 316 SS nord-lock washers
A.3.7.2 INSTALLING LEVELING PINS

The purpose of these pins is to allow for proper leveling of each
membrane cassette during the final stages of the plant construction.
The cassette must be individually leveled to a tolerance of +/-1/8 in. per

cassette within a train. All cassettes across adjoining process must be +/
- 1/4 in. level tolerance of one another. The cassette support design in
the membrane tank includes adjustable pins to fine tune the cassette
levels. Use a laser level prior to cassette installation to ensure the
required tolerances are achieved. Cassettes that are not properly
leveled may exhibit more rapid fouling as air distribution may be
affected.

A-24 August, 2011
Ensure that the following parts are available:
• Item #1 - Hitch Pin or Double Split Shaft Collar - please refer to

project specifics
• Item #3 - Qty 8 - 1in. UNC 316L SS Hex Nut
• Item #5 - Qty 8 - 1 in. NL SS Nord-Lock locking washer 1 in. Nom
• Torque = 104 ft-lbs
A.3.7.3 MANEUVERING THE CASSETTE

It is important that before any work begins, the necessary planning and
precautions are done in order to ensure that the membrane installation
procedure is safely carried out. It is the responsibility of those installing
the membranes to properly prepare.
Before the crates or cassettes can be moved, ensure that the lifting
mechanism (fork lift and crane) are in good operating conditions and are
rated for the load.
While maneuvering the crate or cassette, ensure that no one is in its path
or out of sight of the crane/forklift operator.
Do not stand under the cassette or crate.
The forklift and crane operators must be qualified and certified

forklift and crane operators and must have the proper
documentation on the person while operating the equipment.

August, 2011 A-25
A.3.7.4 UNCRATING CASSETTES

ZeeWeed 500D cassettes are always shipped with modules installed.
The cassette is shipped on its side in a plywood crate. The cassette itself
is sealed in plastic to retain moisture and prevent membrane damage.
500D crates are not designed to be stacked on top of one another.
Damage, such as punctures, water damage, and tripped indicators

incurred during equipment off-loading needs to be reported to the site
superintendent and GE W&PT immediately.
Uncrate the membranes with a GE W&PT representative present to

monitor the process and verify the receiving tanks and piping have been
satisfactorily prepared. Failure to do so may affect the membrane
warranty.
The cassette will need to be transported to a designated uncrating area

using a forklift. Uncrating the cassettes is to be completed on a dry level
surface, out of direct sunlight.
The cassette should not be allowed to freeze. Refer to A.4 Membrane

Care.
Membranes are not to be uncrated if any of the following activities are

taking place in the immediate vicinity:
• painting
• wiring and terminations
• roofing
• grinding
• tinwork

A-26 August, 2011
• welding
• pipe flushing
• sandblasting
• drilling
• all power tools that discharge debris (including carpentry)
• or any other activity that could pose harm to the membranes
The cassettes should be uncrated by removing the top first followed by

the sides. Please note that at least two people are required to uncrate
the cassette. The following pictures illustrate the order of cassette
uncrating.
Use two workers to remove the box sides.
The top of the crate is to be removed first followed by one of the sides.
Figure A.3.2 - Top of Crate Removed

August, 2011 A-27
TIP: Crate The ends will remain supported by the other side of the cassette. When
dimensions (LxWxH) removing the other side, care must be taken to ensure the remaining
are: 111 in. x 83 in. x
89 in. (2.82 m x 2.10 m ends of the cassette are supported. See Figure A.3.2 - Top of Crate
x 2.26 m). Removed.
Figure A.3.3 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic
A.3.7.4.1 REMOVING THE CASSETTE BAG

The cassette comes packaged in a vacuum sealed bag. After the
cassette is uncrated, and immediately prior to installing the cassette into
the membrane tank with water, carefully remove the bag. See Figure
A.3.3 - Cassette Sealed in Plastic.
Cut open the bag sealing at the top, then carefully roll it down to the
base of the crate. See Figure A.3.4 - Bag Sealing the Cassette.

A-28 August, 2011
Do NOT cut along the center of the cassette. Fibers can be damaged.
Figure A.3.4 - Bag Sealing the Cassette
Once rolled down to the base of the cassette, cut the bag at the base and
discard.
There is a plastic wrap underneath the bag. The plastic wrap must
stay intact for the uprighting of the cassette.

August, 2011 A-29
Depending upon the version of the cassette, it may come equipped with
yellow shipping braces. If these braces are present, they need to be
removed prior to uprighting the cassette.
Figure A.3.5 - Removing the Cassette Bag
If the membranes have been in storage, check for any signs of mold
on the fibers. If mold is present, immediately rebag and contact GE
W&PT.
A.3.7.5 MOVING UNCRATED CASSETTES

When the cassette has been removed from the shipping crate, care
must be taken to ensure that contact with the membrane fibers is
avoided.
Lift the cassette by the factory-supplied lifting points on the top of the
cassette using the lifting module. If a lifting module is not available, a
spreader bar is required.
Do not attach ropes to the four hanger brackets and lift the hanger
brackets. The hanger brackets will not withstand the horizontal
(inward) loads produced by the ropes.

A-30 August, 2011
Cassettes are designed to be lifted vertically and lowered slowly. Do not

swing or drop cassettes. Never tilt or drag an uncrated cassette. Treat
the product with care.
If necessary, the uncrated and uprighted cassette can be moved on the

wooden skid on which it was shipped, using a forklift. Extreme caution
must be taken to avoid wind, environmental, and safety risks that may
be present while moving the cassette in this manner.
If there is contact with the fibers, the integrity of the membranes may
be compromised. Advise GE W&PT staff on site immediately so the
fibers can be inspected and repairs can be initiated before cassette is
installed. If fiber damage is not reported to GE W&PT staff, extra time
and effort will be required later to remove the cassette and make the
repairs.
A.3.7.6 INSPECTING THE ZEEWEED 500D CASSETTE -

INSPECTION 1
With the cassette uncrated but still on its side, perform the following
inspections of the aeration piping and connections:
• Ensure that aerators are properly in place. See Figure A.3.6 -

Cassette Inspections and Figure A.3.7 - Aerators.
• Ensure that the large holes on the aerators are facing down
relative to the cassette.
• Ensure that all saddles are securely clipped to the cassette

frame.
• Ensure that the correct number of non permeating (“dummy”)

headers are installed and in the correct location.
• Ensure that the correct type of aerators are used under the non-
permeating (“dummy”) headers (some aerators are “left” aerators
and some are “right” aerators depending on which side the small
side holes are on).

August, 2011 A-31
• Ensure that the two main aeration pipes are installed and secure.
Figure A.3.6 - Cassette Inspections
Figure A.3.7 - Aerators

A-32 August, 2011
A.3.7.7 INSTALLING UNION TO CASSETTE’S MAIN

AERATION PIPES
All cassettes require that either a PVC union or hose barb fitting be glued
to the PVC pipes on the cassette. In order to minimize the amount of time
and work required on the cassette after it is installed and to reduce the
risk of damage to the membranes, these parts should be installed prior
to the cassette being installed in the tank. The ideal time is when the
cassette is still on its side.
Figure A.3.8 - Union Installation
A.3.7.8 UPRIGHTING A CASSETTE

The cassettes are shipped on their sides and need to be lifted, then
rotated to the upright position.
Read this procedure completely before proceeding with the

uprighting operation.

August, 2011 A-33
To promote safety, uprighting a cassette must be done in a dedicated

staging area. The staging area shall be cordoned-off to people who are
not directly involved in this activity.
Bring shipping crates into the staging area one at a time. Clear the area
of any material and provide the safe space required for both removing
the cassette from the wooden skid and uprighting it. The area for the
uprighting operation shall be at least 7.5 meters X 3 meters (25 ft X 10 ft).
Clearly mark the area and isolate it, so that access of unauthorized
personnel is prevented. The use of a perimeter fence, rope/chain
barriers, pylons, or other signalling and blocking means is highly
recommended.
Be alert! Cassettes have sharp edges.
Follow these two steps:
1. A.3.7.8.1 Removing the Cassette from the Wooden Skid.
2. A.3.7.8.2 Uprighting Cassette.
Remove all uncrating material from the staging area before

commencing the uprighting activity.
The use of an overhead hoist is recommended; however, if an

appropriate overhead hoist is not available, then a mobile telescopic
boom crane or equivalent lifting device should be used. The hoist/crane
must be rated for at least a 5 ton (10,000 lb) lifting capacity at both the
jib extension and the angle required for the lift.
The operation of the hoist/crane shall be performed by a qualified

operator, according to the local and international safety codes and
regulations for lifting operations. If a crane is being used, it shall be
located at an appropriate distance to prevent collision with the cassette
during the lifting and uprighting.

A-34 August, 2011
Follow proper safety procedures to prevent injury.
A.3.7.8.1 REMOVING THE CASSETTE FROM THE WOODEN SKID

One set of four hoist rings is included with every 10 cassettes (or less) in
the shipment. Attach the four lifting hoist rings to the four upper corners
of the cassette.
Figure A.3.9 - Hoist Ring Location
Hoist rings are made of carbon steel. To prevent cassette frame

stainless steel contamination, it is important to install 3/4 in.
stainless steel flat washers on the top plate along with a stainless
steel nut.
• Tighten the bolt to the recommended torque of 100 ft/lbs.
• Ensure that the bushing of the hoist ring is sitting flush against
the frame.
• Verify that the hoist is free to swivel and pivot in every direction.

August, 2011 A-35
• Confirm bolt, shoulder pins, or bail do not show any cracks or

signs of wear.
• Secure shoulder pins.
Figure A.3.10 - Hoist Ring Assembly
Ensure that the following steps are taken before performing the
uprighting procedure:
1. Place a 1 in. thick foam sheet on the clear and flat ground where
the cassette will be placed for uprighting.
2. Use a four point lift frame and spreader bar to uncrate and
upright a cassette. This lifting configuration is highly
recommended in conditions where overhead space is limited.
3. Ensure that the hoist rings do not touch or pry against any
surface of the cassette frame, in particular the vertical corner
post, except at the location of attachment. If a lift frame or
spreader bar is not available, an arrangement similar to what is
shown in Figure A.3.11 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point
Lift Frame and Spreader Bar is recommended. Follow these
recommendations:

A-36 August, 2011
• Use two slings on each lifting bracket. The sling closest to the
cassette should be a short nylon strap about 4 feet long. This
arrangement will prevent damage from the crane hooks. The
longer cables should be at least 20 feet long.
• Use flexible synthetic material (such as reinforced man-made

fibers) instead of metal chains to avoid damage to the
cassette body material.
• Minimum angles between the horizontal plane and the cables

should be:
i. 60° where the spreader bar (lifting frame) is used
ii. 75° for one point lift
Figure A.3.11 - Lifting a Cassette Without a Four-Point Lift Frame and Spreader
Bar
Ensure that the surrounding area is clear of people.
4. Slowly lift the hoist until the cassette is at the minimum height
(not more than 2 in. or 5 cm) required to move the cassette off the
wooden skid.

August, 2011 A-37
5. Slowly and gently transfer the cassette to above the 1 in. foam
sheet, and gently lower the cassette to the ground.
6. Remove the skid and the remains of the vacuum-sealed bag.
7. Clean the area of any spills, using rags or other absorbent

material. Clean and dry the floor to prevent slip hazards.
8. Disengage the hoist and slings. Remove the two hoist rings
attached to the bottom side of cassette (the side that will be
placed on the ground).
A.3.7.8.2 UPRIGHTING CASSETTE
If a crane is being used, it must be located at an appropriate distance

to prevent collision with the cassette during the uprighting, in case a
“kicking out” occurs.
Follow these steps:
1. Locate the crane on the side of the cassette where the cassette
moves horizontally during the uprighting.
2. Place another 1 in. foam sheet to the side of the cassette where
it will be placed on the ground.
3. Attach a two-point spreader bar to the lifting hoist. Attach the

spreader bar to the two hoist rings on the upper side of the
cassette using two slings.
Ensure that the surrounding area is clear of people.
4. Slowly lifting the cassette off the ground. The cassette will tilt as
it is lifted. The lifting device must be free to move laterally to
remain over the cassette’s center of gravity.

A-38 August, 2011
5. At all times, keep the hoist in vertical alignment with the lifting
points on the cassette. Failure to do so could result in the cassette
“kicking out”. Do not attempt to stop the cassette if it kicks out.
6. If a crane is being used, a signaling person, standing at a safe

distance, should signal the crane operator. Appropriate
signaling/communication means are required.
7. Lift the cassette until it pivots onto its side, then lower it until it
rests fully on the foam in its vertical position.
8. After lowering the cassette to the vertical position, remove the

slings and lifting hoist rings.
Figure A.3.12 - Uprighting a Cassette
A.3.7.9 INSTALLING CASSETTE ARMS

The cassette arms, which allow the cassette to be moved using the lifting
frame, are installed after the uprighting procedure. Refer to the
applicable fabrication drawings that are provided for details on this
assembly.
A torque of 104 ft-lb for 3/4 in. Nord-Locks is needed.

August, 2011 A-39
Figure A.3.13 - Cassette Arms
There are regular and mirror image versions of the arms. Ensure that the
correct arm is installed on the correct side of the cassette.
Note the position of the open end of the hanger arms and the position of
the small tab at the bottom. Also note that the hanger arms on the
diagonal from each other are identical and hanger arms adjacent to
each other are opposite in orientation (top slots are on different sides of
center).
Figure A.3.14 - Installed Cassette Arms with Lifting Bracket

A-40 August, 2011
A.3.7.10 REMOVING THE PLASTIC WRAPPING

Cassettes are shipped with plastic wrap around the fibers. It must be
removed carefully so that the membrane fibers are not cut. To remove
the plastic, cut the wrapping close to the corner beam. To avoid
contamination of the stainless steel frame (leading to corrosion), do not
come in contact with the cassette frame while cutting. Discard the
wrapping following its removal.
Be sure to cut along the corner beam to prevent fibers from being
damaged. Do not cut plastic wrapper along the membrane area.
Figure A.3.15 - Cutting the Wrapper

August, 2011 A-41
A.3.7.11 REMOVING THE PROTECTIVE FOAM

Cassettes are shipped with protective foam placed against the 2 in.
vertical permeate down pipes, on the back side of the cassette. This
foam is used to prevent fibers from rubbing on the pipes during shipping.
Before removing the foam, visually inspect the cassette for any tangled
fibers or fibers stuck to the foam. Pull the foam out from within the
cassette carefully and slowly.
Figure A.3.16 - Removing the Protective Foam
To prevent damage to the membranes, use extreme caution when

pulling the protective foam out of the cassette.

A-42 August, 2011
A.3.7.12 INSPECTING THE ZEEWEED 500D CASSETTE -

INSPECTION 2
The second inspection consists of the following:
• Before installing the cassette into the membrane tank, inspect

the cassette for loose or missing nuts and bolts. Refer to 500D
Torque Specifications found on the General Arrangement
Drawings.
• Inspect the cassette frame welds for rust spots.
• Verify that the module keys are in the locked position (vertical).
• Record the serial numbers of each membrane module on the

membrane map. When placed into the membrane tank, record
the location in the tank where the membrane is placed.
• Ensure that the top and bottom expander blocks are tight and
fully engaged and flush with the bottom surface of the key side
outer assembly.
Figure A.3.17 - Tighten Expander Blocks

August, 2011 A-43
A.3.7.13 ASSEMBLING AERATION PIPING

Some parts of the cassette aeration spool may be assembled together
before the cassette is installed. These sub-assemblies are then
assembled together after the cassette is installed in the tank. For the
specific parts that can be assembled together, look in the spool
drawings for the specific project. Preassembling reduces the cassette
installation time and reduces the amount of work that will have to be
done on the cassettes after they are installed.
Figure A.3.18 - Aeration Piping
A.3.8 INSTALLING CASSETTES IN THE

MEMBRANE TANK
After the cassette has been fully inspected, the cassette can be installed
in the membrane tank.
There must be enough potable water in the membrane tank such that
no fibers will be exposed to air once the cassette is installed.

A-44 August, 2011
The lifting arm is moved using the crane to the overtop of the cassette.
The pins at its four corners slide into the hanger arm slotted hole facing
the inside of the cassette. Once the pins are through the slotted holes, a
hitch pin must be passed through the lifting bracket pins to secure the
lifting bracket to the cassette.
Figure A.3.19 - Lifting Bracket
Using the hoist and lifting bracket, carefully lift the cassette and install it
onto the leveling pins inside the membrane tank. The outside slotted
holes on the hanger arms slide onto the leveling pins in the tank.
During lifting, the cassette is to be guided by the cassette stainless

steel supports only. Never touch the membranes.

August, 2011 A-45
A.3.8.1 INSTALLING PERMEATE AND AIR CONNECTIONS

With the membranes in the tank, the permeate and aeration
connections must be completed.
Figure A.3.20 - Permeate and Air Connections
Do not allow any glue or solvent to fall onto the fibers or cassette as
irreversible damage may result. Protect fibers and PVC piping from
spills.
A.3.8.2 CONNECTING PERMEATE PIPING

The permeate piping is connected by installing a coupling that will join
the cassette to the rest of the permeate header. The coupling is either 4
in. or 8 in. depending on the application. Also depending on the
application, the permeate header may come through the tank wall and
straight to the cassette header (Figure A.3.20 - Permeate and Air
Connections) or it may be located above the cassettes and have to be
piped down from the top of the tank to the cassette header (Figure A.3.21
- Cassette Header). Either way, the following steps should be taken in
order to minimize the installation time and reduce the amount of work
done after membranes are installed in the tank:

A-46 August, 2011
1. Just before dropping the cassette onto the leveling pins, mount
the coupling to the cassette header and the pipe spool that
connects to the other side of the coupling.
2. Tighten the coupling so that it can support the weight of the spool
piece.
3. Lower cassette onto the leveling pins.
4. Install remaining spool pieces and couplings to connect to main

permeate header. Remove the lifting bracket if it gets in the way
of the work.
While installing the remaining couplings and spool pieces after the
cassette is in the tank, make sure that the membrane modules are
not stepped on. Only step on the cassette header and frame.
Figure A.3.21 - Cassette Header
For systems where the permeate header is installed through the wall of
the tank and is aligned with the cassette header, place the coupling on
the section of the permeate header sticking through the tank wall. Lower
the cassette onto the leveling pins, slide the coupling so that it catches
both pipes, and tighten.

August, 2011 A-47
A.3.8.3 CONNECTING AIR PIPING

Each cassette is provided with two 3 in. air connections. Each of these air
connections provides air to half of the aerators at the bottom of the
cassette. Depending on the design of the system, these two air
connections can either:
• connect together with a 4 in. tee at the cassette and then a
• 4 in. connection is made to the header, or;
• run independently as two 3 in. spools; each spool connecting to

separate aeration headers.
The single 4 in. tee version is for installations with cyclic aeration (whole
cassette on-off air cycling). The twin 3 in. connection version is for
installations with sequential aeration (air is cycled first to half the
aerators on a cassette - and then the other half). If there is any
uncertainty as to which design is to be used, refer to the P&IDs.
Follow these steps:
1. Lower the cassette onto the leveling pins and remove the lifting
bracket, if necessary, to make room to work.
2. Install the permeate piping completely. See Figure A.3.18 -

Aeration Piping.
3. Install the aeration hose connection to the main aeration header.
4. Connect the other end of the hose to the already installed (see
A.3.7.7 Installing Union to Cassette’s Main Aeration Pipes) fitting
on the cassette main aeration pipes.

A-48 August, 2011
Always connect the air hose to the main aeration header first and
then connect the other end to the cassette PVC aeration pipes. This
avoids stressing the PVC parts on the cassette.
Figure A.3.22 - Air Connections

August, 2011 A-49
A.3.9 AFTER CASSETTE INSTALLATION

The following procedures must be completed after all cassettes have
been installed in the membrane tanks.
A.3.9.1 FLUSHING
All ZeeWeed membrane modules and cassettes are shipped in a
glycerin solution with a pH of 3.5 to 4.5 to prevent the membranes from
drying. This glycerin solution has a high biochemical oxygen demand
(BOD) and is not suitable for discharge to surface water or as drinking
water.
The contractor is responsible for supplying available disposal capacity

for spent water, including disposal of wastewater following flushing of
glycerin after membrane installation (pH range of 2 to 11).
The downstream tank for permeate must not be contaminated with

glycerin.
A.3.9.1.1 PURGING GLYCERIN FROM MEMBRANES

Complete the following steps:
1. Install the membranes in the membrane tank filled with feed

water.
2. Run the system so that the membranes are permeating at 40

LMH (23.6 GFD). Recycle the permeate from the permeate pump
discharge to the membrane tank for 60 minutes.
3. Drain the membrane tank contents to a drain and pump to

headworks of the plant.
4. Refill the membrane tank with feed water.

A-50 August, 2011
5. As in step 2, run the system so that the membranes are

permeating at 40 LMH (23.6 GFD). Recycle the permeate from the
permeate pump discharge to the membrane tank for 30 minutes.
6. Drain the tank contents to a drain or a tanker.
7. Repeat steps 4, 5, and 6 twice. Measure the organic contents of

the final tank drain to verify that TOC is less than 3 mg/L above
the background level, or that the COD is less than 10 mg/L above
the background level.
If there are multiple trains, the glycerin flushing water can be reused.
GE W&PT will provide calculations to determine the volume of water
required.
A.3.9.2 CHECKING AERATION

The cassettes must be installed before starting an aeration check.
To verify proper aeration to the membranes, complete the following

steps:
1. Start the blower and ensure that air is being supplied to the
membrane cassettes.
2. If the installation procedure is carried out correctly, the aeration

diffuser system should be totally horizontal, providing even
distribution of air over the membranes. After install the cassettes,
visually verify that the air distribution is even.
Air must be evenly distributed within the cassette.

August, 2011 A-51
3. Observe the bubble pattern on the surface of the tank. The

surface should bubble evenly above the membrane cassette. If
any uneven aeration is observed, the system must be stopped
and the cause isolated. If the airflow is uneven, it can be
corrected by adjusting the level of the cassette using the levelling
bolts. This is critical and will be supervised by a GE W&PT FSR.
4. Check the air pipe connections for leakage. If any leaks are found,
fix the piping immediately to ensure that the membrane
cassettes are receiving sufficient aeration.
5. With the aeration on, observe the airflow pattern in the various
membrane tanks. Determine if the difference in membrane tank
level while backpulsing has an effect on the airflow pattern.
6. Observe the aeration pattern within the individual cassettes

during the 10-second cycle to determine whether all of the
modules are receiving equal airflow.
7. Turn aeration on in one membrane tank and off in another tank.

Ensure there is no aeration in the membrane tank that is off.
A.3.9.3 TESTING PERFORMANCE

The customer is responsible for ensuring a supply of raw water and a
receiving body for the treated water for commissioning and
performance testing of the equipment.
The customer is responsible for the provision of necessary analytical

tests for treated water quality, as per project specifications.

A-52 August, 2011
A.3.9.4 BUBBLE TEST

A bubble test is used to locate leaks in the membranes and should be
completed for each cassette in the subsystem. To complete a bubble
test, perform the following steps:
TIP: If possible, 1. Reduce the water level in the membrane tank to a point below
remove the cassette the permeate connection, so that no water can get into the
from the membrane
tank and test in a cassette after the connection is removed. The membranes must
separate tank. be completely submerged.
Before making any connections, ensure that the membrane safety

hand valve and the pressure regulating valve are closed.
2. Connect the PDT kit adapters to the permeate connection(s) on

the cassette.
3. Connect the 1/4 in. tubing from the adapter to the permeate air
connection, and then connect the 1/4 in. tubing from the
compressed air source.
4. Slowly open the pressure regulating valve to empty liquid from

the permeate side of the membrane into the membrane tank.
5. Set the applied air pressure to just over half of the required
pressure.
6. Wait 5 minutes to ensure the air has purged the water, and then
increase the air pressure to just under the required pressure.
7. Examine the membranes for escaping bubbles (indicating a leak).
8. If a leak is found, analyze the bubble stream as described in

A.3.9.4.1 Bubble Types. Based on the type of bubble stream
found, the module can be repaired using the procedures outlined
later in this manual.

August, 2011 A-53
In cases where few leaks are present in a given module, and none of the
leaks are serious, the repairs should be made on site. If a module
requires difficult or numerous repairs, contact GE W&PT for further
information.
A.3.9.4.1 BUBBLE TYPES

The size and type of bubbles released by a leak during a bubble test
indicate the type of leak. Bubbles are classified according to four types,
as shown in Figure A.3.23 - Bubble Sizes.
TYPE 1: A Type 1 bubble stream appears as a steady flow of large

bubbles, typically 10 mm (3/8 in.) in diameter or greater. Type 1 streams
are usually released by a broken membrane fiber. However, if the
stream appears to come from one of the permeate headers, it may also
be caused by an improperly installed O-ring.
TYPE 2: A Type 2 bubble stream is characterized by a steady flow of

moderate sized bubbles (between 1 - 10 mm (1/32 - 3/8 in.)). This form of
leak is typically minor and often caused by damaged fibers or “pin holes”
in the membrane. Type 2 leaks may not always require repair. Any
larger leaks found during the bubble test should be repaired first, after
which a second test will determine whether Additional repairs for Type 2
leaks are necessary to bring performance up to specified levels.
TYPE 3: A Type 3 bubble stream appears as an intermittent stream of

small bubbles (less than 1 mm (1/32 in.)). This type of stream is typically
due to air passing through unwetted pores. Unwetted pores allow
passage of air but not water, and do not need to be repaired.

A-54 August, 2011
TYPE 4: Type 4 bubbles gather at the top of the cassette and release
when the bubble is sufficiently large. This type of bubble is usually
formed by accumulated Type 2 or Type 3 bubbles.
Figure A.3.23 - Bubble Sizes
A.3.10 MEMBRANE INSPECTION/REPLACEMENT

This procedure is required if the membranes are being replaced,
inspected as part of routine maintenance, or being removed from the
tank. GE W&PT recommends that direct supervision of GE personnel be
arranged whenever the membranes are removed from the tanks. If
there is a build up of solids on the membranes, read A.3.10.1 Heavy
Cassette Lifting before lifting the cassette from the membrane tank.
Once membrane inspection or replacement has begun, it must be

completed promptly. It is vital that the membranes DO NOT DRY OUT
OR FREEZE before completing this procedure.

August, 2011 A-55
To remove a cassette from the membrane tank:
1. Lower the liquid level in the membrane tank to just below the
connections. Carry out a general shutdown of the whole system.
Isolate the cassettes using the manual valves at the permeate
and air headers.
Individual membrane modules cannot be isolated from the rest of a

membrane cassette.
2. Disconnect the YN couplings from the cassette: 1 coupling for

permeate and 2 couplings for air per cassette.
3. Attach the lifting bracket to the cassette.
4. Attach a chain or lifting strap to the steel lifting harness on the

cassette.
5. Use a manual hoist and monorail (boom truck or crane) to

carefully lift the cassette until the strap is tight. Continue to lift the
membrane cassette out of the frame with the crane, taking care
not to trap the flexible piping or damage the membranes,
especially if any sharp edges are exposed in the area.
6. Remove the cassette to a safe, preferably level, location and

transplant the necessary items to the new membranes (if
applicable; no transplantation is necessary when inspecting the
membranes). If new membranes are being installed, the
customer will ensure that the delivery is correct and will assist in
checking the integrity of the supplied membranes.
7. When inspecting the membranes, check for any apparent

damage to the modules or fibers, and for items that are clearly
different from module to module. Look for any loose hardware or
fasteners. Ensure that none of the membrane fibers are broken.
Check the top and bottom permeate headers and piping for any
apparent damage or cracking.

A-56 August, 2011
8. When replacing a membrane cassette or installing new

membranes, disassemble the cassette in reverse order of
assembly. Contact GE W&PT before disassembling a cassette.
Contact the Service Department at (905) 465-3030 for additional

technical assistance if any problems are observed. GE W&PT maintains
an inventory of membranes at all times. Generally, if membrane
modules are being replaced, they can be shipped on short notice.
A.3.10.1 HEAVY CASSETTE LIFTING

ZeeWeed cassettes that have been operated for extended periods of
time may accumulate debris, which will add weight to the cassette. The
extent of debris buildup over time will depend on the nature of the waste
stream, the effectiveness of the wastewater prescreening step, and
other factors.
If heavily weighted cassettes are completely removed from the tank for
inspection and cleaning, this could result in the cassette frame and
cassette lifting mechanism being subjected to excessive loadings. In
some cases, the resulting load may encroach on the design safety
factor of the cassette frame and lifting mechanism, as well as the
cassette support beam and grating in the location where the cassette is
set down.
Improper handling of overweight cassettes may result in injury or

property loss.
If by direct measurement with a weigh scale or by other means, it is

suspected the cassettes are overweight, or if for safety reasons, it is
assumed the cassettes are overloaded every time the cassettes are
removed, the following procedure will assist in removing the debris from
the cassettes before they are removed from the tank:

August, 2011 A-57
1. Isolate the cassettes from permeation and aerate them for 12 to

24 hours. The cassettes can be isolated via the local hand valves
or by disabling the train from the HMI. Aerating without
permeation has proven effective in removing built up debris from
the cassette and will reduce or eliminate the overweight
condition.
2. Turn off the aeration and lift the cassette partially out of the tank.
Flush the exposed section with clean water (process effluent is
sufficient). Lift the cassette approximately 50 cm – 75 cm (20 in. -
30 in.) at a time and repeat the process. By lifting the cassette in
steps, the submerged sections will be partially supported by the
wastewater and will reduce the lifting loads. For a deep tank
application, where this process is not practical, wash off the
debris prior to lifting the cassette above the grating.
3. Do not complete any lift with staff directly under or in the

immediate vicinity of the cassette. The normal safe operating
practice of using guide ropes should always be used for
controlling the lift. Any direct staff contact with the cassette
should be minimized.
For optimal performance and long life of the equipment, all areas
must be kept clean. Remove any chemical spills immediately and
wipe down the maintenance equipment frequently.
A.3.11 RETURNING DAMAGED MEMBRANES

If the membrane is being returned to GE Water & Process Technologies,
it is imperative that it be properly cleaned, preserved, and that a
“Returned Goods Authorization” (RGA) number be obtained prior to
shipping it. Contact GE Water & Process Technologies technical services
for information on the RGA procedure.

A-58 August, 2011
A.3.12 SYSTEM SHUTDOWN AND MEMBRANE

PRESERVATION
When membranes have been installed in a tank, they need to be kept
wet at all times. When the protective glycerin solution is removed during
soaking in water, the membranes become especially susceptible to
drying. For storage periods of up to approximately 15 days, simple
immersion of the cassettes in water containing sodium hypochlorite
(NaOCl) with a maximum residual concentration of 3 mg/L. Residual
chlorine levels should be monitored every week and repeat testing is
required if the chlorine level drops to less than 0.2 mg/L. Recovery
cleaning of the membrane prior to storage is strongly recommended.
An isolated cassette must be cleaned before it is returned to service.

If a cassette is isolated for less than a week, perform a Maintenance
Clean with sodium hypochlorite. If a cassette is isolated for longer
than a week, perform a Recovery Clean with sodium hypochlorite. For
information on Maintenance and Recovery Cleans, refer to A.7 -
Preventive Maintenance.
A.3.12.1 SHORT TERM SHUTDOWN

The system is always expected to operate in On, with all components in
Auto. Do not leave the system unattended, if any component without an
online spare is not in Auto.
System shutdown procedures include the following steps:
1. Chemical clean the system component(s) to be shutdown.
2. Switch the train(s) to OFF.
3. Shutdown the plant.

August, 2011 A-59
Before the system is returned to service, it must be cleaned. The period

of time that the system has been shutdown will dictate the type of
cleaning required; short shutdown periods (less than a week) require a
less vigorous cleaning then shutdown periods lasting longer than a
week.
Alternatively, for long-term storage, the components can be removed

from the system and preserved in glycerine.
A.3.12.2 LONG TERM MEMBRANE SHUTDOWN

Following are the steps by the operator:
1. Perform a Recovery Clean. For Recovery Clean instructions, refer

to A.7 - Preventive Maintenance.
2. Ensure that the membranes are free of solids.
3. Prepare a solution of 50 wt% glycerin.
The preservative solution is extremely slippery on surfaces and

extreme care should be exercised when handling the solution. To
minimize the risk of staff injury from slipping, clean up spills
immediately.
The following is an example calculation for preparing 1000 liters of

the preservative solution. The specific gravity of 100% glycerine is
1.26. For 1000 liters of preservative solution: Add 396 liters of 100%
glycerine. Fill the tank to the 1000 liter mark. (Approximately 600
liters).

A-60 August, 2011
4. Use one of the following procedures to impregnate the modules:
Option I for ZeeWeed 500D:
a. ZeeWeed 500D modules in a horizontal tank:
i. Soak the module in the above solution and apply 0.34 bar
vacuum (0.66 bar absolute) for 30 minutes.
ii. Take the module out of the solution and place it on the
floor for 30 minutes to allow excess solution to drain off.
iii. Bag and seal the module immediately as described in

step 5.
b. Single module vertical in stand:
i. Plug the bottom permeate port and pour 3 liters (0.8

gallons) of mixture prepared in Step 3 into the top port.
ii. Bag and seal the module immediately, as described in

step 5.
Option II for ZeeWeed 500D:
a. ZeeWeed 500D cassettes:
i. With the cassette immersed in water, ensure that the

lumen is full of water by operating under vacuum
(permeation).
ii. Close permeate isolation valves and then remove

cassette from water. Do not allow air to enter the
permeate side of the module.
iii. Connect a reservoir of preservative solution (as prepared

in Step 3) to the permeate piping and keep the reservoir at
least 60 cm (24”) above the top of the cassette.

August, 2011 A-61
iv. Open the permeate isolation valves; the level in the

reservoir should fall as the holdup water volume reverse
permeates and preservative enters the module.
v. Continue reverse permeation until a volume of

preservative equivalent to 3 liters (0.8 gal) is reverse
permeated through each module in the cassette (a 64
module cassette requires 192 liters (51 gal) of preservative
solution).
5. Bag the module using a 0.15 mm (6 mil) thick plastic bag. These
bags are available from GE W&PT. Seal the membranes in the
plastic bag, using either a hand held sealer or tape, so that they
will remain preserved and will not dry out. For the tape seal,
remove as much air as possible from the bag. Seal most of the
membrane bag with tape, then remove the excess air with a shop
vacuum.
6. Store in a cool, dry area, out of the direct sunlight and protected
from accidental contact that could damage the module or bag. It
is recommended that the membranes be double bagged or
enclosed in suitable cardboard cartons.
The membranes are now properly preserved, and the system can be
shut down.
To shut down the ZeeWeed system:
1. Set the system to Off.
2. Set all equipment to Off.
3. Close all automatic valves.
The ZeeWeed train is now shut down.
4. To allow drainage, open the appropriate lines on the permeate

pumps and associated piping runs. The permeate header and all
dedicated pipelines to the out-of-service train should be drained,
flushed, and dried.

A-62 August, 2011
5. Close the isolation valves on the permeate header.
6. Leave the cassette isolation valves on the air headers open, and
the header outlets capped with camlock caps.
7. Remove and store the membrane tank level transmitter from the
membrane tank.
8. Follow the normal maintenance schedule for all equipment,

specifically all pumps and blowers.
Contact the Service Department at (905) 465-3030 for any additional

technical assistance with the handling and storage of the membranes.

August, 2011 A-63
This page has been
A.4
MEMBRANE CARE
This page has been
A.4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section outlines the various maintenance procedures required to
ensure optimal membrane performance and lifespan, including
information related to membrane fouling, handling, inspection, and
repair.
A.4.2 MEMBRANE FOULING

The following section provides information on membrane fouling, types
of foulants, and the processes used to remove them.
A.4.2.1 EFFECTS OF FOULING

The term “fouling” refers to the accumulation of unwanted deposits on a
membrane surface.
Membranes form a physical barrier between water and the impurities it

carries. During filtration, permeate is drawn under pressure across the
membrane, leaving impurities on the outside of the fiber. This gradual
accumulation creates an increased resistance to permeation, which in
turn increases the amount of transmembrane pressure (TMP) required
during operation.
Membrane fouling can have the following negative effects:
• Increased TMP in order to maintain normal permeate production.
• Increased energy requirement for normal operation.
• Reduced overall membrane efficiency.
• Reduced membrane lifespan.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Membrane Care

August, 2011 A-67
A.4.2.2 FOULANT TYPES

Foulants include any materials that accumulate on the surface of a
membrane fiber and decrease membrane performance. Foulants are
divided into the following four groups:
BIOLOGICAL: Aerobic and anaerobic living materials, such as bacteria,

fungus, and algae. These organisms colonize on the surface of the
membrane, blocking flow through the pores.
PRECIPITATIVE: Precipitative foulants, often caused by high pH levels and

extremely hard feedwater, usually appear in the form of scale. Scale
develops when compounds in feedwater are concentrated beyond their
solubility. Common precipitative foulants include calcium carbonate and
magnesium sulfate. This type of fouling is rare in ZeeWeed systems.
ADSORPTIVE: Adsorptive foulants include compounds that stick to the

surface of the membrane, such as oil, polymers, cationic surfactants,
and hydrocarbons.
SOLIDS ACCUMULATION: In subsystems used to treat feedwater containing

a high level of solids, it is possible for solids to accumulate between the
membrane fibers. At best, this type of fouling causes an increased TMP
requirement. At worst, it will permanently damage membrane fibers.
Adequate aeration and proper prescreening measures are the best
methods for preventing this type of fouling.
Figure A.4.1 - Solids Accumulation Between Fibers
ZeeWeed 500D - Membrane Care Rev. 0

A-68 August, 2011
A.4.2.3 PREVENTING FOULING

TIP: The procedures The three most common methods for preventing membrane fouling are
and associated Backpulses, Maintenance Cleans, and Recovery Cleans. Depending on
chemicals used may
vary depending on the type of fouling, Maintenance Cleans and Recovery Cleans are
system configuration. performed with either an alkaline (removes organic foulants) or acid
(removes precipitative foulants) chemical solution. For more information
on cleaning frequencies and procedures, refer to A.5 - Cleaning &
Ventilation.
A.4.2.4 REMOVING FOULANTS

The procedure used to remove fouling depends upon the type of foulant.
BIOLOGICAL: Exposure to a solution containing sodium hypochlorite will

remove most biological foulants. Because it is easier to remove early
biological growth, rather than established colonies, it is recommended
that a schedule of frequent cleaning sessions with a low-strength
sodium hypochlorite solution be established in place of infrequent
cleaning sessions with a high-strength solution. For additional
information regarding solution measurements, contact GE W&PT.
PRECIPITATIVE: Membranes fouled with precipitative scale are cleaned

using a citric acid solution. However, the best method of reducing
precipitative fouling is to prevent it from occurring by lowering the
concentration of precipitative foulants entering the membrane tanks.
Adding a lime water-softener and adjusting the feedwater pH level are
common ways of controlling precipitative fouling.
ADSORPTIVE: Adsorptive fouling is extremely difficult to reverse, making it

critical that oils, polymers, hydrocarbons, and other foulants of this type
be removed from feedwater before it encounters the membranes. For
more information about preventing adsorptive fouling, or if considering
the use of polymers or surfactants, contact GE W&PT.
SOLIDS ACCUMULATION: Because proper aeration is the most effective

method of preventing solids accumulation, it is important that the
aeration pattern in the membrane tank be inspected on a routine basis.

August, 2011 A-69
A.4.3 FIBER SLACK & SHRINKAGE

The amount of distance that separates the two headers in a membrane
module can be adjusted in order to meet the specific operating
requirements of each system. Although some adjustment may be
required due to unique feedwater characteristics, ZeeWeed membrane
modules are manufactured with an inherent amount of fiber slack (that
is, the length of the membrane fibers is greater than the actual distance
between the two headers).
Allowing the proper amount of fiber slack between the headers ensures
that the fibers move freely during operation, which improves the effects
of air scouring. Additionally, it is common for membranes to shrink
slightly during operation, and permitting the proper amount of slack will
accommodate this reduction in fiber length.
Figure A.4.2 - Correct (Left) & Incorrect (Right) Slack for ZeeWeed 500D
A.4.3.1 FACTORS WHICH CAUSE FIBER SHRINKAGE

Shrinkage is a physical change that can be expected in any product
composed of synthetic polymers, and is not the result of a defective or
damaged product. Shrinkage can cause damage, however, if the initial
amount of fiber slack is not sufficient enough to accommodate the
reduction in fiber length.

A-70 August, 2011
The optimal amount of fiber slack is a function of operating temperature,

chlorine concentration, and time, and is thus specific to each system.
Significant changes in fiber slack are generally observed in systems with
higher operating temperatures, or where modules are exposed to
certain solvents sometimes found in industrial wastewater applications.
The expected rate of fiber shrinkage is also system-specific. As a general

rule, however, high feedwater temperatures will result in higher rates if
fiber shrinkage.
For example, a system operating at 35ºC (95ºF) will typically exhibit more
fiber shrinkage than a system operating at 30ºC (86ºF) over the same
period of time. Systems operating at temperatures below 25ºC (77ºF) are
not expected to exhibit significant fiber shrinkage, and the need for slack
adjustment is unlikely.
A.4.3.2 RESULTS OF FIBER SHRINKAGE & INSUFFICIENT

SLACK
If the fibers shrink during operation, the predetermined slack will
disappear. A module with insufficient slack (“taut fibers”) may not
perform at top efficiency because the random motion of the fibers
during aeration is critical to efficient filtration.
It is important for operators to monitor the amount of slack in each

module, even with systems operating below 25ºC (77ºF). Any module
found to exhibit an insufficient amount of slack should be adjusted
immediately.
Allowing modules to operate with insufficient slack for an extended

period of time may cause irreversible damage to the membranes.
Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals provides a general guide

as to how often fiber slack should be inspected, based upon the system’s
operating temperature. Photographs of the broad side of the cassette
should be taken during each inspection in order to track gradual
changes over time.

August, 2011 A-71
If it appears that the slack requires adjustment, it is strongly

recommended that these photographs and any other recorded
observations be forwarded to GE W&PT for review and examination
before the adjustment procedure is performed.
Table A.4.1 - Recommended Inspection Intervals

Recommended Monitoring Inspection
Maximum Operating Temperature
Frequency
0 - 24ºC (32 - 76ºF) Every two years
25 - 30ºC (77 - 86ºF) Once per year
Above 30ºC (86ºF) Twice per year
Failure to identify and promptly address insufficient fiber slack may

result in damage to the system. In extreme cases, failure to act may
contribute to premature module failures, which are not covered
under the warranty.
A.4.3.3 ADJUSTING FIBER SLACK

After consulting with GE W&PT, if it has been determined that the
amount of fiber slack must be adjusted, perform the procedure as
outlined in the following sections.
A.4.3.3.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE CASSETTE FOR SLACK ADJUSTMENT

The following information must be read by the operators (minimum of
two personnel required) performing the slack adjustment, and must be
adhered to throughout the procedure.
This procedure requires that the cassette be out of the membrane tank
for an extended period of time. Allowing the membranes to dry-out
during this time will cause irreparable damage, and must be avoided by
re-wetting the membranes with a low-pressure stream of water at least
once every 30 minutes. Systems located in arid environments with low
humidity may require more frequent spraying.

A-72 August, 2011
To ensure that the water pressure in the hose is not excessive, confirm
that the stream does not extend more than 1 m (3 ft) when the hose is
held at a height of 1 m (3 ft) (Figure A.4.3 - Water Pressure Test). If the
stream contacts the ground within 1 m (3 ft) of the hose, the pressure is
suitable for spraying the membranes.
Figure A.4.3 - Water Pressure Test
When removing the cassette from the membrane tank, ensure that the
following information is adhered to:
Use extreme caution when removing a cassette that has been in

service, as accumulated solids may increase the cassette’s weight
beyond that for which the hoist has been rated.
• to reduce the amount of solids accumulation, aerate the cassette

without permeation before removing it from the membrane tank.
Depending on system-specific conditions, more extensive
cleaning using a chemical solution may be required.
• Before connecting the hoist to the cassette, verify the rated

capacity of all related components (example: brackets, crane,
cassette lifting frame).
• Use a weight-scale when lifting the cassette in order to ensure

that the total load is within the hoist’s capacity.
• As the cassette is being lifted, use a low-pressure hose to gently

rinse any remaining solids from the fibers and cassette frame
(Figure A.4.3 - Water Pressure Test).
• Ensure that the cassette remains level as it is lifted, and inspect

the aeration assembly for accumulated solids.

August, 2011 A-73
A.4.3.3.2 TOOLS/PARTS REQUIRED

• Large Flat Head Screw Driver (SS or Plated)
• Small Flat Head Screw Driver (SS or Plated)
• Torque Wrench: 25-250 Inch lbs. or 3.6-29 Nm
• 3/8 in. or 1/2 in. Ratchet (same size as torque wrench)
• 17mm socket
• 17mm open wrench
• Rubber Mallet
• Pry Bar (Stainless Steel or Plated)
• Coarse File
• Qty 28 Nordlocks M10 (Replacement)
• White Knight Food Grade Anti-Seize
• Module Removal Tool
• Full Face Mask
• Protective clothing including boots and gloves
• 5mm Allen Key Socket
• 13/32 in. drill bit
• Drill
• Qty 6 - M10 x 250 mm Jack Bolts
A.4.3.3.3 DEFINITIONS AND NOTES

During a slack adjustment procedure, remember the following
information:

A-74 August, 2011
• The front of the cassette is defined as follows: when facing the

front of the cassette, the 3 in. Aeration pipes are located on the
left side of the cassette
• Apply food grade anti-seize to all bolts (for example: White Knight
Anti-Seize)
• Replace all Nordlocks with new
• Ensure the use of stainless steel or plated tools only
• Review the latest ZeeWeed 500D Module Inspection Checklist for

items to be inspected while cassette/modules are out of the
water.
The ZeeWeed 500D Cassette has four adjustable positions:
1. Position #1: Standard from the Manufacturing Assembly Plant
2. Position #2 Adjustment raises the modules 8mm from position #1
3. Position #3 Adjustment raises the modules 16mm from position

#1
4. Position #4 Adjustment raises the modules 24mm from position

#1 (See Figure A.4.4 - Center Beam)
Figure A.4.4 - Center Beam

August, 2011 A-75
A.4.3.3.4 SLACK ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE - PRELIMINARY STEPS

1. With a 5 mm allen key or a hex wrench, loosen all top and bottom
key side outer support expanders (see Figure A.4.5 - Loosen
Support Expanders). Use care not to gall hardware. Use caution
that no contact is made with the fibers
Figure A.4.5 - Loosen Support Expanders
2. Unlock the module key (top and bottom) prior to continuing with
this procedure. The module is in the unlocked position when the
lock is horizontal (see Figure A.4.6 - Locked and Unlocked Module).
Do not force the lock into position.
Figure A.4.6 - Locked and Unlocked Module

A-76 August, 2011
3. Remove the aeration tubes by carefully sliding them out of the

bottom front of the cassette (see Figure A.4.7 - Remove the
Aeration Tubes).
Be aware that tubes must be placed back into their original position
in the cassette.
Figure A.4.7 - Remove the Aeration Tubes

August, 2011 A-77
A.4.3.3.5 ADJUSTMENT FOR THE FRONT/BACK BEAMS

1. On the front side only (top and bottom), slide all of the modules
out of the cassette, approximately 2-3 in. from the permeate
manifolds (see Figure A.4.8 - Module Slid Out of Cassette).
Figure A.4.8 - Module Slid Out of Cassette
2. To gain access to the front bottom beam bolts, remove modules

from the following positions within the cassette - # 2, # 9, # 16, #
23, (left to right) (see Figure A.4.9 - Modules Removed From These
Positions).

A-78 August, 2011
Figure A.4.9 - Modules Removed From These Positions
3. Remove the bolts from positions # 9, # 16, and # 23. Loosen but
do not remove the bolt in position # 2. This bolt will keep the Front
Bottom Adjustable Beam aligned with the holes (see Figure A.4.10
- Removing the Bolts).
Figure A.4.10 - Removing the Bolts

August, 2011 A-79
4. Pry the end of the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam where the bolts
have been removed (see Figure A.4.11 - Front Adjustable Bottom
Beam).
Use stainless steel or plated tools only.
Figure A.4.11 - Front Adjustable Bottom Beam
5. To achieve acceptable slack, adjust the Front Adjustable Bottom

Beam to the desired height (see Figure A.4.12 - Adjusting the Front
Adjustable Bottom Beam).
6. Install one bolt in position # 23 (loose). Ensure bolts are installed

properly; bolt threads towards the outside of the cassette.

A-80 August, 2011
7. Remove bolt from position #2 and repeat steps 4 to 6.
Figure A.4.12 - Adjusting the Front Adjustable Bottom Beam
8. Install bolts in positions # 9 and # 16. If required, use a

screwdriver to align the holes (see Figure A.4.13 - Align the Holes).
Figure A.4.13 - Align the Holes

August, 2011 A-81
A.4.3.3.6 ADJUSTMENT FOR THE CENTER BEAM

1. Slide all the modules to the STOP position of the top Header (see
Figure A.4.14 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position).
Figure A.4.14 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position
2. Tighten all 4 bolts as per drawing specification (247 inch pounds).

Re-install the modules that had been removed (see Figure A.4.15
- Tighten the Bolts).
Do not slide any of the modules back into the permeate saddles.
3. Repeat the procedure for the back beam of the cassette.

A-82 August, 2011
Number the modules left to right.
Figure A.4.15 - Tighten the Bolts
4. Referencing Figure A.4.4 - Center Beam, remove one of the Slack

Adjustment Clips from the bottom per position change (see Figure
A.4.16 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip).
Figure A.4.16 - Remove the Slack Adjustment Clip

August, 2011 A-83
5. Install Qty 6 - M10 x 250 mm bolts into the existing threaded

jacking bolt holes found on either end and center of the centre
beam (see Figure A.4.17 - Insert Jacking Bolts).
a. If required, file the adjacent saddle to allow insertion of the

bolt at either end of the beam.
Figure A.4.17 - Insert Jacking Bolts

A-84 August, 2011
b. If required, drill out in between the saddles to allow enough

space for the centre jack bolt to be inserted (see Figure A.4.18
- Drill Out Saddle).
Figure A.4.18 - Drill Out Saddle
6. Before proceeding, use a low pressure hose to flush away any

debris left from the filing or drilling of the saddles (see Figure
A.4.19 - Flush Away Debris).
Figure A.4.19 - Flush Away Debris

August, 2011 A-85
7. Remove the bolts located at the middle of the centre beam. Note
there is one bolt on either side of the beam (see Figure A.4.20 -
Remove Center Beam Bolts).
.
Figure A.4.20 - Remove Center Beam Bolts
8. Adjust the center beam by removing the bolts from each side of
the centre beam at both ends of the beam - four bolts in total.
Retain all hardware for replacement (see Figure A.4.21 - Adjust
the Center Beam).
.
Figure A.4.21 - Adjust the Center Beam

A-86 August, 2011
9. Use the jacking bolts to lift the centre beam to the desired height,
referencing Figure A.4.4 - Center Beam.
10. Once all four bolts have been installed at the ends, align the
appropriate middle bolt hole on each side of the middle of the
centre beam (see Figure A.4.22 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole).
Figure A.4.22 - Align the Middle Bolt Hole
11. Install and tighten the six center beam bolts as per torque
specification 247 inch lbs (see Figure A.4.23 - Torque the Bolts).
12. Reinstall modules and lock into position. Reinstall aeration tubes
in their original positions.

August, 2011 A-87
The installation of a 500D module must be completed with two

people. The bottom module header must not swing freely when the
top header is slid into place. If the bottom header is not controlled
during installation, it can swing into the centre of the cassette and
impact the bottom permeate collectors. Damage from this impact
will result in the need for module replacement.
Figure A.4.23 - Torque the Bolts

A-88 August, 2011
13. Tighten all top and bottom key side outer support expanders
using a 5 mm Allen Key or a hex wrench. The expander is fully
engaged when flush with the bottom surface of the key side
outer assembly. Max tightening torque not to exceed 5.0 Nm (3.6
FT-LBS, 44 IN-LBS) (see Figure A.4.24 - Tighten Support
Expanders).
.
Figure A.4.24 - Tighten Support Expanders
14. Indicate on the membrane map the date of the slack adjustment
and the amount of slack adjusted. List the bolt positions used.
A.4.4 MODULE REMOVAL FROM A CASSETTE

this procedure.
Completely read and understand this procedure before attempting to

remove modules.

August, 2011 A-89
A.4.4.1 MANPOWER AND TIME REQUIREMENT

The removal of a single module should take a few minutes once the
cassette is removed from the tank. Always use two people when
extracting a cassette or module.
Figure A.4.25 - Module Removal Tool
A.4.4.1.1 TOOL PREPARATION - REMOVAL
The removal tool is orientated differently when removing from the

top and bottom of the module. To adjust the pin location, remove the
cotter pin, change the face position and reinsert the cotter pin.
Table A.4.2 - Pin Location and Function

Pin Location Function
1 Installation assistance - top header
2 Future use
3 Future use
4 Removal, installation assistance - bottom
header

A-90 August, 2011
The module removal tool is supplied with a standard faceplate. Use a

repair adaptor faceplate (optional) when removing/installing modules
that have been repaired using the repair adapter (see Figure A.4.28 -
Faceplate).
Figure A.4.26 - Pin Removal From The Top
Figure A.4.27 - Pin Removal From The Bottom

August, 2011 A-91
Figure A.4.28 - Faceplate
Figure A.4.29 - Standard and Repaired Header (Repair Adapter)
A.4.4.2 TOOL PREPARATION – INSTALLATION
This tool should not be used on Drinking Water (DW) or Tertiary

Treatment (TT) designated cassettes.

A-92 August, 2011
In all instances, attempt to install the module by hand. Only use the tool
for assistance, if required.
Figure A.4.30 - Installation Assistance From The Top
Figure A.4.31 - Installation Assistance From The Bottom

August, 2011 A-93
A.4.4.2.1 TOOLS REQUIRED

• 500D module removal tool
• Gloves
Figure A.4.32 - Prohibited Removal Tools
Do not use any other tools to remove or install the 500D module.
Part # 1032836 replaces all previous versions of the 500D Removal Tool.
A.4.4.2.2 MODULE REMOVAL

1. Check that all retaining components of the cassette have been
removed or slacked so the module is no longer restrained in the
cassette.
2. Clamp the teeth of the Insert/Removal tool to the cavities on the

membrane fiber side of the module header face.

A-94 August, 2011
3. If the cavities are filled with material clean them out so the Insert/
Removal tool will mate properly.
Figure A.4.33 - Attach the Removal Tool
4. Mate the Insert/Removal tool to the face of the module (see

Figure A.4.34 - Module Removal).
Be sure to keep tool flush against module face while locking into
position.
Figure A.4.34 - Module Removal

August, 2011 A-95
5. Turn the circular rotating ring counter clockwise to lock the

insert/removal tool to the module by engaging the locking tabs.
A light spray lubricant can be used on the locating ring if
operation becomes difficult (see Figure A.4.35 - Turn Rotating
Ring).
Hand manipulate the rotating ring. Do not use tools to gain leverage.
Breaking of the locking tabs could result if tools are applied to the
rotating ring.
Figure A.4.35 - Turn Rotating Ring

A-96 August, 2011
6. When the Insert/Removal tool is securely locked onto the module

face plate, pull the handle away from the module fibers. Do not
pinch any fibers. This will disengage the module spigot from the
permeate collector.
Figure A.4.36 - Module Removal Handle
7. Move the handle in a long single stroke. Do not use a short

vigorous pumping action to remove modules. Do not to apply
excessive force to remove a module.
8. Pull out the module approximately 10 in. (25.4 cm).
Repeat the procedures for the opposite header.
The removal tool is not designed to fully remove the module from the
cassette. Remove the tool prior to hand removing the module.
Use a gentle hand – do not use force on module.

August, 2011 A-97
A.4.5 INSTALLATION OF MODULES INTO THE

CASSETTE FRAME

this procedure.
The membrane cassettes are shipped with the modules installed. This
procedure is provided for membrane repair. See A.4.6 Repairing Fibers
for the fiber repair procedure. To remove modules from a cassette see
A.4.4 Module Removal from a Cassette.
A.4.5.1 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

The typical installation of a 500D module requires the use of 2 people at
all times to prevent damage to the module.
Figure A.4.37 - ZeeWeed 500D Cassette

A-98 August, 2011
A.4.5.2 TOOLS REQUIRED

• Flash Light (Optional)
• 500D Module MARS Removal Tool
• O-Ring lubricant (i.e. Lubri-gel)
• Step Ladder
A.4.5.3 CHECKING FOR SLACK ADJUSTMENT

Prior to installing the new module, visually inspect the cassette and refer
to A.4.3 Fiber Slack & Shrinkage to determine if the cassette should be
adjusted for slack.
A.4.5.4 UNPACKING THE MODULE

Each module is packaged in a sealed bag in a box. Using 2 people,
remove the module from the box, and lay it out flat on a clean table or
work surface larger than the fully extended module. Through the clear
bag, inspect the module to ensure that no damage was incurred during
shipping. Check that all O-rings are present. If an O-ring is missing, do
not open bag until a spare O-ring is located. Carefully cut completely
across the one end of the bag. Do not cut towards yourself or the fibers.
With one person holding the header, the second person should pull on
the bottom of the bag sliding the bag off of the module.
Be mindful of the module and membrane at all times when working

around the cassettes. Do not allow clothing, body parts, tools,
materials, jewelry etc. to scrape or touch the membrane. Do not allow
the module headers to bump up against the cassette frame or other
modules. Ensure the module is not allowed to dry out.

August, 2011 A-99
A.4.5.5 INSTALLING THE MODULE
A.4.5.5.1 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION AND SET UP

Once the module is unpacked, the permeate spigots will be exposed.
1. Inspect the spigot for any cracks or damage.
2. Confirm the black EPDM #118 ‘s are present, intact and in proper
placement on the permeate spigot. O-rings must not be twisted,
cracked, or worn. Apply a water-soluble lubricant (such as Lubri-
gel or KY Jelly) to the O-rings (see Figure A.4.38 - Correct Position
of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot).
3. When reinstalling a used module that was removed for

inspection, hose down the module to remove any obvious solids
and debris. Pay particular attention to the rail support guide on
the top of the header.
Figure A.4.38 - Correct Position of the O-rings on the Permeate Spigot
A.4.5.5.2 INSTALLING THE TOP HEADER
Quality testing has shown that the majority of module failures can be
attributed to incorrect module installation. It is very important that
the following instructions are followed to prevent damage. Under no
circumstances should excessive force be used on the module to aid in
insertion or removal from the cassette.

A-100 August, 2011
Each module has one square-end header and one round-end header.
Modules are installed alternating square and round ends up.
Figure A.4.39 - Module Header
For a wastewater application with ZeeWeed 500D-48 cassettes, the

module at the extreme right hand side (when viewed with the 3” aeration
pipes on the left) will have the square-end header at the top and round
end at the bottom. The second module will have the round-end at the
top and square end at the bottom. Subsequent modules will alternate
square and round ends. Install the modules according to the pattern
above.
Figure A.4.40 - Cassette

August, 2011 A-101
Support the headers at all times. Do not allow the module headers to
bump up against the cassette frame or other modules.
Figure A.4.41 - Handling the Module
Check that the desired end (round or square) is at the top. Use 2 people
to lift the module. Be careful not to let the fibers or the bottom header
contact the ground. While one person climbs the ladder to install the top
header, the second person must support the bottom header at all times.
The installation of a 500D module must be completed with two

people. The bottom module header must not swing freely when the
top header is slid into place. If the bottom header is not controlled
during installation, it can swing into the centre of the cassette and
impact the bottom permeate collectors. Damage from this impact
will result in module replacement.

A-102 August, 2011
1. To insert the module into the cassette, align the rail on the top of
the module with the cassette.
Figure A.4.42 - Aligning the Rail on the Module with the Cassette Frame
2. If space allows, wipe any visible debris from the rail and apply
lubri-gel to both the rail and rail support guides on the top of the
header to allow a smooth insertion.
Under no circumstances should excessive force be used to insert the

module. Avoid the use of a hammer or any blunt force object.
3. With one person supporting the top and another person

supporting the bottom header of the module, slide the top header
in until it is about 10 in. (250 mm) from being completely installed.

August, 2011 A-103
A.4.5.5.3 INSTALLING THE BOTTOM HEADER

If necessary, use a flash light to illuminate the bottom permeate port. If
space allows, turn the bottom header sideways to reduce some of the
slack.
Figure A.4.43 - Turning the Bottom Header Sideways During Installation
1. Line up the bottom header spigot with the permeate connection

on the cassette. Use care that the spigot does not impact the
permeate collector.
2. Once alignment is confirmed, use gentle but firm pressure to

push the bottom header towards the centre of the cassette.

A-104 August, 2011
3. Confirm the O-ring seal on the module is correctly made with the
bottom permeate collector.
Figure A.4.44 - Inserting the Bottom Header
4. With the spigot properly seated, slightly and gently lift the header
- do not put stress on the spigot connection – and slip the
locating nipples on the front of the header into the holes on the
cassette frame.
Figure A.4.45 - Locating Nipples

August, 2011 A-105
A.4.5.5.4 COMPLETING THE MODULE INSTALLATION

1. After the bottom header is successfully connected, connect the
top header.
2. If space allows, wipe any visible debris from the rail and apply
lubri-gel to both the rail and rail support guides on the top of the
header to allow a smooth insertion.
Under no circumstances should excessive force be used to insert the

module. Avoid hammering or using a blunt force object. Avoid using
force in the area above the GE Water logo.
3. Once the module is in place, it must be locked in position at the

top and bottom. The module is in the locked position when the
locking key is vertical. A “click” will be felt when the locking key is
in proper position. Do not force the locking key into position.
Figure A.4.46 - Lock Position
If a module does not easily slide into the cassette, visually check for the
following:
• Permeate adaptor inserts seated properly. If not, reseat the

inserts.
• Extra plastic on the module header or urethane potting material

over flowing header. To remove extra plastic, use a coarse file,
and then a fine file. Carefully file off any extra material which may
be interfering with the insertion of the module into the saddle.

A-106 August, 2011
A.4.5.5.5 TIGHTENING THE EXPANDERS

1. Tighten all top and bottom key side outer support expanders
using a 5 mm Allen Key or a hex wrench.
Figure A.4.47 - Tightening Expanders
Use caution that no contact is made with the fibres.
Expander is fully engaged when flush with the bottom surface of the key
side outer assembly. Max tightening torque not to exceed 5.0 Nm (3.6 FT-
LBS, 44 IN-LBS).
A.4.5.6 FINAL CHECKS

Perform a final check on the cassette and confirm:
• All spigots are seated properly
• All modules keys are in the locked positions
• All hardware is secure and torqued to the proper specifications

(see General Arrangement Drawings).
Once the module(s) have been installed and final check has been
completed, it may be necessary to carry out a glycerin flush and
sanitization procedure.

August, 2011 A-107
A.4.5.7 RETURNING DAMAGED MEMBRANES

Before returning membranes to GE W&PT, it is imperative that they be
properly cleaned, preserved, and that a “Returned Goods Authorization”
(RGA) number be obtained prior to shipping it. Contact GE W&PT
Technical Support for information on the RGA procedure.
A.4.6 REPAIRING FIBERS

TIP: GE W&PT’s The procedure used to repair a damaged fiber will vary depending on the
optional type of damage and the location along the fiber where it has occurred.
DispensGun® silicone
delivery tool can be The following sections outline the two primary repair techniques.
used in place of a
syringe during the
following procedures.
Do not separate strands that are glued together at the header, as this
will cause damage to the membranes.
A.4.6.1 AXIAL SILICONE INJECTION

For leaks detected at the end of the membrane fiber, or for fibers that
have been cut badly or completely severed, perform an axial-injection
repair by completing the following steps:

A-108 August, 2011
1. Remove the membrane module from the membrane tank and

cut off the damaged portion 20 mm (3/4 in.) from the potting
material on the ZeeWeed header.
1. Membrane module header 3. (20 mm gap) cut position for fiber

bundle
2. (20 mm gap) cut position for single fiber 4. Drawn potting material
Figure A.4.48 - Membrane Fiber Cut Positions
2. Using a hypodermic syringe filled with silicone sealant (available

from GE W&PT as a “membrane repair kit”, Baan # 1022887),
insert the tip of the needle 10 mm (7/16 in.) into the centre of the
membrane lumen.
1. Header 3. Food-grade silicone sealant
2. Syringe 4. Cut lumen

Figure A.4.49 - Axial Silicone Injection (One of Four)

August, 2011 A-109
3. Apply light pressure when injecting the silicone. Fill the lumen
back to the header, as indicated by the darkened zone in Figure
A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection (Two of Four). Filling typically takes
15 - 45 seconds.
1. Darkened (filled) zone

Figure A.4.50 - Axial Silicone Injection (Two of Four)
4. Slowly withdraw the needle while still injecting silicone to assure

the lumen is completely filled.
Figure A.4.51 - Axial Silicone Injection (Three of Four)

A-110 August, 2011
5. While still applying pressure to the syringe, use the tip of the
needle to spread silicone over the cut end of the lumen.
Figure A.4.52 - Axial Silicone Injection (Four of Four)
After the repair is complete, place the cassette back into the membrane
tank. Allow 10 minutes for curing before performing further membrane
testing.

August, 2011 A-111
A.4.6.2 SUBJACENT SILICONE INJECTION

For leaks detected along the middle of the membrane fiber, perform a
subjacent-injection repair by completing the following steps:
1. Remove the membrane module from the membrane tank.
A metal barrier (example: steel ruler) should be used to protect the

hand holding the fiber.
2. Using a hypodermic syringe filled with silicone sealant (available

from GE W&PT as a “membrane repair kit”, Baan # 1022887),
insert the tip of the needle into the lumen. When inserting, hold
the syringe at an angle of 5 - 10º to the lumen and insert the tip
5 - 10 mm (3/16 - 7/16 in.) from the leak. Ensure that the needle
does not pass through the lumen completely, but only into the
hollow centre.
1. Support lumen with fingers placed away from injection point
2. Steel ruler or other protective barrier

Figure A.4.53 - Subjacent Silicone Injection (One of Two)
3. Apply light pressure to fill the lumen with silicone. Continue

applying pressure while withdrawing the needle from the lumen,
ensuring the puncture is sealed.

A-112 August, 2011
4. Repeat these steps on the other side of the leak, positioning the
needle 5 - 10 mm (3/16 - 7/16 in.) from the leak on the opposite
side to the first injection point.
1. Leak
2. Injected silicone
Figure A.4.54 - Subjacent Silicone Injection (Two of Two)
After the repair is complete, place the cassette back into the membrane
tank. Allow 10 minutes for curing before performing further membrane
testing.

August, 2011 A-113
This page has been
A.5
CLEANING & VENTILATION
This page has been
A.5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding the various procedures and
chemicals used to clean and maintain the membranes.
Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for information specific to

individual components mentioned below.
A.5.2 CLEANING CHEMICALS
Allowing alkaline and acid solutions to mix may create deadly

chlorine gas, posing a severe safety hazard to all personnel within the
facility. Under no circumstances should these solutions be permitted
to come into contact with one another.
TIP: For more severe The type of cleaning chemical required depends on the type of fouling
fouling, GE W&PT that needs to be cleaned. An alkaline solution is used to remove
offers additional
cleaning chemicals biological fouling, while an acid solution is used for precipitative fouling
designed specifically caused by accumulated mineral scales, iron, or other metals.
for use with ZeeWeed
membranes. Contact
GE W&PT for more
information.
Failure to observe all safety precautions outlined in the applicable

MSDSs while handling cleaning chemicals may result in injury.
These chemicals are used during the Maintenance and Recovery Clean
procedures outlined in this section. Safety and handling instructions for
all chemicals which GE W&PT has supplied can be found in the
applicable MSDSs provided in Section 6 - Material Safety Data Sheets.
Use of unapproved chemicals during a cleaning procedure will void

the membrane warranty.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Cleaning & Ventilation

August, 2011 A-117
Do not pour chemicals directly onto the membranes.
Contact GE W&PT for more information regarding chemicals that have

been approved for use with ZeeWeed membranes.
Sodium hypochlorite cleaning solution generates a corrosive gas that

poses a safety risk to those nearby. Adequate ventilation must be
provided.
Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary

Design
Chemical Purpose Frequency Design pH
Concentration
Alkaline Maintenance Clean
Sodium Organic 200mg/L* (Full Tank) 2 times/week Maximum
hypochlorite 10.3% Cleaner 10.5
Acid Maintenance Clean

Citric acid 50% Scale 2,000 mg/L* (Full Tank) 1 time/week 2.5 - 3.5
Removal
Alkaline Recovery Clean

Sodium Organic 1,000 mg/L** 2 times/year Maximum
hypochlorite 10.3% Cleaner 10.5 at under
30°C (86ºF),
10 at 30 -
40°C (86 -
104ºF)
Acid Recovery Clean

Citric acid 50% Scale 2,000 mg/L** 2 times/year 2.5 - 3.5
Removal
NOTES:
• * Backpulse concentration
• ** Soak concentration
ZeeWeed 500D - Cleaning & Ventilation Rev. 0

A-118 August, 2011
A.5.3 PREPARING CLEANING CHEMICALS
The sodium hypochlorite cleaning solution should be limited to a

maximum pH of 10.5 at a temperature of less than 30ºC (86ºF), and a
maximum pH of 10 at a temperature between 30 - 40ºC (86 - 104ºF).
Citric acid solubility is 500 g/L at 10ºC (50ºF). GE W&PT does not
recommend increasing the concentration beyond this amount.
Before initiating a chemical clean, read the information provided in A.5.2

Cleaning Chemicals.
Ensure that the chemical solution has been prepared in sufficient

quantity. Use the following calculation to determine the amount of
chemical required per liter of permeate:
% by weight (as
x density = amount (kg) required per liter of permeate
decimal)
EXAMPLE: For a 50% by-weight citric acid solution with a density of 1.24:
0.5 kg x 1.24 kg = 0.62 kg/L
After the cleaning solution has been prepared, ensure that chemical
injection pumps have been set to dose the proper amount of solution
when activated. Refer to Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary for more
information regarding required chemical concentrations.

August, 2011 A-119
A.5.4 FREQUENCY OF CLEANS

TIP: Permeability During normal operation, membranes can become fouled by mineral
drops if feedwater salts (example: calcium carbonate), iron, insoluble organics (example:
temperature
decreases. This oil), and biological matter, all of which can cause a decrease in
decrease is normal membrane permeability. How often membranes require cleaning in
and does not
necessarily indicate order to remove these foulants depends on specific operating
fouling. conditions, including operating time, various flowrates, and feedwater
characteristics.
Refer to Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary for specific cleaning times.
A.5.5 CLEANING LOGSHEET

All information gathered during a clean should be recorded on the
cleaning logsheet (provided separately in electronic format). This
logsheet should be emailed or faxed to GE W&PT so that the
effectiveness of cleaning procedures can be verified.
A.5.6 TYPES OF CLEANS

The following types of cleaning procedures must be performed at
regular intervals in order to maintain normal operating parameters.
When performing a Backpulse, never apply pressure greater than

0.55 bar (8 psig) across the membranes, as doing so may decrease
membrane lifespan.

A-120 August, 2011
BACKPULSE: A Backpulse involves pumping permeate from the backpulse

tank back through the membranes and into the membrane tank. This
process helps to remove fouling that may have accumulated on the
membranes during operation. To maximize membrane efficiency and
lifespan, a Backpulse sequence is initiated automatically at regular
intervals by the PLC, as outlined in A.5.6.1 Backpulse.
RELAX: Relax is an alternative to the Backpulse sequence. If a Backpulse

failure occurs and no pump is available, the PLC places the trains into
RELAX mode, as outlined in A.5.6.2 Relax.
MAINTENANCE CLEAN: Fouling that cannot be removed by performing a

Backpulse must be cleaned using a chemical solution. This process,
known as a Maintenance Clean, involves the use of either an alkaline or
an acid solution to dissolve various types of foulants. For more
information, refer to A.5.6.3 Maintenance Clean.
RECOVERY CLEAN: A Recovery Clean is performed only to remove

substantial amounts of fouling and involves the use of highly
concentrated chemical solutions and extended soak periods. For more
information, refer to A.5.6.4 Recovery Clean.
A.5.6.1 BACKPULSE
Backpulse cleans are initiated automatically during the normal
production cycle according to setpoint values defined by the operator.
Backpulse-related setpoints should be updated periodically to account
for changes in operating conditions and feedwater quality.

August, 2011 A-121
A.5.6.1.1 INITIATING A BACKPULSE

If necessary, a Backpulse can also be initiated manually by selecting the
Enable Backpulse button in the train’s Modes pop-up screen. The
Backpulse will run for the same duration as an automatically initiated
sequence and the Backpulse timer will be reset so that future sequences
occur according to the set frequency. A Backpulse cannot be initiated
manually if the system is in OFF mode, or if another train is currently
undergoing a Backpulse.
When the operator initiates a Backpulse the sequence begins

immediately. The selected train becomes the lead train and the system
adjusts the production cycle time to maintain a staggered Backpulse
schedule.
A.5.6.2 RELAX
When a train is in the RELAX state, the membranes sit inactive (no
permeation) for a duration specified by the operator, after which
production resumes. During this time, aeration disperses foulants that
have concentrated around the membranes.
A train is placed in the RELAX state either manually (operator presses the
Enable Relax button) or automatically (PLC triggers the transition to
RELAX if a Backpulse sequence fails and no pump is available).
A.5.6.3 MAINTENANCE CLEAN

There are two types of chemicals used during a Maintenance Clean.
When performed using an alkaline solution, the Maintenance Clean
removes organic fouling, including bacteria colonies. When performed
using an acid, the Maintenance Clean targets inorganic foulants, such as
scaling.
TIP: Cleans should be The operator must ensure that there are sufficient cleaning chemicals
scheduled during available and must set the day and time when the Maintenance Clean is
periods when system
demand is at its to occur for each train.
lowest.

A-122 August, 2011
Because fouling can consist of a variety of substances, rotating between

alkaline and acid cleans (two separate sequences performed during the
same cleaning session) is recommended. Other chemical cleaners may
also be used if approved by GE W&PT. It is recommended that the
correct chemicals be selected for each site during the initial operating
period.
Maintenance Cleans are scheduled through the HMI and are

automatically initiated by the PLC based on a 24 hour clock. The
operator will be able to schedule one Maintenance Clean per train per
day
A.5.6.3.1 SCHEDULING A MAINTENANCE CLEAN

TIP: Only one train To schedule a Maintenance Clean, perform the following steps:
can undergo a
Maintenance Clean or
Recovery Clean 1. In the Maintenance Clean schedule screen, for days when a clean
sequence at any given is to occur, enter the start and end times, and then select the
time.
Enable button. For days when a Maintenance Clean is not
required, select the Disable button.
2. For each scheduled clean, determine the type of chemical that

will be used by selecting either of the two chemical buttons.
3. In the Maintenance Clean Setpoints pop-up screen, confirm that

all setpoint values are properly defined. The factory default
values and acceptable ranges for these setpoints are listed in the
Controls Logic Chart (CLC).
4. Record all setpoint changes.
A.5.6.3.2 PERFORMING A MAINTENANCE CLEAN
Backpulse tank contents must be kept clean (free of debris or other

contaminants) to avoid causing damage to the membranes during a
Maintenance Clean.

August, 2011 A-123
If necessary, a Maintenance Clean can be initiated manually. Before

doing so, read the information provided in A.5.2 Cleaning Chemicals.
To perform a Maintenance Clean, in the train’s Modes of operation pop-

up screen, select either of the two chemical buttons. A clean using the
selected chemical is initiated and carried out by the PLC. For more
information about the automated steps involved in this sequence, refer
to the OSC provided in Section 4 - Control Documentation.
A.5.6.4 RECOVERY CLEAN

A Recovery Clean should be performed on a regular basis, as well as
whenever Backpulse and Maintenance Clean sequences fail to restore
TMP to the extent required. Refer to Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary for
more information regarding Recovery Clean frequency.
A Recovery Clean is operator-initiated and requires that the operator be

present during the majority of the clean.
A Recovery Clean can be conducted using either an alkaline (removes

organic fouling) or acid (removes inorganic fouling) solution. If two
separate sequences are performed during the same cleaning session,
the acid clean typically follows the alkaline.
A Recovery Clean takes place with the membranes in place. The

complete procedure normally requires approximately 6 - 9 hours per
train, per chemical (12 - 18 hours if both cleaning chemicals are used).
A.5.6.4.1 PREPARING FOR A RECOVERY CLEAN

Recovery Cleans are initiated manually, and so cannot be scheduled
through the PLC. Table A.5.1 - Cleaning Summary shows the
recommended frequency for Recovery Cleans, while the procedure is
outlined in the following section.
Before initiating a clean and while the train is still in PRODUCTION mode,
record the current water temperature, flux, and TMP level.

A-124 August, 2011
A.5.6.4.2 PERFORMING A RECOVERY CLEAN

TIP: As the Recovery After completing the preparations outlined in A.5.3 Preparing Cleaning
Clean procedure Chemicals, perform a Recovery Clean by completing the following steps:
requires that the train
be shut down for a
minimum of 6 hours, it 1. In the train’s Modes of Operation pop-up screen, select the OFF
is recommended that
this process be
button to turn off the train.
conducted during
low-demand periods. 2. Select the type of Recovery Clean to be performed. For a sodium
hypochlorite clean, select the R. CLEAN WITH SODIUM
HYPOCHLORITE button. For a citric acid clean, select the R.
CLEAN WITH CITRIC ACID button.
Allowing alkaline and acid solutions to mix may create deadly

chlorine gas, posing a severe safety hazard to all personnel within the
facility. Under no circumstances should these solutions be permitted
to come into contact with one another.
The Recovery Clean will proceed according to the steps outlined in the
OSC. The default steps are outlined in the Control Narrative.
3. After each drain, flush the membrane tank with a hose.
After the final drain, the PLC advances the clean through various steps
including soaking the membranes in a chemical solution.
Backpulse tank contents must be kept clean (free of debris or other

contaminants) to avoid causing damage to the membranes during a
Recovery Clean.

August, 2011 A-125
A.5.6.5 NEUTRALIZATION
Following a chemical clean, the solution must be neutralized before it
can be sent for disposal. Acid solutions are neutralized through the
addition of sodium hydroxide, whereas sodium bisulfite is required for
chlorine removal following an alkaline clean. Because dechlorination
decreases the pH, the subsequent addition of sodium hydroxide is also
required for complete alkaline neutralization.
The neutralization sequence is semi-automatic and requires the

operator to be present during the process.
The chemical cleaning solution must be dechlorinated and neutralized

as follows:
1. After the soak duration of the Recovery Clean, when prompted at

the HMI, select the NEUTRALIZATION button to proceed to
neutralization.
2. When prompted by the HMI, check the chlorine concentration in

the membrane tank with handheld instruments.
• If the chlorine concentration is below 10 ppm, select the

CONFIRM NEUTRALIZATION button. The PLC advances the
neutralization to the next step.
• If the chlorine concentration is above 10 ppm, select the

RESUME NEUTRALIZATION button. The PLC repeats the soak
step of the neutralization.
3. After the chemical solution is neutralized, select the CONFIRM

NEUTRALIZATION button.
The PLC advances through the remaining neutralization steps. For more
information, refer OSC in Section 4 - Control Documentation.

A-126 August, 2011
A.5.7 VENTILATION
If the subsystem is located indoors, the membrane tank must be
properly ventilated in accordance with all local regulations.

August, 2011 A-127
This page has been
A.6
MONITORING MEMBRANE
INTEGRITY
This page has been
A.6.1 INTRODUCTION
TIP: Data must be This section provides information regarding membrane permeability
normalized before and the procedures used to test and monitor the physical condition and
evaluation. Refer to
A.10 - Calculations. performance of the membranes.
A.6.2 MEMBRANE PERMEABILITY

Membrane permeability is a calculated operating parameter (flux
divided by TMP) and should be measured at the following points:
• Before and after each membrane clean.
• At least once a day before and after a Backpulse.
The effectiveness of each clean can be verified by comparing the

membrane permeability measurements taken before and after the
clean is performed.
The Membrane Performance screen displays flow and TMP values

before, during, and after a Backpulse. Water temperature directly
affects water viscosity. Therefore, membrane permeability values must
be corrected for temperature fluctuation over time in order to provide a
meaningful long-term basis for comparison. Refer to A.10 - Calculations
for more information.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Monitoring Membrane Integrity

August, 2011 A-131
A.6.3 TURBIDIMETERS
Membrane integrity is monitored using a series of train-specific on-line
turbidimeters, each mounted downstream from the associated
permeate pump.
Turbidity is measured in NTUs. The sample flow rate is critical to

obtaining an accurate measurement with a turbidimeter. Ensure that
the flowrate is within the specified range of the instrument.
For more information about operating and maintaining turbidimeters,

refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual.
ZeeWeed 500D - Monitoring Membrane Integrity Rev. 0

A-132 August, 2011
A.7
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
This page has been
A.7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides general information regarding the regular
inspection and maintenance of various subsystem components.
The schedules and procedures provided here are intended as a general

guideline for overall subsystem maintenance, and do not cover the
entire scope of work required in order to keep the subsystem operating
at peak efficiency. Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for detailed
preventive maintenance information regarding specific components
(example: pumps, valves).
Before attempting to inspect or repair a component, read all

manufacturer-supplied information found in Volume I - Vendor Data
Manual and ensure that all instructions are followed.
A.7.2 SCHEDULING PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Table A.7.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule outlines the inspection
and maintenance tasks that must be performed regularly in order to
maintain optimal performance and prevent damage due to wear or
corrosion.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Preventive Maintenance

August, 2011 A-135
Refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for detailed information

regarding the procedures involved in inspecting and maintaining
specific components.
Table A.7.1 - Preventive Maintenance Schedule

D W M Q S A Task
X Complete daily logsheet.
X Measure pH of feedwater, membrane tank, and permeate samples.
X Clean any spills or debris and remove any corrosion from piping or
instruments.
X Confirm all components are fitted securely.
X Check for leaks and excessive condensation.
X Measure permeate Color, TOC/DOC, and total coliform.
X Measure feedwater color, TOC/DOC, and TSS/VSS.
X Check the module interconnecting strip for corrosion.
X Confirm that aeration is normal by inspecting aeration pattern(s).
X Perform separate sodium hypochlorite and citric acid cleans.*
X Where possible, remove fan covers and clean dust from fans and
airways using low-pressure compressed air and/or dry cloth.
X Perform a general inspection on the indicator cassette from each train.
Refer to A.7.3 General Inspection for more information.**
X Back up the PLC processor onto the system's EEPROM memory, and copy
the PLC ladder logic and operator interface design to an external archive.
X Inspect piping for corrosion and repair as needed.
X Inspect the inside of the membrane tank for damage. Repair as needed.
X Drain and inspect the membrane tank.
X Where possible, inspect grounding rods for signs of wear.
X Confirm that all cassettes sit level in membrane tank(s).
Every 2 - 4 years, replace the PLC battery.
Every 5 years, replace the UPS.
NOTES:
• D (daily); W (weekly); M (monthly); Q (quarterly); S (semi-
annually); A (annually).
• * - Monthly initially until optimum interval is established.
• ** - Inspection frequency may vary. Refer to A.7.3.2
Inspection Frequency for more information.
ZeeWeed 500D - Preventive Maintenance Rev. 0

A-136 August, 2011
A.7.3 GENERAL INSPECTION

The following section outlines the general inspection procedure used to
determine the overall state of the subsystem and its various
components, including membranes, modules, and cassettes.
A.7.3.1 GATHERING & RECORDING INFORMATION

Using the Inspection Template (provided separately), record the
following information for each cassette inspected:
• Site name.
• Inspector’s name.
• Inspection date.
• Train number.
• Cassette position.
• Cassette serial number.
In addition to completing the Inspection Template, take photos at each

step and file them with the completed inspection forms.
After completing the inspection, submit all findings, photographs, and

any updated documents to GE W&PT.
A.7.3.2 INSPECTION FREQUENCY

Inspections should be carried out every 3 months on a single cassette
from each train, using the same cassette during each inspection. This
cassette, known as the “indicator cassette,” acts as a sample for the
entire train, eliminating the need to inspect each individual cassette.

August, 2011 A-137
TIP: After the first For systems with operating temperatures greater than 30ºC (86ºF), or
year of operation, where the possibility that suspended solids might accumulate within the
inspection frequency
can be adjusted based membrane tanks exists, it is recommended that the inspection
on past findings and procedure be carried out on a monthly basis, rather than every 3
recorded trends in
system operation. months.
Contact GE W&PT for assistance with determining the optimum

inspection frequency for your subsystem.
A.7.3.3 BEFORE REMOVING THE CASSETTE

The following information should be recorded before the indicator
cassette is removed from the membrane tank.
A.7.3.3.1 CHECKING AERATION PATTERN

Before the cassette is removed from the membrane tank for inspection,
perform a visual examination of the aeration pattern with the water level
within the membrane tank 7.62 - 10.16 cm (3 - 4 in.) above the top of the
cassette. While the cassette is being aerated, a rectangular bubble
pattern should be visible on the surface of the water directly above it.
Note any inconsistencies, including insufficient or imbalanced air
distribution.
A.7.3.3.2 CHECKING LINES & CONNECTORS

After completing the aeration check, examine the following components
for signs of damage or wear:
HITCH PINS: Confirm that each of the cassette’s hitch pins are fitted
snugly and show no signs of wear.
CAMLOCKS & HOSES: Confirm that all camlocks and hoses connected to
the cassette are in good condition. Note any cracks or discolouration on
hoses and check that all hose clamps are tight.

A-138 August, 2011
A.7.3.4 REMOVING THE CASSETTE
A cassette that has been in service will weigh more than it did when
it was first installed. To avoid severe personal injury caused by a
collapse, confirm that the load limits of all lifting equipment and of
the surface that the cassette will be set on are sufficient.
Refer to A.3.10 Membrane Inspection/Replacement for instructions on

removing cassettes from membrane tanks.
When using a lifting beam to remove a cassette from the membrane

tank, ensure that the following dangerous activities are avoided:
Do not attempt to operate the lifting beam without first having read
and understood the operator’s manual.
• Do not: exceed the rated load of the lifting beam, or use it to lift
anything other than the cassettes it was designed for.
• Do not lift cassettes higher than necessary, and do not leave

suspended cassettes unattended.
• Do not remove the warning or identification labels.
• Do not make alterations to the lifting beam, or attempt to operate

a damaged or malfunctioning lifting beam.
When removing a cassette with accumulated solids, verify the rated

capacity of lifting brackets, cranes, and the cassette lifting frame before
attempting a lift. As the cassette is removed from the tank, use a weight
scale to ensure that components under load are within their design
capacity. Ensure that the cassette remains level throughout the lift and
inspect the aerator plates and tubes for solids accumulation.

August, 2011 A-139
Never spray membranes with a high-pressure water stream.
To reduce the amount of solids on the cassette before lifting, aerate the
cassette without permeation and use a garden hose with a low-
pressure stream to dislodge solids from the cassette.
To ensure that the water pressure in the hose is not excessive, with the
hose held 1 m (3 ft) above the ground, confirm that the stream does not
extend more than 1 m (3 ft) from the hose before reaching the ground
(Figure A.7.1 - Water Pressure Test). A stream that extends any further
with the hose held at this height is too strong to be used on the
membranes.
Figure A.7.1 - Water Pressure Test
A.7.3.5 AFTER REMOVING THE CASSETTE

The following information should be recorded after the indicator
cassette has been removed from the membrane tank.
CASSETTE FRAME AND HARDWARE: Check the cassette frame welds for signs
of leaking or corrosion, and all connections for loose or missing
fasteners.

A-140 August, 2011
LEVELLING PINS: Check the cassette’s levelling pin assemblies for signs of
loosening or wear. Levelling pins that have loosened over time may
result in cassettes becoming misaligned, which will contribute to uneven
aeration and solids accumulation. Refer to Figure A.7.2 - Levelling Pins for
more information.
Figure A.7.2 - Levelling Pins
SOLIDS ACCUMULATION PATTERNS: Take full-length photographs of all four

sides of the cassette. Note any solids accumulation patterns on the
Inspection Template. Contact GE W&PT if excessive solids accumulation
or debris (example: twigs, leaves) is found.
Figure A.7.3 - Acceptable (Left) & Unacceptable (Right) Solids Accumulation

August, 2011 A-141
SHELLS: Check the cassette and membranes closely for signs of aquatic
life, particularly in the form of shells, which can be as small as 1 mm in
length.
Figure A.7.4 - Shells
PERMEATE COLLECTION & SADDLE: Inspect the bottom end-position

permeate collection ports and the top permeate end saddles. Note any
issues on the inspection template.
Figure A.7.5 - Bottom Permeate Port (Left), Top Permeate Saddle (Centre) &
Location of Port & Saddle (Right)

A-142 August, 2011
AERATION TUBES: Clear any blockage found in the aeration tubes and note
the location of plugged or clogged aeration tubes on the inspection
template. To remove blockage, the aeration end caps will need to be
removed. These end caps are located on bottom of the back side of the
cassette. Recheck the aeration pattern after cleaning.
Figure A.7.6 - Aerator Caps
A.7.3.6 REPORTING FINDINGS

When finished, submit inspection results (inspection template and
photos) along with any updated membrane maps to GE W&PT.
A.7.4 INSPECTING MODULE INTERCONNECTING

STRIPS
The Module Interconnecting Strip (MIS) holds groups of membrane
modules together in the cassette. MISs require monthly inspection to
ensure proper operation.

August, 2011 A-143
To complete this inspection, perform the following steps:
1. Visually inspect all of the MISs and verify they are attached.
Figure A.7.7 - MIS Location
2. Verify that all locking keys are tightly locked in the vertical
position.
Figure A.7.8 - Locking Key Locked (Left) & Unlocked (Right)

(Continued on next page)

A-144 August, 2011
3. Inspect the MIS locking pins. The locking pins should be in the
vertical (locked) position.
Figure A.7.9 - Locking Pin Locked (Left) & Unlocked (Right)
4. Check for wear on the MIS. Each locking pin should lock into
position tightly and securely. If the locking pins move freely, the
MIS is worn. Figure A.7.10 - Module Header, Showing Wear
Location shows typical wear location on a module header.
Figure A.7.10 - Module Header, Showing Wear Location
5. Check for independent movement between the module and the

locking key mechanism.
6. Look for wear on the locking key mechanism.

August, 2011 A-145
A.7.5 PREVENTING STAINLESS STEEL

CORROSION
A water treatment system may include various stainless steel
components, such as piping and associated fittings and connectors.
System operators must follow the preventive maintenance steps
provided below in order to prevent corrosion from forming on stainless
steel piping and components.
A.7.5.1 CAUSES OF CORROSION

Stainless steel corrosion is primarily caused by surface contamination
and/or chlorine attack. Surface contamination can cause serious
corrosion if it is not removed quickly.
SURFACE CONTAMINATION: When the piping is installed with carbon steel

tools or not protected from nearby welding or grinding work, carbon
steel particles may embed in stainless steel surfaces. Exposure to rusty
water or iron-laden dust and dirt can also cause surface corrosion.
CHLORINE ATTACK: Chlorine-induced corrosion can occur when

chlorinated water splashes on piping or when chlorine vapors condense
on the piping due to inadequate ventilation or high humidity.
A.7.5.2 PREVENTING CORROSION

Take the following measures to help prevent corrosion:
CLEAN REGULARLY: Piping and equipment should be kept clean and dry.
Keep potential contaminants (example: solvents, tools, and equipment),
away from stainless steel components.
MINIMIZE CHLORINE CONTACT: Control splashing or condensation of

chlorinated water streams. Remove contamination as soon as it is
observed. Minimize work near stainless steel components. Avoid welding
or grinding work. If work must be performed near stainless steel
components, ensure that they are properly protected.

A-146 August, 2011
HANDLING AND INSTALLING COMPONENTS: Properly weld and passivate new

or repaired piping. Avoid the use of dissimilar metal fasteners and joining
components. Ensure that the interior and exterior surfaces of new
components are thoroughly cleaned before installation.
If excessive condensation appears on piping surfaces, adjust the

ventilation system or add dehumidification.
A.7.5.3 DETECTING, CLEANING, & REPAIRING CORROSION

The following sections include recommendations on detecting, cleaning,
and repairing corroded or contaminated components.
A.7.5.3.1 DETECTING EMBEDDED IRON

The simplest test for free, embedded iron is to wash down the stainless
steel part with clean water, allow it to dry (or drain), and wait 24 hours. If
there are rust streaks on the surface of the stainless steel, iron is present.
The ferroxyl test is a more sensitive indication of embedded iron. The

system operator applies the solution with a spray bottle and checks for
a blue stain within 15 seconds of the application. If a blue stain appears,
there is iron contamination.
Table A.7.2 - Ingredients of the Ferroxyl Test Solution
Ingredient Volume/Weight
Distilled Water 1,000 mL
Nitric Acid, 60-67% 20 mL
Potassium Ferricyanide 30 g
When handling this test solution, wear rubber gloves, protective

clothing, and face shields. Avoid inhaling the atomized spray.
Prepare the solution specified in Table A.7.2 - Ingredients of the Ferroxyl

Test Solution by first adding the nitric acid to the distilled water, mixing
well, and then adding the potassium ferricyanide.

August, 2011 A-147
A.7.5.3.2 CLEANING & REPAIRING SURFACE CORROSION
Do not allow cleaning compounds to fall into the membrane tanks.
Any corrosion found on a stainless steel surface can be removed by

scrubbing with the appropriate wire brush. After the oxidized areas have
been brushed clean, apply a pickling paste to the affected area to
chemically clean the surface and remove any embedded contaminants.
Table A.7.3 - Effective Cleaning Methods
Job Cleaning Agents Comments
Routine cleaning Warm water, soap, ammonia, Apply with a sponge or soft
and detergent cloth.
Smears and fingerprints 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner Provides a barrier film to
and Polish, Arcal 20, Lac-O- minimize fingerprints.
Nu, Lumin Wash, Stainless
Shine
Stubborn stains and 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner Using a dry or damp cloth,
discoloration and Polish, Twinkle, Liquid Nu rub lightly in the direction of
Steel, Household Cleaners the polish lines of the
stainless steel.
Grease and oil Any good commercial Apply with a sponge or soft
detergent or caustic cleaner. cloth in the direction of the
polish lines of the stainless
steel.
As an added precaution, there are various protective coatings that can

be used to help prevent stainless steel contamination and corrosion.
Clear lacquers are preferred over the colored lacquers and paints as
they allow the operator to check the condition of the stainless steel
surface below the coating.

A-148 August, 2011
A.8
TROUBLESHOOTING
This page has been
A.8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding some of the most common
issues and frequently asked questions related to ZeeWeed membranes
and associated components.
Several training courses related to troubleshooting techniques and skills

are available to system operators upon request. Contact GE W&PT for
more information.
To avoid injury or property damage while performing the

troubleshooting procedures outlined in this section, adhere to the
following points.
• When working with a pressurized system, ensure that all

associated components and piping have been fully
depressurized before beginning work. In the case of valves
connected to compressed air lines, the line must be fully
disconnected from the valve before work may begin. Simply
actuating the valve will not sufficiently depressurize the line.
• All routine troubleshooting must be carried out according to the

safety regulations and instructions specified by the supplier of
the component. Read all relevant safety information provided in
Volume I - Vendor Data Manual before attempting repairs.
• Wear suitable protective equipment when working with pumps,

piping, or other components that may have contained caustic or
acidic chemicals.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Troubleshooting

August, 2011 A-151
A.8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING QUICK-REFERENCE

Table A.8.1 - Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Sheet provides solutions
for common issues related to subsystem components and is intended
only as a brief summary. Refer to the sections below and to Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual for more detailed troubleshooting information
regarding specific components.
In the event of a contradiction between information provided in this

section and that supplied by the manufacturer, the manufacturer’s
information will always take precedence.
If problems discussed in this section persist or other difficulties arise,

contact GE W&PT. Completed operating logsheets will be necessary in
order for GE W&PT representatives to determine the cause of the issue.
Troubleshooting procedures involving mechanical or electrical

components should be performed only by qualified personnel. All
operators must familiarize themselves with the applicable safety
information before performing any of the procedures outlined here.
ZeeWeed 500D - Troubleshooting Rev. 0

A-152 August, 2011
Table A.8.1 - Troubleshooting Quick-Reference Sheet

Problem Cause Corrective Action
Low flow shutdown Flow valve or solenoid valve Check valves for correct
downstream of pump operation
discharge is closed
Hand valves on pump Verify correct position of
discharge are throttled or hand valve, as per P&IDs
closed
High TMP shutdown (low Hand valve upstream of Verify correct position of
pressure) pump inlet is throttled or hand valve, as per P&IDs
closed
System recovery has drifted Compare current with design
to higher than designed limit system recovery
Membranes require cleaning Perform Recovery Clean as
per A.5.6.4 Recovery Clean
PID tuning overshooting the Contact GE W&PT
flow or pressure control
setpoints after backpulse
Permeate header pressure Check instrument calibration;
transmitter or any of the check readings on HMI
membrane tank level float
switches malfunctioning
High-pressure shutdown Hand valve upstream of Verify the correct position of
(backpulse) pump inlet is throttled or hand valves, as per P&IDs
closed
System recovery has drifted Compare current with design
to higher than designed limit system recovery
Timers for pressure Contact GE W&PT
shutdowns too quick
Level problems (analog) Failed 24 V DC power supply Verify power supply outlet
Problems with moisture in Check probe seals
probe
Level problems (digital) Switch compromised by Inspect switch
chemicals
Blown fuse Inspect fuses, replace as
needed
Switch programmed Verify switch input to PLC
incorrectly compared to program
Leaking or cut fiber Damaged fiber Repair fiber as per A.4.6
Repairing Fibers

August, 2011 A-153
A.8.3 PERMEATE QUALITY

Several issues may result in reduced permeate quality, though the most
common are damaged membranes and a leak in the cassette seal. The
following information can be used to address both of these problems.
A.8.3.1 MEMBRANE DAMAGE

To determine if membrane fibers have been damaged, examine the
permeate from each membrane cassette. If the permeate does not meet
acceptable standards, it is likely that a module within that cassette
contains one or more damaged fibers. After identifying the cassette,
locate the damaged module by either visual fiber inspection or by
conducting a bubble test. Inspect and repair or replace any damaged
modules to bring the overall system performance up to appropriate
levels.
Refer to A.3.9.4 Bubble Test in the appendix A.3 - Installation & Testing for
information regarding the bubble test procedure, A.3.10 Membrane
Inspection/Replacement in the appendix A.3 - Installation & Testing for
more about visually inspecting membranes, and A.4.6 Repairing Fibers in
the appendix A.4 - Membrane Care for fiber repair procedures.
A.8.3.2 CASSETTE SEAL LEAKAGE

A leak in a cassette seal may be the result of either improper installation
or gradual loosening during operation. Check these connections
periodically to ensure that they are properly installed and to avoid
permeate contamination by feedwater.

A-154 August, 2011
A.8.4 PROCESS PUMP

A centrifugal pump will lose its prime if excessive amounts of air enter
the flow. Water in contact with air at atmospheric pressure naturally
contains dissolved gases. After the water crosses the membrane
boundary, the lower pressure encountered within the membranes
reduces the solubility of these gases, creating bubbles in the permeate
flow.
The ejector located upstream from the process pump is intended to

remove entrained air from the permeate flow before it encounters the
pump, but this may not always prevent air from disrupting the pump’s
operation.
PROBLEM: The process pump will not achieve prime due to air inside
permeate header.
Possible causes include the following:
• Air leaks along piping.
• Missing or pinched camlock O-rings on permeate piping.
• Cracks along PVC piping.
• Failed check valves.
• Permeate header sample valves are not closed properly.
• Cracked air separator and/or associated spool fittings.
• Excessive TMP.
Recommended solutions include the following:
• Close all permeate header sample valves tightly.
• If a leak is suspected, use a spray bottle to coat fittings and piping

along the permeate header with a soap solution and watch for
soap bubbles formed during a Backpulse sequence (when the
header is positively pressurized). After locating the leak(s), repair
or replace damaged connectors, fittings, or piping as needed.

August, 2011 A-155
• Ensure that the backpulse tank volume is well above the

discharge point on the tank.
• Determine if the air release valve rubber seat has become stuck.
If so, it will prevent air from being vented from the permeate
header.
• The higher the TMP, the greater the likelihood of air being pulled
across the membranes. If high TMP is suspected of causing
excessive entrained air within the permeate header, initiate a
Recovery Clean to restore TMP to an optimal level.
• Request a program change to ensure that flow valves remain

open in STANDBY.
A.8.5 BACKPULSE TANK ALARM

PROBLEM: Backpulse tank level low alarm. Plant alarm does not respond
to system reset or full restart.
• Backpulse tank liquid level is at or below the low low setpoint.
• Level transmitter has failed.
To resolve this issue, perform the following steps:
1. At the HMI, select the backpulse tank LIT setpoints button and
record each of the four setpoints (example: LAHH, LAH, LAL and
LALL).
2. Record the current level within the backpulse tank and compare
with the setpoints shown on the HMI.
3. If the current backpulse tank level is at or below the LAL setpoint,

at the HMI, lower the LAL setpoint to a value below the actual
tank level. If this is not possible, bring the tank level above the LAL
setpoint by filling it with filtered water.

A-156 August, 2011
4. To clear the alarm, select the Alarm Reset button.
5. Activate the system as outlined under 3.3 Starting Up the System.
PROBLEM: Backpulse tank level low low alarm. The pump is set in STOP
mode.
• Backpulse tank level is at or below the low low setpoint.
• Level transmitter has failed.
To resolve this issue, perform the following steps:
1. Check the level in the backpulse tank. If the level is not low, then
the transmitter is not functioning correctly. Refer to Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual for troubleshooting procedures.
2. Ensure the drain valve for the backpulse tank is closed.
3. Confirm that the flow valve and check valve are functioning
correctly.
4. When the level of the backpulse tank returns to the operating

level, switch the pump back to AUTO.
A.8.6 AIR RELEASE VALVES

PROBLEM: Air cannot be removed from the permeate header, due either
to the air release valve seat sticking in the top discharge port on the
valve housing, or blockage inside the orifice port.
• Rust formed on the internal surface of the air release valve is

preventing the float from rising and falling freely inside the
housing.

August, 2011 A-157
• The seat is set too far away from the top side of the support arm.
• Flakes of rust from a non-epoxy–coated air release valve housing

have broken free and lodged in the orifice vent, creating a
blockage and preventing air from being removed from the air
separator.
Recommended solutions include the following:
• Shut down the train, remove the air release valve housing cover,
and inspect the interior surface of the air release valve. Ensure
that the valve fits snugly against the orifice and check for rust. If
rust is present, refer to Volume I - Vendor Data Manual for
additional troubleshooting information.
• Ensure that the float moves freely inside the air release valve
housing. If not, remove any obstructions preventing movement.
A.8.7 GENERAL COMPONENT FAILURE

If a component has failed and cannot be repaired by performing
maintenance and troubleshooting procedures as outlined in Volume I -
Vendor Data Manual, ensure that the component has been locked out (if
applicable), and then record the make, model, part number, and tag
number.
After isolating and documenting the component, check the RSPL

provided Section 5 - Recommended Spare Parts List for parts availability
and contact GE W&PT to order a replacement.

A-158 August, 2011
A.9
MONITORING PERFORMANCE
This page has been
A.9.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information regarding the procedures, tools, and
schedules associated with gathering and tracking subsystem
performance data. This information is essential when assessing long-
standing performance issues, establishing trends, and determining the
durability of various components.
A.9.2 LOGSHEETS
Logsheets, which are provided as electronic copies, are used for
manually recording operational data and analytical results.
PERFORMANCE LOGSHEETS: Performance logsheets include those used for

recording process data. Electronic copies of these documents will be
provided by GE W&PT. Completed performance logsheets should be
emailed to GE W&PT on a weekly basis in order to facilitate GE W&PT's
ability to provide guidance.
SETPOINT LOGSHEET: The setpoint logsheet is used to record all changes

made to setpoints associated with the subsystem or its various
components (example: pumps). Because a complete loss of power to the
system will cause the PLC to reboot using the original setpoints stored in
the E2PROM, it is essential that this logsheet be updated whenever
setpoints are changed so that the most recent values can be reentered.
A.9.3 ZENOTRAC
ZenoTrac is a powerful system support tool available as an option for all
GE W&PT clients. Contact GE W&PT for more information about
ZenoTrac.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Monitoring Performance

August, 2011 A-163
This page has been
A.10
CALCULATIONS
This page has been
A.10.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides calculations used to determine chemical quantities
required for cleaning, maintenance, and various other subsystem
procedures. These calculations are intended as general examples only;
additional information specific to your subsystem may be provided by
GE W&PT personnel during initial startup and commissioning.
A.10.2 UNIT CONVERSIONS

TIP: Multiply a value Convert all values to metric equivalents before performing the
in US gpm by 3.785 to calculations provided in this section.
get the equivalent in
lpm, and a value in lb/
ft3 by 0.016 to get the To find the corresponding value in kg/L for a known solution density, look
equivalent in kg/L.
up the density in Table A.10.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities.
Concentrations are given as weight percentages. To create a solution

using a dry chemical, use [x]/(1-[x]) kg of chemical for every liter of water,
where [x] is the solution concentration written as a decimal.
EXAMPLE: To make a 35% calcium chloride solution, 0.35/(1-0.35) = 0.538

kg of calcium chloride for every liter of water used to make the solution.
Rev. 0 ZeeWeed 500D - Calculations

August, 2011 A-167
Table A.10.1 - Solution Concentrations and Densities

Solution Concentration
Chemical Solution Density (kg/L)
(Weight%)
Aluminum sulfate 48.50 1.335
Ammonium chloride 10.00 1.080
Calcium chloride (35% soln.) 35.00 1.250
Calcium chloride (15% soln.) 15.00 1.150
Calcium hydroxide 5.00 1.050
Ferric chloride 35.00 1.360
MC-1 50.00 1.240
Phosphoric acid (75% soln.) 75.00 1.582
Phosphoric acid (85% soln.) 85.00 1.694
Polyaluminum chloride 33.00 1.205
Potash 25.00 1.150
Potassium permanganate 3.00 1.030
Powdered activated carbon 5.00 1.025
slurry
Sodium aluminate (10% soln.) 10.00 1.090
Sodium aluminate (32% soln.) 32.00 1.300
Sodium bicarbonate 3.50 1.035
Sodium bisulfite 40.00 1.370
Sodium carbonate 10.00 1.110
Sodium hydroxide (25% soln.) 25.00 1.260
Sodium hydroxide (50% soln.) 50.00 1.520
Sodium hypochlorite (12% soln.) 12.00 1.168
Sodium hypochlorite (6% soln.) 6.00 1.076
Sulfuric acid (77.67% soln.) 77.67 1.704
Sulfuric acid (93.19% soln.) 93.19 1.834
Sulfuric acid (98% soln.) 98.00 1.836
Urea 23.00 1.000
ZenoTreat 150 (antiscalant) 100.00 1.150
ZenoTreat 450 (antiscalant) 100.00 1.080
NOTES:
• Before mixing solution, consult the applicable MSDS for
chemical purity.
ZeeWeed 500D - Calculations Rev. 0

A-168 August, 2011
A.10.3 GENERAL DOSING CALCULATION

To determine the amount of chemical(s) required when dosing the
subsystem, use the following calculation:
Calculate the flow rate of 35% ferric chloride solution to dose to 60 ppm
in a 100 lpm stream.
Figure A.10.1 - Dosing Calculation Diagram
Feedwater flow rate Qf = 100 lpm
Chemical concentration in feedwater stream Cf = 60 ppm (60 mg/L)
Stock solution concentration Cc = 35% by weight

Stock solution density c = 1.36 kg/L
The mass flow rate of ferric chloride in the feedwater stream equals the
mass flow rate of ferric chloride dosed.
In the equations below, Qf and Qc are in lpm, Cf is in mg/Lc is in kg/L,

and Cc is weight percent written as a decimal (example: 35% as 0.35).
Qf x Cf
Qc =
c x Cc x 106
Example:
100 x 60
= 0.0126 lpm
1.36 x 0.35 x 106
mg FeCl3 L FeCl3 soln. 35 kg FeCl3 6

100 L feed x 60 = Qc x 1.36 kg soln. x x 10 mg
minute L feed minute L soln. 100 kg soln. kg

August, 2011 A-169
If the required nutrient concentration (nitrogen or phosphorus) in the

feedwater stream (Cf) is given in mg/L (or ppm), then an extra calculation
step must be included.
Calculate the chemical flowrate according to the general example

above, and then divide this flowrate by the mass percent nitrogen or
phosphorus in the chemical being used (refer to Table A.10.2 - Mass
Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical.
Table A.10.2 - Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in Chemical

Mass Percent Nitrogen or Phosphorus in
Chemical
Pure Chemical
Ammonium chloride 26.1%
Urea 46.6%
Phosphoric acid 31.6%
A.10.4 CALCULATING MEMBRANE PERMEABILITY

To gauge the effectiveness of a cleaning session, calculate the overall
permeability of the membranes before versus after the session has been
performed.
Refer to the example below when calculating membrane permeability.
EXAMPLE: A subsystem has a typical operating temperature of 20ºC

(68ºF) (T1) and an actual (observed) operating temperature of 15ºC (59ºF)
(T2). The permeate flowrate was recorded at 3,285.4 lpm (868 gpm) at a
membrane pressure of 0.414 bar (6 psi), while total membrane surface
area equals 4,548.53 m2 (48,960 ft2).
1. Calculate the membrane area:
Membrane area Number of modules Number of cassettes Surface area per

= x x
per train per cassette per train module
48 modules per
x 3 cassettes per train x 340 ft2 per module = 48,960 ft2 per train
cassette

A-170 August, 2011
2. Convert flow rate to flux at the observed temperature:
Flow Number of
Flux at 59ºF = x
Membrane surface area per train minutes per day
868 gpm
x 1,440 minutes per day = 25.5 gfd
48,960 in.2 per train
3. Correct the flux value from the observed temperature (15ºC

(59ºF)) (T2) to the reference temperature (20ºC (68ºF)) (T1).
Viscosity values required for this calculation can be found in
Table A.10.3 - Water Viscosity.
Table A.10.3 - Water Viscosity

Temperature Viscosity Temperature Viscosity Temperature Viscosity
°C °F cP °C °F cP °C °F cP
1 34 1.7311 23 73 0.9356 45 113 0.5988
2 36 1.6736 24 75 0.9142 46 115 0.5884
3 37 1.6192 25 77 0.8935 47 117 0.5782
4 39 1.5677 26 79 0.8736 48 118 0.5683
5 41 1.5188 27 81 0.8544 49 120 0.5587
6 43 1.4723 28 82 0.8359 50 122 0.5494
7 45 1.4281 29 84 0.8180 51 124 0.5403
8 46 1.3860 30 86 0.8007 52 126 0.5315
9 48 1.3459 31 88 0.7840 53 127 0.5229
10 50 1.3077 32 90 0.7679 54 129 0.5145
11 52 1.2712 33 91 0.7523 55 131 0.5064
12 54 1.2362 34 93 0.7372 56 133 0.4984
13 55 1.2029 35 95 0.7225 57 135 0.4907
14 57 1.1709 36 97 0.7084 58 136 0.4832
15 59 1.1403 37 99 0.6946 59 138 0.4758
16 61 1.1109 38 100 0.6813 60 140 0.4687
17 63 1.0828 39 102 0.6685 61 142 0.4617
18 64 1.0558 40 104 0.6560 62 144 0.4549
19 66 1.0298 41 106 0.6438 63 145 0.4482
20 68 1.0049 42 108 0.6321 64 147 0.4418
21 70 0.9809 43 109 0.6207 65 149 0.4355
22 72 0.9578 44 111 0.6096

August, 2011 A-171
viscosity at T1
Flux at T1 = Flux at T2 x
viscosity at T2
1.0049
25.5 gfd x = 22.47 gfd
1.1403
4. Using the recorded membrane pressure, convert the

temperature-corrected flux to membrane permeability.
Membrane Corrected flux

=
permeability Membrane pressure
22.47 gfd
= 3.7 gfd per 1 psi
6 psi
In order to accurately assess the effectiveness of a cleaning procedure,

measure and record the membrane permeability immediately before
and after each cleaning session is performed.

A-172 August, 2011

Doc PKG Vol II - O&M Manual (Rev 0)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Doc PKG Vol II - O&M Manual (Rev 0)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Water & Process

OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CLIENT: Town of Taos MBR

LOCATION: Town of Taos, NM

DATE: August, 2011

Section 1 - General Safety

Section 2 - System Overview

Section 3 - Operating the System

Section 4 - Control Documentation

Section 5 - Recommended Spare Parts List

Section 6 - Material Safety Data Sheets

Section 7 - Service & Support

Appendix A - ZeeWeed 500D

A.2 - Subsystem Overview

A.3 - Installation & Testing

A.3.7.8.2 Uprighting Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38

A.4 - Membrane Care

A.4.4.2.2 Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94

A.5 - Cleaning & Ventilation

A.6 - Monitoring Membrane Integrity

A.7 - Preventive Maintenance

A.7.3.1 Gathering & Recording Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137

A.9 - Monitoring Performance

Table i.i - Tagged Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Figure A.2.1 - Typical ZeeWeed System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-5

Figure A.4.14 - Slide the Modules to the Stop Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82

Failure to adhere to the instructions provided in this manual may

USING THIS MANUAL

Bold - indicates a control with which the reader is required to interact.

Bold italicized - indicates important information.

UPPERCASE - indicates the name of a mode or state of operation.

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided,

Warns against an unsafe situation or practice that, if not avoided, will

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Record the date of each change in the following table:

Change Date Change Date Change Date

TAGGED COMPONENTS WITHIN THIS

Table i.i - Tagged Components

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for chemicals provided by GE W&PT

Failure by facility management or operators to adhere to the

1.2 PERSONAL SAFETY

1.2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

1.2.1.1 HEAD & FACIAL PROTECTION

Rev. 0 General Safety

• When handling chemicals or working near pressurized lines, (air

• When exposed to noise levels that exceed 85 dB, wear adequate

1.2.1.2 LIMB PROTECTION

1.2.1.3 FALL PROTECTION

General Safety Rev. 0

1.3 SAFETY ON SITE

1.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

• Install flange guards on all chemical lines.

• Install spray curtains or Plexiglas shields around all chemical

• Ensure that chemical-resistant protective clothing is worn by all

• When preparing to perform maintenance on pipes or tubing,

Rev. 0 General Safety

• Ensure that all personnel working with hazardous chemicals are

• Personnel engaged in a procedure that involves obvious risk of

• Personnel engaged in a procedure they do not feel properly

1.3.2 SAFETY CHECKLIST

Table 1.1 - Safety Checklist